GE Carbon Monoxide Alarm GFK 0825F User Manual

GE Fanuc Automation  
Programmable Control Products  
Field Control™  
Genius® Bus Interface Unit  
User’s Manual  
GFK-0825F  
October 1999  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preface  
Content of this Manual  
This manual describes the Field Control® Genius™ Bus Interface Unit (IC670GBI002). It explains  
operation of the Bus Interface Unit as a Genius bus device. It also contains complete configuration  
instructions for the Bus Interface Unit and all Field Control I/O modules.  
Chapter 1. Introduction: Chapter 1 introduces Field Control systems, the Genius Bus Interface  
Unit, and other equipment that may be used with the Bus Interface Unit. It will help you locate  
more information about the components and operation of Field Control products.  
Chapter 2. Description: Chapter 2 describes the Genius Bus Interface Unit module, the Bus  
Interface Unit Power Supply, and the Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block, and lists their  
specifications.  
Chapter 3. Installation: Chapter 3 describes Bus Interface Unit installation and gives system  
installation guidelines.  
Chapter 4. Operation: Chapter 4 explains how a Bus Interface Unit interacts with the modules in  
its station, how it stores data, and how it exchanges data with a PLC or other type of system host.  
Chapter 5. Station Configuration: Chapter 5 explains how to configure a Bus Interface Unit and  
the modules in a station using a Hand-held Monitor.  
Chapter 6. Diagnostics and Fault Clearing: Chapter 6 describes the diagnostics capabilities of  
the Bus Interface Unit and explains how faults are cleared.  
Chapter 7. Monitoring and Controlling Field Control Data: Chapter 7 explains how to monitor  
or control Field Control I/O data using Genius Hand-held Monitor or a programmer.  
Chapter 8. Datagrams: Chapter 8 lists datagrams that can be sent to a Bus Interface Unit, and  
shows the datagram formats for Field Control modules.  
Appendix A. Scaling Analog Channels: Appendix A explains how to select scaling values when  
configuring an analog input or output. (Configuration instructions are in chapter 5).  
Appendix B. Installing Additional Suppression: Appendix B describes some precautions that  
can be taken in an installation to help assure proper operation.  
Appendix C. The Genius Serial Bus: This appendix describes the selection and operating  
characteristics of the bus cable that links Genius devices.  
Appendix D. Configuration Examples: This appendix includes examples of different Field Control I/O  
Station configurations.  
GFK-0825F  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preface  
Related Publications  
For more information, refer to these publications:  
Field Control I/O Modules User's Manual (GFK-0826). This book describes Field Control I/O  
Modules and I/O Terminal Blocks and explains how to install them.  
The Series 90® Micro Field Processor User's Manual (GFK-1171). This book describes the  
Micro Field Processor (IC670MFP100) and provides installation procedures, operation  
information, and diagnostics information.  
Genius I/O System User's Manual (GEK-90486-1). Reference manual for system designers,  
programmers, and others involved in integrating Genius I/O products in a PLC or host computer  
environment. This book provides a system overview, and describes the types of systems that can be  
created using Genius products. Datagrams, Global Data, and data formats are defined.  
Series 90® 30 Bus Controller User's Manual (GFK-1034). Reference manual for the Bus  
Controller, which interfaces a Genius bus to a Series 90-30 PLC. This book describes the  
installation and operation of the Bus Controller.  
Series Six® Bus Controller User's Manual (GFK-0171). Reference manual for the Bus Controller,  
which interfaces a Genius bus to a Series Six PLC. This book describes the installation and  
operation of the Bus Controller. It also contains the programming information needed to interface  
Genius I/O devices to a Series Six PLC.  
Series Five® Bus Controller User's Manual (GFK-0248). Reference manual for the Bus  
Controller, which interfaces a Genius bus to a Series Five PLC. This book describes the installation  
and operation of the Bus Controller. It also contains the programming information needed to  
interface Genius I/O devices to a Series Five PLC.  
Genius I/O PCIM User's Manual (GFK-0074). Reference manual for the PCIM, which interfaces  
a Genius bus to a suitable host computer. This book describes the installation and operation of the  
PCIM. It also contains the programming information needed to interface Genius I/O devices to a  
host computer.  
Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards (GFK-1179)  
Jeanne Grimsby  
Lead Technical Writer for I/O Products  
iv  
Field Control™ Genius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual– October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Chapter 1  
Introduction..................................................................................................... 1-1  
Overview......................................................................................................................1-1  
Field Control Modules..................................................................................................1-2  
Environmental Specifications........................................................................................1-5  
Configuration for Field Control.....................................................................................1-6  
Field Control in a Genius System..................................................................................1-7  
Required Genius and Host System Equipment...............................................................1-9  
Using Field Control in a CPU Redundancy System..................................................... 1-10  
Using Field Control in a Genius Bus Redundancy System........................................... 1-11  
Chapter 2  
Description....................................................................................................... 2-1  
Genius Bus Interface Unit.............................................................................................2-1  
Bus Interface Unit Power Supply ..................................................................................2-3  
Backplane Current ........................................................................................................2-4  
Bus Interface Unit Power Dissipation............................................................................2-5  
Load Requirements for Hardware Components .............................................................2-6  
Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block................................................................................2-8  
Functional Specifications..............................................................................................2-9  
Chapter 3  
Installation....................................................................................................... 3-1  
Preinstallation Check....................................................................................................3-2  
Static Protection............................................................................................................3-2  
Hand-held Monitor Connector ......................................................................................3-2  
System Wiring Guidelines ............................................................................................3-3  
Installing Additional Suppression..................................................................................3-3  
System Grounding........................................................................................................3-4  
Locations for Field Control...........................................................................................3-5  
Installing the DIN Rail..................................................................................................3-5  
Installing the Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block on the DIN Rail.................................3-7  
Installing the Cables Between Terminal Blocks.............................................................3-8  
Power Wiring to the Bus Interface Unit.........................................................................3-9  
Connecting the Communications Bus.......................................................................... 3-10  
Bus Cables.................................................................................................................. 3-10  
Making Bus Connections............................................................................................ 3-11  
Installing the Bus Interface Unit on the Terminal Block .............................................. 3-14  
Removing the Bus Interface Unit from the Terminal Block ......................................... 3-14  
Removing/Replacing the Bus Interface Unit Fuse ....................................................... 3-15  
Upgrading the BIU Firmware...................................................................................... 3-16  
GFK-0825F  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Chapter 4  
Operation......................................................................................................... 4-1  
BIU Data Handling at the I/O Station............................................................................4-2  
I/O Data for Conventional Modules ..............................................................................4-3  
I/O Data, Status Data, and Control Data for Intelligent Modules....................................4-3  
Group Data for Intelligent Modules...............................................................................4-4  
The BIU Sweep ............................................................................................................4-5  
BIU Backplane Scan Time............................................................................................4-7  
Data Transfer Between the BIU and the Host................................................................4-9  
Data in the BIU's Network (Bus) Map...........................................................................4-9  
Communications on the Genius Bus..............................................................................4-9  
Input Data Sent by the Bus Interface Unit ................................................................... 4-10  
Outputs from the Host to the BIU................................................................................ 4-11  
Genius Bus Scan Time................................................................................................ 4-12  
Operation of the BIU with a Micro Field Processor..................................................... 4-14  
MFP and BIU Synchronization ................................................................................... 4-14  
MFP I/O References ................................................................................................... 4-14  
MFP Operating Modes................................................................................................ 4-14  
Overview of Synchronous Operation........................................................................... 4-16  
Backing Up Micro Field Processor Outputs ................................................................ 4-17  
How the Network Backs Up MFP Outputs.................................................................. 4-18  
Backing Up BIU Outputs with a Micro Field Processor............................................... 4-19  
Example Ladder Logic................................................................................................ 4-20  
Chapter 5  
Station Configuration...................................................................................... 5-1  
For Additional Information, Also See: ..........................................................................5-1  
Configuring the Serial Bus Address and Baud Rate.......................................................5-2  
Special Instructions for Series 90-70 PLC Systems .......................................................5-2  
Set Up the Hand-held Monitor ......................................................................................5-3  
Create a New Configuration..........................................................................................5-4  
Assigning a Serial Bus Address to a New BIU..............................................................5-4  
Configure the Bus Interface Unit...................................................................................5-5  
Field Control HHM Menu Overview.............................................................................5-6  
Change the Serial Bus Address of the Bus Interface Unit ..............................................5-7  
Select the Baud Rate.....................................................................................................5-8  
Select a Series Six or Series Five PLC Reference Address.............................................5-9  
Configure Fault Reporting .......................................................................................... 5-10  
Configure Genius Bus Redundancy............................................................................. 5-11  
Configure CPU Redundancy....................................................................................... 5-12  
Configure Field Control Modules................................................................................ 5-15  
Enable/Disable the I/O Scan ....................................................................................... 5-15  
vi  
Field Control™ Genius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual– October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Disable Network I/O Updates ..................................................................................... 5-15  
Configure the Network Map for the Bus Interface Unit ............................................... 5-16  
Configuring Extra References in the BIU I/O Map...................................................... 5-17  
Add Modules and Assign References.......................................................................... 5-20  
Configure a Discrete Input Module............................................................................. 5-22  
Configure a Discrete Output Module........................................................................... 5-24  
Configure a Discrete Input/Output Module.................................................................. 5-26  
Configure a Conventional Analog Input Module......................................................... 5-29  
Configure a Conventional Analog Output Module....................................................... 5-35  
Configure a 16-Point Grouped Analog Input Module .................................................. 5-40  
Configure an 8-Point Grouped Analog Voltage Input Module ..................................... 5-48  
Configure a 16-Point Grouped Analog Voltage Input Module ..................................... 5-56  
Circuit Configuration.................................................................................................. 5-60  
Configure an RTD Input Module ................................................................................ 5-64  
Circuit Configuration.................................................................................................. 5-67  
Configuring a Thermocouple Input Module................................................................. 5-72  
Configure an 8-Point Analog Voltage Output Module................................................. 5-81  
Configure an 8-Point Analog Current Output Module ................................................. 5-90  
Configure a Micro Field Processor.............................................................................. 5-99  
Chapter 6  
Diagnostics and Fault Clearing....................................................................... 6-1  
Diagnostics and Fault Clearing for Intelligent Modules .................................................6-1  
Diagnostics and Fault Clearing for the BIU and Conventional Modules.........................6-2  
Display and Clear Faults from a Genius Hand-held Monitor..........................................6-3  
Display and Clear Faults from a PLC............................................................................6-5  
Series 90 PLC: I/O Fault Table ....................................................................................6-5  
Series 90 PLC: PLC Fault Table ...................................................................................6-5  
Series Five or Series Six PLC .......................................................................................6-5  
GFK-0825F  
Contents  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Chapter 7  
Monitoring and Controlling Field Control Data............................................ 7-1  
Overview......................................................................................................................7-2  
Forcing Circuits............................................................................................................7-2  
Overriding I/O Circuits.................................................................................................7-2  
Monitor/Control I/O Data: Genius Hand-held Monitor..................................................7-3  
Forcing/Unforcing the Displayed Reference..................................................................7-5  
Monitor/Control I/O Data: Series 90 PLC ....................................................................7-6  
Monitor/Control I/O Data: Series Six PLC or Series Five PLC.....................................7-6  
Monitor/Control I/O Data: Computer............................................................................7-7  
Chapter 8  
Datagrams ....................................................................................................... 8-1  
Datagram Types............................................................................................................8-2  
Read Map.....................................................................................................................8-3  
Read Map Reply...........................................................................................................8-3  
Write Map ....................................................................................................................8-4  
Report Fault Datagram Format......................................................................................8-5  
Configuration Data .......................................................................................................8-7  
Read Configuration Data ..............................................................................................8-7  
Set Bus Interface Unit Operating Mode....................................................................... 8-29  
Set Micro Field Processor Operating Mode................................................................. 8-29  
Intelligent Analog Module Recalibration Datagram..................................................... 8-30  
Read I/O Forces.......................................................................................................... 8-32  
Read I/O Forces Reply................................................................................................ 8-32  
Read Slot Diagnostics................................................................................................. 8-33  
Read Slot Diagnostics Reply....................................................................................... 8-33  
viii  
Field Control™ Genius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual– October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Appendix A Scaling Analog Channels.................................................................................A-1  
How Scaling Works..................................................................................................... A-1  
Scaling Values for 1mV or 1 A Engineering Units: BIU Version 1.3........................... A-2  
µ
Scaling Values for 1mV or 1 A Engineering Units: BIU.............................................. A-3  
µ
Measuring Scaling Values............................................................................................ A-4  
Example of Scaling an Analog Input............................................................................ A-5  
Appendix B  
Installing Additional Suppression ..................................................................B-1  
Suppression at the Power Lines.................................................................................... B-1  
Suppression for Devices in an Enclosure...................................................................... B-2  
Suppression at the Communications Line..................................................................... B-2  
Appendix C The Genius Serial Bus.....................................................................................C-1  
Wiring Guidelines........................................................................................................ C-1  
Electrical Interface....................................................................................................... C-2  
Genius Transceiver Electrical Specification ................................................................. C-3  
Selecting a Cable Type ................................................................................................ C-4  
Serial Bus Waveforms ................................................................................................. C-5  
Using Other Cable Types............................................................................................. C-6  
Serial Data Format....................................................................................................... C-8  
Bus Access .................................................................................................................. C-9  
Bus Length................................................................................................................ C-10  
Baud Rate Selection................................................................................................... C-10  
Bus Ambient Electrical Information........................................................................... C-11  
Lightning Transient Suppression................................................................................ C-11  
Appendix D Configuration Examples .................................................................................D-1  
Example 1: Discrete Data, Network Processing............................................................ D-1  
Example 2: Discrete and Analog Data, Network Processing......................................... D-2  
Example 3: Discrete and Analog Data, Network and Local Processing......................... D-3  
Example 4: Discrete and Analog Data, Network and Local Processing and Group Data  
Moves ...................................................................................................................... D-4  
Example 5: Group Move............................................................................................. D-6  
GFK-0825F  
Contents  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
Chapter  
1
This chapter introduces Field Control modules, the Genius Bus Interface Unit, and other  
equipment that may be used with the Bus Interface Unit. It will help you locate more information  
in other Field Control and Genius documents.  
Overview  
Field Control is a family of highly modular distributed I/O and control products. They are suitable  
for use in a wide range of host architectures.  
Bus  
Interface  
Unit  
The heart of the Field Control system is the Bus Interface Unit. The Bus Interface Unit provides  
intelligent processing, I/O scanning, and feature configuration for a group of up to eight I/O  
modules. Together, the Bus Interface Unit and its modules make up a Field Control station (see the  
illustration, left).  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
The Bus Interface Unit and I/O modules are enclosed in sturdy, compact aluminum housings. Bus  
Interface Unit and I/O modules bolt securely to separate Terminal Blocks, which provide all field  
wiring terminals. The I/O Terminal blocks are generic and allow different I/O module types to be  
mounted on the same base. I/O Terminal Blocks are available with box-type terminals, barrier-type  
terminals, or wire-to-board connectors. All Terminal Blocks must be mounted on a DIN rail. The  
DIN rail, which serves as an integral part of the grounding system, can also be mounted on a panel.  
Field Control Features  
Features and benefits of Field Control include:  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
wiring savings  
better up time  
easy installation and maintenance  
spare parts savings  
low cost  
feature flexibility  
open architecture / adaptable to a variety of networks  
distributed I/O  
small, compact I/O modules with generic terminal wiring bases.  
I/O  
I/O  
DIN rail mounted  
GFK-0825F  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1
Field Control Modules  
There are three basic types of Field Control modules:  
Bus Interface Unit. The illustration below shows a Genius Bus Interface Unit.  
I/O modules  
Micro Field Processor  
Terminal Blocks:  
Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block.  
I/O Terminal Blocks, each of which accommodates two I/O modules.  
Auxiliary Terminal Blocks. These optional terminal strips can be connected to the side of  
an I/O Terminal Block if extra common terminals are needed.  
Genius  
Bus Interface Unit  
Bus Interface Unit  
Terminal Block  
Micro  
Field Processor  
I/O Terminal  
Block  
Auxiliary  
Terminal Blocks  
I/O Modules  
1-2  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1
Genius Bus Interface Unit  
The Genius Bus Interface Unit (IC670GBI002 or IC697GBI102) interfaces Field Control I/O  
modules to a host PLC or computer via a Genius bus. It can exchange up to 128 bytes of input data  
and 128 bytes of output data with the host, each Genius bus scan. It can also handle Genius  
datagram communications.  
The intelligent processing capabilities of the Genius Bus Interface Unit allow the configuration of  
features such as fault reporting, selectable input and output defaults, analog scaling and analog  
range selection for the modules in the station. In addition, the Genius Bus Interface Unit performs  
diagnostic checks on itself and its I/O modules, and relays diagnostic information to the host (if  
configured for fault reporting) and to a Hand-held Monitor.  
The Genius Bus Interface Unit can be used on a bus controlled by redundant CPUs or Bus  
Controllers. It can also be used on a dual bus.  
The Bus Interface Unit mounts on a Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block. It can be removed and  
replaced if necessary without removing the wiring or reconfiguring the I/O station.  
Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block  
The Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block, which included with the BIU, has connections for power  
wiring and single or dual communications cables. It has built-in bus switching circuitry, allowing  
the Bus Interface Unit to be used on a dual (redundant) Genius bus (no external Bus Switching  
Module is needed). The Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block stores the configuration parameters  
selected for the station.  
I/O Modules  
Field Control I/O Modules are available in many types to suit a wide range of application needs.  
Modules can be installed and removed without disturbing field wiring. One or two I/O modules  
may be mounted on an I/O Terminal Block.  
Micro Field Processor  
The Series 90 Micro Field Processor (MFP) is a Micro PLC that provides local logic within a Field  
Control station. The Micro Field Processor is the same size as a Field Control I/O module and  
occupies one of the eight available I/O slots in a Field Control station.  
MFP features include:  
Compatible with Logicmaster 90-30/20/Micro programming software, revision 6.01 or later.  
Alarm processor  
Password protection  
Built-in communications port that supports Series 90 protocols (SNP and SNPX)  
The Micro Field Processor requires a Genius Bus Interface Unit revision 2.0 or later.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 1 Introduction  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1
I/O Terminal Blocks and Auxiliary I/O Terminal Blocks  
An I/O Terminal Block provides mounting, electrical, and field wiring connections. Each half of  
the I/O Terminal Block can be mechanically keyed to accept only an I/O module of a specific type.  
Auxiliary I/O Terminal Blocks can be easily attached to an I/O Terminal Block. They can be used  
to provide additional common terminals if needed.  
For more information, please refer to:  
, which explains wiring to the Bus Interface Unit, and explains how to  
Chapter 3: Installation  
install the Bus Interface Unit module on the Field Terminal Block.  
, which describes the Bus Interface Unit and Bus Interface Unit Terminal  
Chapter 2: Description  
Block in detail.  
, which explains how the Genius Bus Interface Unit services I/O.  
Chapter 4, Operation  
, which explains how to configure I/O modules.  
Chapter 5: Hand-Held Monitor Configuration  
The Series 90 Micro Field Processor User's Manual (GFK-1171), which describes the Micro  
Field Processor (IC670MFP100) and provides installation procedures, operation information, and  
diagnostics information.  
The Field Control I/O Modules User's Manual (GFK-0826) which describes I/O modules and I/O  
Terminal Blocks. This manual also explains module installation and field wiring.  
1-4  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1
Environmental Specifications  
Vibration  
Modules perform well where vibration is a factor. Designs are shock and  
vibration tested to meet the following specifications when installed on a  
panel-mounted DIN rail using the clamp supplied, and with the panel-  
mounting feet secured:  
IEC68-2-6:  
10 to 57 Hz 0.012 in displacement (peak to peak)  
57 to 500 Hz at 2 g (unless otherwise specified)  
IEC68-2-27:  
Shock: 15G, 11 milliseconds, half sine wave  
Noise  
Modules are resistant to noise levels found in most industrial applications  
when installed according to accepted practices, including proper separation  
of wiring by voltage and power levels, on a conductive (unpainted) DIN rail.  
The DIN rail is an integral part of the grounding system.  
Modules are tested to the specifications listed in the Conformance to  
Standards document (GFK-1079).  
Temperature  
Humidity  
Modules operate reliably in ambient air temperatures from 0 deg. C (32 deg.  
F) up to 55 deg. C (131 deg. F).  
Storage temperatures are -40 deg. C (-40 deg. F) to +85 deg. C (185 deg. F).  
5% to 95%, non-condensing.  
For information about installing Field Control modules, please see:  
Chapter 2 of this manual. It describes installation and wiring for the Bus Interface Unit module and  
terminal block.  
Chapter 2 of the Field Control I/O Modules User's Manual. It summarizes installation instructions  
for modules and terminal blocks.  
The individual module datasheets included in the Field Control I/O Modules User's Manual,  
which provide specific module wiring information.  
Chapter 2 of the Genius I/O System and Communications User's Manual, which includes detailed  
instructions for selecting and installing a Genius bus.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 1 Introduction  
1-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1
Configuration for Field Control  
Configuration is an important part of the process of setting up a Field Control station. It establishes  
the following features:  
For the Bus Interface Unit:  
Genius serial bus address  
Baud rate for Genius bus communications  
Fault reporting to the host  
Use of the Bus Interface Unit as a bus switching device in a dual (redundant) bus system  
Redundancy mode for CPU redundancy  
Configuration protection  
For I/O Modules:  
I/O addressing  
Whether faults will be reported to the host  
Hold Last State for inputs or outputs  
Output defaults  
Range selection for analog modules  
Scaling for analog modules  
Alarm limits for analog modules  
For a Micro Field Processor:  
Reference addresses  
Data Lengths  
A Bus Interface Unit and I/O modules can be fully configured using a Hand-held Monitor.  
Optionally, a previously-configured Bus Interface Unit can be reconfigured using datagrams.  
For more information about configuration, please refer to:  
Chapter 5 of this manual ( ). A Genius Hand-held Monitor, version 4.6  
HHM Configuration  
(IC660HHM501J ) or later, can be used to configure a Bus Interface Unit. HHM configuration  
instructions are given in chapter 5.  
In addition, chapter 8 of this manual (  
Datagrams)  
explains how the configuration of a Bus  
Interface Unit can be completed or changed by sending it Write Configuration datagrams.  
The Series 90 Micro Field Processor User's Manual (GFK-1171), which describes the Micro  
Field Processor (IC670MFP100), and provides installation procedures, operation information, and  
diagnostics information.  
If the system host is a Series 90™70 PLC, the Genius Bus Interface Unit must be included in the  
system configuration as a device on the bus. Please see the programming software documentation  
for instructions.  
1-6  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1
Field Control in a Genius System  
Using Field Control modules on a Genius bus combines the low cost, small size, and flexibility of  
Field Control with the versatility, power, and communications features of the Genius system.  
The Genius bus is an industrially-hardened Local Area Network (LAN). It passes I/O (control)  
data and background information (datagrams) between the Bus Interface Unit and a Genius bus  
controller. A Genius bus can support up to 32 devices. Each Bus Interface Unit station counts as  
one device on the bus, regardless of the number or type of modules present in the station.  
Other devices on the same bus can be Field Control stations, remote drops, I/O blocks, Bus  
Controllers and Hand-held Monitors. Typical busses reserve one location for a Bus Controller and  
one for a Hand-held Monitor, leaving 30 for additional devices. The illustration below shows a  
Series 90-70 PLC connected to a Genius bus with I/O blocks and two Field Control stations.  
Series 90-70 PLC  
Hand-held  
Monitor  
Genius Bus  
The Host CPU  
The Genius Bus Interface Unit is ideally suited for use with a Series 90-70 or Series 90-30 PLC.  
However, any type of PLC or computer capable of controlling a Genius bus can be used as the host.  
Possible hosts include Series Six PLCs, Series Five PLCs, and computers equipped with a PCIM  
(Personal Computer Interface Module), QBIM (Q-Bus Interface Module), or a third-party GENI-  
based interface module, including several in DCS systems.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 1 Introduction  
1-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1
A More Complex Field Control and Genius System  
A more complex communications and control system is illustrated below. In this system, the Field  
Control stations and Genius blocks on the lower left are controlled by a Series 90-70 PLC. The  
Field Control stations and Genius blocks on the lower right are controlled by a host computer  
equipped with a PCIM (Personal Computer Interface Module).  
The PLC communicates with a computer running programming software via an SNP (Serial  
Network Protocol) link. And the PLC, host computer, and programmer computer exchange system  
data via an Ethernet communications link.  
Series 90-70 PLC  
PCIM  
SNP  
Ethernet  
Genius Bus  
Genius Bus  
For more information about Genius systems and communications, please refer to:  
The Genius I/O System and Communications User's Manual, which describes Genius system  
operation, and communications formats.  
The Bus Controller User's Manual for the system host, which includes specific system interface  
instructions.  
1-8  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Required Genius and Host System Equipment  
The following system equipment is required:  
Genius Hand-held Monitor version 4.6 (IC660HHM501J) or later.  
For a Series 90-70 PLC  
Series 90-70 CPU firmware, release 3.0 or later.  
A Series 90-70 Genius Bus Controller, release 3.0 or later. The Bus Controller must be 4.0  
or later for full diagnostics display from Logicmaster 90-70, or for redundancy  
applications.  
If Logicmaster 90-70 programming and configuration software is used, it must be  
release 3.0 or later:  
A.  
B.  
IC641SWP701F (3.5", 2DD, 5.25" 2S/HD)  
IC641SWP704C (5.25" 2S/2D)  
For a Series 90 30 PLC  
Series 90 30 CPU firmware: any version.  
Logicmaster 90-30 programming and configuration software: any version.  
Series 90-30 Genius Bus Controller: any version.  
For a Series Six™ PLC  
CPU: rev. 105 or later.  
Logicmaster 6 Programming Software: release 4.02 or later.  
Bus Controllers: IC660CBB902 or 903, version 1.7 or later.  
For a Series Five™ PLC  
CPU: rev. 3.2 (catalog number with E suffix) or later.  
Logicmaster 5 Programming Software: release 2.01 or later.  
Bus Controller: any version  
For a Host Computer  
PCIM: any version  
QBIM: any version  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 1 Introduction  
1-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1
Using Field Control in a CPU Redundancy System  
Most systems use only one Bus Controller and CPU to control the I/O on the Genius bus. CPU  
redundancy, which can be used for backup CPU/Bus Controller protection in critical applications,  
is described in detail in the Genius documentation. The section that follows here summarizes how  
Field Control products can fit into a Genius CPU Redundancy system.  
CPU/Bus Controller Redundancy: Overview  
In CPU redundancy, two Bus Controllers on the same bus can send control outputs at the same  
time. Both Bus Controllers automatically receive inputs and fault reports from all devices on the  
bus that have been configured as being in “CPU Redundancy” mode. The Bus Controllers must  
use serial bus addresses (device numbers) 30 and 31.  
Field Control stations can be used on a bus controlled by redundant CPUs/Bus Controllers.  
46471  
Bus  
Controller  
(Device 30)  
Bus  
Controller  
(Device 31)  
How the two sets of outputs from the dual CPUs are handled by a Bus Interface Unit depends on  
whether the Bus Interface Unit is set up for Hot Standby or Duplex redundancy.  
If the station  
contains any analog modules, the only form of CPU redundancy permitted is Hot Standby.  
Hot Standby CPU Redundancy  
A Bus Interface Unit configured for Hot Standby mode is normally controlled by the Bus  
Controller assigned to serial bus address 31. If no outputs are available from 31 for three bus  
scans, the Bus Interface Unit accepts outputs from the Bus Controller assigned to serial bus address  
30. If outputs are not available from either Bus Controller, outputs go to their configured defaults  
or hold their last state. In Hot Standby redundancy, Bus Controller-31 always has priority; when it  
is on-line, it has control of the outputs.  
Duplex CPU Redundancy  
A Bus Interface Unit configured for Duplex mode compares outputs it receives from the two Bus  
Controllers, to determine if they match. If corresponding outputs are the same, the Bus Interface  
Unit sets the output to that state. If corresponding outputs are not the same, the Bus Interface Unit  
sets the output to its configured ON or OFF Duplex Default State. If either Bus Controller stops  
sending outputs to a Bus Interface Unit, its outputs are directly controlled by the remaining Bus  
Controller.  
Only discrete I/O modules can operate in Duplex redundancy mode; do not use Duplex  
mode if the station contains any analog I/O modules.  
1-10  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1
Using Field Control in a Genius Bus Redundancy System  
In Genius bus redundancy, there are two bus cables each connected to a Bus Controller. I/O  
devices may be connected to either one bus of the pair, or to both. However, a device that is  
connected to both busses actually communicates on only one bus at a time. Before the alternate  
bus can be used for communications, a bus switchover must occur and the device must “log in”  
with the Bus Controller(s) on the alternate bus.  
The Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block contains a built-in bus switching relay that is used to switch  
busses in a dual bus system. Other types of devices with this capability are dedicated Bus  
Switching Modules and Series 90-70 Remote I/O Scanner modules. These are the only types of  
devices that can be directly connected to both redundant bus cables.  
A Bus Interface Unit cannot be used as the BSM Controller for a bus stub. Other devices cannot be  
located on a stub downstream of a BIU.  
Also, the Bus Interface Unit should not be connected to an external Bus Switching Module.  
Redundant Bus Configurations  
Many different redundant bus configurations are possible. Three basic ways of using a Bus  
Interface Unit with a redundant bus are described below.  
A Bus Interface Unit can be installed directly on both cables of the dual bus pair. The  
Bus Interface Unit is configured to operate as a bus switching device in addition to performing  
its normal functions. Here, two Field Control stations are installed on a dual bus. Each Bus  
Interface Unit would be set up as a bus switching device.  
Bus A  
46472  
Bus B  
A Bus Interface Unit can be located on just one bus of a redundant bus pair, if bus  
redundancy is not needed for the modules in that station. In this example, the Bus Interface  
Unit on the left is connected to both Bus A and Bus B and is configured as a bus switching  
device. The Bus Interface Unit on the right, which serves non-critical I/O modules, is  
connected to Bus A only, and is not configured as a bus switching device.  
46473  
Bus A  
Bus B  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 1 Introduction  
1-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1
A Bus Interface Unit can be located on a bus stub. A Bus Interface Unit can also be located  
on a bus stub, which is a short length of unterminated cable downstream of either a Genius I/O  
block/Bus Switching Module combination, or a Remote I/O Scanner connected to a dual bus.  
Because the bus stub cable itself is not redundant, this type of installation does not provide as  
much protection as connecting directly to a dual bus. The bus switching device to which the  
bus stub is connected can be another Genius block with a Bus Switching Module attached, as  
shown below, or a Series 90-70 Remote I/O Scanner.  
In this example, there are two Field Control stations installed on a bus stub. Each is  
configured as “BSM Present” but not configured as a “BSM Controller”.  
46474  
Bus A  
Bus B  
Bus  
Switching  
Module  
Genius Block  
Acting as a  
BSM Controller  
Up to 7 Additional Devices on the Bus Stub  
Up to seven devices (not counting the BSM/block or Remote I/O Scanner to which the dual bus is  
connected) can be installed on a bus stub. Each device on a bus stub counts toward the total of 32  
devices on the Genius bus.  
Restrictions on the number and length of bus stubs that may be used on a dual bus are explained in  
the  
Genius I/O System and Communications User's Manual.  
1-12  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Description  
Chapter  
2
This chapter describes:  
Genius Bus Interface Unit  
Bus Interface Unit Power Supply  
Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block  
Specifications  
Genius Bus Interface Unit  
The Genius Bus Interface Unit is a small, rugged, intelligent module with a sturdy aluminum  
housing. The module has four status LEDs, described below, and a connector for attaching a  
Genius Hand-held Monitor.  
3.25" (8.2mm)  
HHM  
Connector  
5.0" (12.7mm)  
LEDs  
The Bus Interface Unit contains the logic power supply needed to operate the I/O modules  
connected to it. It mounts on a separate terminal block, to which it and all bus wiring are attached.  
The configuration is stored in non-volatile memory located in the terminal block. Both the power  
supply and terminal block are described in this chapter.  
The Bus Interface Unit has a replaceable 1A, 5x20mm 250VAC slow-blow fuse on the input power  
lines. The fuse can be changed without disturbing the wiring of any other modules (instructions are  
in chapter 3).  
GFK-0825F  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
LEDs  
The LEDs on the Bus Interface Unit show its operating status.  
lights to indicate that +5V power is available for logic operation.  
PWR  
OK  
lights to indicate that the module has passed its powerup diagnostic tests.  
See the table below for more information.  
lights only if output modules are in the BIU configuration and are written  
to by the controlling bus controller. See the table below.  
RUN  
if the Bus Interface Unit is installed on a dual (redundant) bus, this LED  
lights if Bus B is the currently-active bus.  
BUS B  
OK  
RUN  
Meaning  
ON  
ON  
Module functioning, CPU communicating  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
Module functioning, no CPU communications for 3 bus scans  
Blinking Module functioning, circuit forced  
Blinking  
Blinking  
ON  
Circuit fault, CPU communicating  
OFF  
Circuit fault, no CPU communications for 3 bus scans  
Circuit fault, Circuit forced  
Alternate Blinking  
Synchronous Blinking  
No CPU communications - block number conflict  
OFF  
OFF  
Blinking Electronics/Terminal Assembly mismatch  
OFF No block power, or Block faulty  
2-2  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
Bus Interface Unit Power Supply  
The power supply in the Bus Interface Unit provides power for the Bus Interface Unit itself and  
logic power for all I/O modules that may potentially be installed at that station. External power  
must be supplied for field wiring of input and output devices.  
The power supply is not damaged by either of the following:  
Reversing input voltage on terminals 1 and 2.  
overcurrent conditions on the 6.5 VDC output.  
Temporary  
Timing  
The Bus Interface Unit provides power to all I/O modules that are installed at the station. I/O  
module operation is governed by a System Reset signal to ensure controlled operation during the  
power up and shut down processes. As shown in the timing diagram below, momentary power  
losses of less than 10 mS (for 24VDC BIU) or 20mS (for 115VAC/125VDC BIU) do not affect I/O  
module operation. Longer power losses generate a Reset for all system I/O modules.  
Input Power  
On  
Input Power  
Off  
Momentary  
Power  
24VDC  
Nominal  
Loss  
or 115 VAC  
Nominal  
Voltage  
Overshoot  
5% (max)  
Voltage  
Overshoot  
5% (max)  
6.5V Output  
95% (min)  
Hold  
Up  
Time  
Hold  
Up  
Time  
10mS  
Minimum:  
10mS for 24VDC BIU  
20mS for 115VAC/125VDC BIU  
200mS  
(min)  
200mS  
(min)  
(min)  
3mS  
(min)  
3mS  
(min)  
RST*  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 2 Description  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
Backplane Current  
With a DC input voltage, the amount of current available to the backplane may be limited by lower  
input voltage as indicated below.  
For 24VDC Supply  
For 125VDC Supply  
Backplane  
Current  
Available  
(Amps)  
Backplane  
Current  
Available  
(Amps)  
1.4  
1.2  
1.0  
2.0  
1.8  
18  
19 21  
105 110  
Voltage In  
Voltage In  
Calculating Input Power Requirements for a Bus Interface Unit  
The charts below show typical input power requirements for a Bus Interface Unit.  
For 24VDC Bus Interface Unit  
For 115VAC/125VDC Bus Interface Unit  
48.0  
15.9  
14.1  
12.3  
10.0  
7.7  
24.0  
Typical  
Input  
Typical  
Input  
Power  
(Watts)  
for DC  
Inputs  
37.75  
27.5  
17.25  
7.0  
18.75  
13.5  
Typical  
Input  
Power  
(Watts)  
Power  
(Volt/Amps)  
for AC  
Inputs  
8.25  
3.0  
5.5  
3.4  
0
0.25 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.20 1.40  
Total Backplane Current (Amps)  
0.50  
1.00  
1.50  
2.0  
0
Total Backplane Current (Volts)  
Note  
For a 24VDC Bus Interface Unit, start-up surge at full load is 15-50 Amps for 3  
milliseconds (maximum). For a 115VAC/125VDC Bus Interface Unit, startup  
surge at full load is 20 Amps peak for 3mS.  
To determine specific system requirements:  
Determine total output load from typical specifications listed for individual modules.  
Use the appropriate graph of input power above to determine average input power.  
Divide the input power by the operating source voltage to determine the input current  
requirements.  
Use the lowest input voltage to determine the maximum input current.  
Allow for startup surge current requirements. Startup surge current levels are a function of  
source impedance and, therefore, are installation-dependent. Startup surge currents can vary  
for approximately 3mS. For the 24VDC Bus Interface Unit, variance is between 25A and 50A.  
For the 115VAC/125VDC Bus Interface Unit, startup surge current is 20A maximum peak.  
Allow margins (10% to 20%) for variations.  
2-4  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
Bus Interface Unit Power Dissipation  
The Bus Interface Unit power dissipation can be determined once the backplane current supplied to  
the I/O modules is known.  
The following equation can be used to calculate BIU power dissipation:  
BIU Power Dissipation = Input Power - (total backplane current x 6.5 volts)  
For example:  
A. Total backplane current = 0.5 Amps  
B. Typical Input power = 7.7 Watts  
Therefore:  
BIU Power Dissipation = 7.7 W - ( 0.5 x 6.5 ) = 4.45 Watts  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 2 Description  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Load Requirements for Hardware Components  
The table below shows the DC load required by each module and hardware component. All ratings  
are in milliamps. Input and Output module current ratings are with all inputs or outputs on. These  
are maximum requirements, not typical.  
Catalog Number  
IC670MDD441  
IC670MDL233  
IC670MDL240  
IC670MDL241  
IC670MDL640  
IC670MDL641  
IC670MDL642  
IC670MDL643  
IC670MDL644  
IC670MDL730  
IC670MDL740  
IC670MDL742  
IC670MDL330  
IC670MDL331  
IC670MDL930  
Description  
Mixed I/O Module, 24 VDC 10 Inputs, 6 Outputs  
Input Module, 120 VAC 8 Isolated Points  
Current (mAmps)  
110  
40  
Input Module, 120 VAC 16 Grouped Points  
77  
Input Module, 16 Points, 2 groups 240 VAC  
77  
Input Module, 24 VDC 16 Grouped Pos/Neg Points  
Input Module, 48 VDC 16 Grouped Pos/Neg Points  
Input Module, 125 VDC 16 Grouped Pos/Neg Points  
Input Module, 5/12 VDC 16 Point  
83  
83  
77  
80  
Input Module, 12/24 VDC 16 Grouped Pos/Neg Fast Inputs  
Output Module, 8 Pt 24 VDC Electronic Short Circuit Protection  
Output Module, 12/24 VDC 0.5 Amp, 16 Grouped Pos.  
Output Module, 5/12/24 VDC Negative Outputs  
Output Module, 16 Point 12-120 VAC 16 Pt 1.0 Amp  
Output Module, 120 VAC 2 Amp, 8 Isolated Points  
80  
125  
111  
111  
285  
154  
313  
Relay Output Module, 2 Amp, 6 Form A Points and 2 Isolated  
Form C Points  
IC670ALG230  
IC670ALG240  
IC670ALG281  
IC670ALG282  
HE670ACC100  
HE670ADC810  
IC670ALG620  
IC670ALG630  
IC670ALG320  
IC670ALG330  
IC670MFP100  
IC693PRG300  
Analog Current Input Module, 8 Grouped Points  
Analog Input Module, 16 point Grouped  
Analog Voltage Input Module, 8 Grouped Points  
Analog Voltage Input Module, 16Grouped Points  
Input Simulator Module, Horner  
51  
251  
150  
150  
100  
131  
190  
195  
51  
Analog Input Module, Horner, +/-10VDC, 0-10 VDC  
RTD Input Module  
Thermocouple Input Module  
Analog Current/Voltage Output Module, 4 Grp Points  
Analog Current source Output Module, 8 Points  
Micro Field Processor  
85  
111  
170  
Hand-held Programmer  
IC660HHM501  
Genius Hand-held Monitor  
0
Hand-held Monitor and Hand-held Programmer  
The Genius Hand-held Monitor (IC660HHM501), used for configuring and monitoring the BIU,  
has its own battery and does not add to the load on the BIU.  
However, if a Hand-held Programmer (IC693PRG300) will be attached to a Micro Field Processor  
or other module in the I/O Station, it must be considered as a load component as listed above.  
2-6  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
Hot Insertion/Removal of Modules  
Bus Interface Units IC670GBI002(F) and IC670GBI102A or later support Hot Insertion/Removal  
of modules in the I/O Station.  
Hot Insertion/Removal means that modules can be removed and replaced while I/O Station power  
is applied without affecting the BIU or other modules in the I/O Station. Separate I/O module  
power must be switched off to the module being inserted or removed.  
Hot Insertion/Removal requires the use of specific modules and I/O terminal blocks:  
I/O modules having catalog number suffix J or above. These modules have a projecting  
alignment tab that fits into a corresponding alignment tab on I/O Terminal Blocks listed below.  
Note that modules with this tab can also be installed on older I/O Terminal Blocks that do not  
have mating alignment tabs. However, Hot Insertion/Removal are not supported in such an  
installation.  
I/O Terminal Blocks IC670CHS101, 102, or 103. These I/O Terminal Blocks have projecting  
alignment tabs designed to facilitate Hot Insertion/Removal of modules. Modules that are  
earlier than revision J cannot be mounted on these terminal blocks.  
I/O Terminal Blocks IC670CHS001, 002, and 003, which lack alignment tabs, do not support  
Hot Insertion/Removal of modules. With these terminal blocks, I/O Station power should be  
off when installing or removing modules.  
Mixing IC670CHS10x terminal blocks with IC670CHS00x terminal blocks in the same I/O  
station is not recommended.  
Faults Reported During Hot Insertion/Removal  
When using the recommended equipment listed above, Hot Insertion/Removal will cause the  
expected fault reports related to the loss of or addition of the module and its I/O circuits. These  
faults should be cleared in the normal manner. However, Hot Insertion/Removal of a rev. J or later  
module will NOT cause Configuration Mismatch errors that in some types of systems can shut  
down the controller.  
I/O Module Data During Hot Insertion/Removal  
As mentioned, separate I/O module power must be turned off for Hot Insertion/Removal. When the  
module is installed and power is reapplied, module data will quickly return to normal. For  
intelligent I/O modules, there may be a delay of a few seconds while the module goes through its  
powerup sequence.  
Hot Insertion/Removal for a Micro Field Processor  
A Micro Field Processor that is revision J or later may be removed/inserted as described above.  
Note, however, that although the Micro Field Processor will start functioning upon reinstallation,  
the MFP's application program must be reloaded. I/O data controlled by the Micro Field Processor  
will be incorrect until that has been done. (The BIU configuration of the Micro Field Processor is  
not affected by Hot Insertion/Removal).  
Hot Insertion/Removal Not Permitted in Hazardous Locations  
In hazardous locations, I/O Station power must be turned off before inserting/removing module.  
Failure to observe this precaution may result in personal injury, system malfunction and/or damage  
to the equipment.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 2 Description  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block  
The Bus Interface Unit provides terminals for power and ground connections. Maximum wire size  
2
is AWG #14. (avg 2.0690mm cross-section).  
The Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block also has eight input terminals for connection to a single or  
dual Genius bus. These terminals accommodate up to two AWG #14 wires. The Bus Interface Unit  
Terminal Block contains bus-switching circuitry permitting it to be used  
dual bus redundancy system.  
in a  
as a BSM Controller  
A connecting cable is provided with each I/O Terminal Block. It is used to connect the Bus  
Interface Unit Terminal Block to the first I/O Terminal Block. The same type of cable  
interconnects subsequent I/O Terminal Blocks. The cable has molded connectors that are keyed to  
assure proper orientation.  
The Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block is designed to be extremely reliable; it should not be  
necessary to replace or rewire it after installation.  
The Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block stores the configuration parameters for the station. The Bus  
Interface Unit can be removed without removing the wiring or reconfiguring the station.  
46457  
Terminals for  
power and  
communications  
wiring  
I/O Terminal Block  
Connectors  
Connecting  
Cable  
to next terminal block  
2-8  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2
Functional Specifications  
Bus Interface Unit:  
Reliability  
More than 183,000 hours operation MTBF, calculated  
24VDC Power Supply Input  
Nominal Rated Voltage  
24 VDC  
Voltage Range  
Power  
18 VDC to 30 VDC  
16.8 Watts maximum at full load (nominal voltage)  
Inrush Current  
15-50 Amps peak, 3 mS maximum. Inrush current is installation  
dependent. See page 2-4.  
Power Supply Output  
6.5 VDC ±5%  
to I/O modules:  
1.4 Amp maximum. See page 2-4.  
10mS maximum from nominal input voltage.  
Holdup Time  
115VAC/125VDC Power Supply Input  
Nominal Rated Voltage  
Voltage Range  
Frequency (AC)  
Power  
115 VAC, 125 VDC  
90 to 135 VAC, 105 to 150 VDC  
47 to 63 Hz  
115 VAC: 48VA maximum at full load (nominal voltage)  
125 VAC: 24W maximum at full load (nominal voltage)  
Inrush Current  
20 Amps peak, 3 mS maximum.  
6.5 VDC ±5%  
Power Supply Output  
to I/O modules:  
2 Amp maximum. See page 2-4.  
20mS maximum from nominal input voltage.  
Holdup Time  
Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block:  
Power Requirements  
Reliability  
16mA maximum  
More than 600,000 hours operation MTBF, calculated  
For power requirements of specific I/O modules, please see the  
Field Control I/O Modules User's  
, (GFK-0826).  
Manual  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 2 Description  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
Chapter  
3
This chapter describes:  
System Wiring Guidelines  
System Grounding  
Locations for Field Control Modules  
Installing the Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block on a Panel  
Installing the Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block on a DIN Rail  
Installing the Cables Between Terminal Blocks  
Power Wiring to the Bus Interface Unit  
Connecting the Communications Bus  
Installing/Removing the Bus Interface Unit  
Removing/Replacing the Bus Interface Unit Fuse  
Upgrading the BIU firmware.  
For more information, please refer to:  
The Field Control I/O Modules User's Manual for information about installing I/O modules.  
Appendix C, “The Genius Serial Bus” for a detailed description of the characteristics of the Genius  
bus.  
GFK-0825F  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Preinstallation Check  
Carefully inspect all shipping containers for damage during shipping. If any part of the system is  
damaged, notify the carrier immediately. The damaged shipping container should be saved as  
evidence for inspection by the carrier.  
As the consignee, it is your responsibility to register a claim with the carrier for damage incurred  
during shipment. However, GE Fanuc will fully cooperate with you, should such action be  
necessary.  
After unpacking the Field Control modules and other equipment, record all serial numbers. Serial  
numbers are required if you should need to contact Product Service during the warranty period of  
the equipment.  
All shipping containers and all packing material should be saved should it be necessary to transport  
or ship any part of the system.  
Static Protection  
The Bus Interface Unit has CMOS components that are susceptible to static damage.  
Use proper  
static handling techniques when handling this module.  
Hand-held Monitor Connector  
The connector on the Genius Bus Interface Unit is intended for use with a Genius Hand-held  
Monitor only. It must be connected to a nonincendive circuit only.  
HHM (must be connected to  
a nonincendive circuit only)  
3-2  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
System Wiring Guidelines  
Four types of wiring may be encountered in a typical factory installation:  
1.  
Power wiring - the plant power distribution, and high power loads such as high  
horsepower motors. These circuits may be rated from tens to thousands of KVA at 220  
VAC or higher.  
2.  
Control wiring - usually either low voltage DC or 120 VAC of limited energy rating.  
Examples are wiring to start/stop switches, contactor coils, and machine limit switches.  
This is generally the interface level of the Genius discrete I/O.  
3.  
4.  
Analog wiring - transducer outputs and analog control voltages. This is the interface level  
to Genius I/O analog blocks.  
Communications and signal wiring - the communications network that ties everything  
together, including computer LANs, MAP, and Genius I/O and communications bus.  
These four types of wiring should be separated as much as possible to reduce the hazards from  
insulation failure, miswiring, and interaction (noise) between signals. A typical PLC system with  
Genius I/O may require some mixing of the latter three types of wiring, particularly in cramped  
areas inside motor control centers and on control panels. In general, it is acceptable to mix the  
communications bus cable with the I/O wiring from the blocks, as well as associated control level  
wiring. All noise pickup is cumulative, depending on both the spacing between wires, and the  
distance span they run together. I/O wires and communications bus cable can be placed randomly  
in a wiring trough for lengths of up to 50 feet. If wiring is cord-tied (harnessed), do not include the  
bus cable in the harness, since binding wires tightly together increases the coupling and mechanical  
stress that can damage the relatively soft insulation of some serial cable types.  
Wiring which is external to equipment, and in cable trays, should be separated following NEC  
practices.  
Installing Additional Suppression  
It is possible some installations might exceed the surge immunity capabilities specified in chapter  
1. This is most likely in outdoor installations or where the power source is from another building or  
ground system. It is prudent to provide local transient protection.  
Appendix B describes installation of additional suppression at the power and communications  
lines.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 3 Installation  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
System Grounding  
All components of a control system and the devices it controls must be properly  
grounded. Ground conductors should be connected in a star fashion, with all branches routed to a  
central earth ground point as shown below. This ensures that no ground conductor carries current  
from any other branch.  
Motor Drives and  
Other Electrical  
Programming  
Device  
Each Terminal  
Block  
Machinery  
Control  
Equipment  
NOTE  
Earth  
Ground  
Signal and power  
Central  
Ground Point  
connections not shown  
Each Field Control Terminal Block has a chassis ground terminal for safety and noise protection.  
This terminal should be connected to the conductive mounting panel with a 4-inch maximum  
2
length of AWG #14 (avg 2.1mm ) wire. Use hardware such as star washers to ensure ground  
integrity.  
The control panel and enclosure should also be bonded to the plant system ground per code.  
Inadequate grounding may compromise system integrity in the presence of power switching  
transients and surges.  
3-4  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
Locations for Field Control  
Field Control terminal blocks must be installed on a 35mm x 7.5mm DIN rail. Modules can be  
located on equipment, in junction boxes, inside panels, behind operator stations, in NEMA  
enclosures as little as 4" deep, and in other locations where space is limited. The area should be  
clean and free of airborne contaminants, with adequate cooling airflow.  
Modules can be mounted in any orientation without derating the temperature specification. They  
can be installed in a linear stack as shown on the left in the following illustration, using the short  
connection cables provided with each I/O Terminal Block. An optional 21-inch (0.53 meter) cable  
(IC670CBL002) is also available. Only one 21" cable can be used per Field Control station.  
All of the I/O Terminal Blocks in a group must be connected either at the top or the bottom of the  
Bus Interface Unit (BIU in the illustration). A Bus Interface Unit may not be connected between  
I/O Terminal Blocks.  
46405  
BIU  
BIU  
BIU  
BIU  
Installing the DIN Rail  
All Field Control Terminal Blocks must be mounted on a 7.5mm x 35mm DIN rail. The rail must  
have a conductive (unpainted) finish for proper grounding.  
For best vibration resistance, the DIN rail should be installed on a panel using screws spaced  
approximately 6 inches (5.24cm) apart. When using multiple rail sections, be sure they are properly  
aligned.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 3 Installation  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
Mount the DIN rail at least 4.25 inches (10.80 cm) from any wireway or other obstruction  
on the  
Allow more space if the wiring for I/O modules is very stiff.  
wiring side of the Bus Interface Unit.  
A wiring template is also provided in the instruction sheet included with each Bus Interface Unit  
terminal block.  
Drill mounting holes for the BIU Terminal Block as shown below. Allow a small tolerance  
between the top and bottom of adjacent terminal blocks. After mounting the terminal blocks on the  
DIN rail as described on the following pages, use #6 screws (not supplied) to attach them to the  
panel. Length for all screws is 3/8 inch (9.525mm).  
5.90in  
14.99cm  
4.25in  
Wireway  
4.50in  
11.43cm  
Clamp  
Screw  
5.00in  
12.70cm  
1.75in  
4.45cm  
4.31in  
10.95cm  
3-6  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Installing the Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block on the DIN Rail  
1. Tilt the Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block and position it over the rail, as shown below left,  
catching the rail behind the tabs in the terminal block.  
2. Pivot the terminal block downward until the spring-loaded DIN rail latches in the terminal  
block click into place.  
1
2
DIN  
rail  
tabs  
3. Tighten the DIN rail clamp screw (see below left). Recommended torque is 4 to 6-in/lbs.  
Removing the BIU  
Terminal Block  
Installing the BIU  
Terminal Block  
Pry  
Upper  
latch  
Tighten  
Loosen  
Pry  
Lower  
latch  
Removing the Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block from the DIN Rail  
1. Loosen the clamp screw.  
2. Insert a small flat-blade screwdriver into the upper latch and pry it outward. Then, pull up gently  
on the top of the terminal block to disengage the upper latch from the rail.  
3. Keep gently pulling the top of the terminal block away from the rail. Insert the screwdriver  
into the lower latch and pry it outward to free the terminal block.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 3 Installation  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
Installing the Cables Between Terminal Blocks  
Before installing modules on their terminal blocks, install the connecting cable(s) between terminal  
blocks. A short connecting cable, as illustrated below, is supplied with each I/O Terminal Block. A  
set of three connecting cables is available as renewal part number IC670CBL001. Optional 21-inch  
(0.53 meter) cable is also available (IC670CBL002) (only one 21" cable can be used per Field  
Control station).  
The illustration below shows cable connection between a Bus Interface Unit terminal block and an  
I/O Terminal Block. Make connections between I/O Terminal Blocks in the same manner. The  
connectors are keyed to assure proper installation.  
Bus Interface  
Unit Terminal  
Block  
Terminal  
Block  
Connection  
Cable  
I/O Terminal  
Block  
Connector for Cable  
to Next Device  
After installing the cable, be sure it is firmly seated on both connectors.  
3-8  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
Power Wiring to the Bus Interface Unit  
Note: Do not apply power until the BIU module is installed on the Terminal Block.  
1. Connect an appropriate power source as shown below.  
High Voltage  
Connections  
(IC670GBII02)  
Low Voltage  
Connections  
(IC670GBI002)  
-
24 VDC  
+
115VAC or  
125VDC  
For BIU version IC670GBI102, if a DC supply is used the polarity is not important.  
BIU version IC670GBI102 provides internal overvoltage protection. Terminal 4 is normally  
connected to frame ground (terminal 3) by a factory-installed jumper. If overvoltage  
protection is not required is supplied upstream this feature can be disabled by removing the  
or  
jumper, leaving pin 4 unconnected.  
2
2
2. Use one AWG #14 (2.1mm ) or two AWG #16 (1.3mm ) wires per terminal. The wires into a  
terminal should be the same type and size. Wires must be copper conductors rated for  
75 degrees C (167 degrees F) only. Suggested torque for the terminal screws is 9 in/lbs.  
3. Connect the ground terminal to the conductive mounting panel with a 4-inch maximum length  
2
of AWG #14 (avg 2.1mm ) or larger wire. Use hardware such as star washers to ensure ground  
integrity.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 3 Installation  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
Connecting the Communications Bus  
The Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block has a two sets of bus terminals. The terminals in the center  
portion of the terminal block are for the main bus cable; they are always used.  
The outermost set of bus terminals is for an optional redundant (dual) bus cable. The Bus Interface  
Unit Terminal Block has built-in bus switching capability;  
do not attach a Bus Switching Module in  
.
a dual bus application  
46462  
B1  
Serial 1  
Serial 2  
Redundant Bus  
Connections  
(optional)  
B2  
Shield In  
Shield Out  
Bin  
Bout  
Aout  
Ain  
A2  
Shield Out  
Shield In  
Serial 2  
Main Bus  
Connections  
Serial 1  
A1  
2
2
Terminals accept one AWG #14 (2.1mm ) or two AWG #14 (avg 2.1mm cross section) copper  
75 deg. C (167 deg. F) wires. Each terminal can accept solid or stranded wires. The wires on any  
terminal should be the same type. The suggested torque is 9 in/lbs (1 Nm).  
Bus Cables  
Bus connections can be made using standard bus cables (cable specifications for the Genius bus are  
detailed in Appendix C. Also see Appendix C for a discussion of the characteristics of the Genius  
bus.  
When making bus connections, the maximum exposed length of unshielded wires should be two inches  
(5cm). For added protection, each shield drain wire should be insulated with spaghetti tubing to prevent  
the Shield In and Shield Out wires from touching each other, or the signal wires.  
For applications using 150 ohm cables, prefabricated cables are available in 15" (IC660BLC001)  
and 36" (IC660BLC003) lengths. These cables terminate in mating connectors that simplify wiring  
between I/O blocks. The 36" cable is recommended for Field Control installations.  
SHDSHD SER SER  
OUT IN  
2
1
SHDSHD SER SER  
OUT IN  
2
1
3-10  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
Making Bus Connections  
1. Connect Serial 1 to the Serial 1 terminals of the previous device and the next device.  
2. Connect Serial 2 to the Serial 2 terminals of the previous device and the next device.  
3. Connect Shield In to Shield Out of the preceding device. Connect Shield Out to Shield In of  
the next device. If the Bus Interface Unit is the first device on a bus, Shield In can be left  
unconnected. If it is the last device on a bus, Shield Out can be left unconnected.  
Start  
of Bus  
End  
of Bus  
Terminating  
Resistor  
Terminating  
Resistor  
Serial 1  
Serial 2  
Serial 1  
Serial 2  
Shield In  
Shield Out  
Shield In  
Shield Out  
Terminating a Bus  
If either bus will terminate at the Bus Interface Unit, connect a 75, 100, 120, or 150-ohm  
terminating resistor across the Serial 1 and Serial 2 terminals. Appendix C lists the correct  
impedance to use for each recommended type of bus cable.  
Note: If the Bus Interface Unit will be powered up when not connected to a properly-terminated  
bus, connect a 75-ohm resistor across its Serial 1 and Serial 2 terminals to assure proper powerup.  
Using Prefabricated Terminating Resistors  
Prefabricated molded connectors with terminating resistors are available for 75 ohms (catalog  
number IC660BLM508) and 150 ohms (IC660BLM506).  
They can be used with conventional bus cable and with the cables with pre-molded connectors.  
Attach the prefabricated resistor to the female cable end as shown below.  
Underside of prefabricated  
resistor, showing projection  
Slide prefabricated resistor onto  
female cable end  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 3 Installation  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
Installing Pre-Molded Bus Cables  
Pre-molded cables must be installed in the orientation shown below. The main bus cable exits  
toward the power connections. The optional redundant bus cable exits away from the power  
connections.  
Premolded Cable Positions for  
Bus Interface Unit Mounted  
with Terminals on Right  
Serial 1  
Serial 2  
Optional  
Redundant  
Bus  
Shield In  
Shield Out  
Shield Out  
Shield In  
Serial 2  
Serial 1  
Serial 2  
Main Bus  
Main Bus  
Shield In  
Shield Out  
Shield Out  
Shield In  
Serial 2  
Serial 1  
Optional  
Redundant  
Bus  
Serial 1  
Premolded Cable Positions for  
Bus Interface Unit Mounted  
with Terminals on Left  
Where two prefabricated cable ends meet at the same device, join the male and female ends (see  
below).  
If a prefabricated cable will be at the end of the bus (requiring termination, as explained), and you  
want to use a prefabricated terminating resistor, make the cable installation so that a female  
connector will be located at the device where the cable will be terminated.  
46492  
Mating  
connectors  
Mating  
connectors  
male  
connector  
female  
connector  
male  
connector  
female  
connector  
terminating re  
sistor (male)  
Connect to  
Last Device  
3-12  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Bus Connection for Critical Processes  
Bus connections are normally considered permanent. They should never be removed while the bus  
is in operation; the resulting unreliable data on the bus could cause hazardous control conditions.  
If the bus controls critical processes that cannot be shut down, the Terminal Block can be wired to  
the bus via an intermediate connector as shown below.  
O
U
T
I
N
SHLD OUT  
Shield Out  
SHLD IN  
Shield In  
S2  
S1  
Serial 2  
Serial 1  
The connector shown is #A107204NL from Control Design, 458 Crompton Street, Charlotte NC,  
28134.  
Alternatively, the wire ends can be soldered together before inserting them into the terminals.  
When removing the Terminal Block, cover the ends of the wires with tape to prevent shorting the  
signal wires to one another or to ground.  
Both of these methods allow the Terminal Block to be removed while maintaining data integrity on  
the bus.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 3 Installation  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
Installing the Bus Interface Unit on the Terminal Block  
1. Before installing a new Bus Interface Unit, remove the cable slot  
knockout on the end of the module that will cover the connecting  
End  
View  
cable. It can be removed with pliers, or by pressing  
inside the module housing.  
from  
out  
Cable Slot  
2. Power to the I/O Station should be OFF.  
Connecting Cable  
(cross section)  
3. To install Bus Interface Unit on the terminal block, position the  
module so that the cable slot in the module housing is over the  
connecting cable. Press the module down firmly.  
Caution  
Excessive force may damage the equipment.  
3. After placing the Bus Interface Unit onto the terminal block, tighten its screws to secure it.  
Maximum recommended torque is 9 in/lbs.  
Warnings  
Explosion hazard. When in hazardous locations, turn off power before replacing or the BIU.  
Personal injury, system malfunction and/or damage to the equipment may occur.  
Equipment labeled with reference to Class I, Groups A, B, C, and D, Div. 2 hazardous  
locations is suitable for use only in non-hazardous locations or in Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B,  
C, and D locations.  
Explosion hazard: Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I, Division 2.  
Removing the Bus Interface Unit from the Terminal Block  
1.  
Power to the I/O Station should be Off.  
Do Not Tilt  
2.  
Loosen the Bus Interface Unit retaining screws.  
Caution  
Be sure screws are fully disengaged. Attempting to  
remove the module with screw(s) partially engaged may  
damage the equipment.  
3.  
Pull the Bus Interface Unit module straight away from the  
Terminal Block.  
Caution  
Do not tilt the Bus Interface Unit to remove it. Attempting  
to remove the Bus Interface Unit at an angle may damage  
the equipment.  
3-14  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
Removing/Replacing the Bus Interface Unit Fuse  
If all the Bus Interface Unit LEDs go off, it may be necessary to replace its fuse. The fuse can be  
removed without disturbing any other parts of the station or wiring.  
1. To check the fuse, remove power from the station.  
Caution  
Avoid touching the exposed wiring on the Terminal Block when removing  
the Bus Interface Unit.  
Caution  
Electrostatic discharge can damage the module when it is not installed on a Terminal Block.  
Always observe normal ESD protection practices when handling an un-installed module. Use  
of a ground cuff and a grounded floor surface are recommended.  
2. Fully loosen the retaining screws in the Bus Interface Unit and carefully remove it from the  
Terminal Block. Do not tilt the module during removal.  
3. Remove the retaining screws from the BIU.  
4. The fuse location is shown below. Visually inspect the fuse to see whether it has blown.  
46464  
Fuse  
5. To remove the fuse from the holder, carefully pry it upward. Take care not to damage any  
components in the module. Place the new fuse in position and press it into the holder.  
The fuse should be a 1A, 5x20mm 250VAC slow-blow type. Suitable fuses are: Bussman  
#GMC-V-1A and Littelfuse #239 001.  
6. Reinstall the Bus Interface Unit on the BIU Terminal Block as described on the previous page.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 3 Installation  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
Upgrading the BIU Firmware  
Note  
The BIU EEPROM stores the configuration of the I/O Station. If you replace the  
BIU EEPROM, it will be necessary to reconfigure the I/O Station using a Hand-  
held Monitor.  
Follow the steps below to replace the BIU's firmware EEPROM.  
Caution  
Avoid touching the exposed wiring on the Terminal Block when removing  
the Bus Interface Unit.  
Caution  
Electrostatic discharge can damage the module when it is not installed on a  
Terminal Block. Always observe normal ESD protection practices when  
handling an un-installed module. Use of a ground cuff and a grounded floor  
surface are recommended.  
1. Remove power to the I/O Station.  
2. Fully loosen the retaining screws in the Bus Interface Unit and carefully remove it from the  
Terminal Block. Do not tilt the module during removal.  
3. Remove the retaining screws from the BIU.  
4. The firmware EEPROM is located on the 2-board set that also includes the Hand-held Monitor  
connector. This set of two boards and their plastic card guide must be removed from the  
module housing.  
46546  
Remove  
3-16  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
Note the position of the card guide with respect to the metal housing for reassembly.  
46547  
card guide  
4. Hold your hand behind the module to retain the board set, and turn the module face up.  
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool into either of the holes from which you previously  
removed the module retaining screws. Pry the two halves of the plastic latch inward to free that  
side of the card guide. Repeat on the other side.  
46548  
latch  
7. Remove the dual board set and card guide from the housing.  
8. Replace the EEPROM on the board with the EEPROM containing the new firmware for the  
BIU.  
9. Reinsert the board set into the module housing, taking care to align the card guide with the  
screw holes in the housing.  
10. When the card guide is in position, press downward gently on the back of the card guide to  
seat the latches. Check the front of the module to be sure they have seated correctly.  
11. Reinstall the Bus Interface Unit on the BIU Terminal Block.  
12. Using a Hand-held Monitor version 4.6 or later, reconfigure the I/O Station.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 3 Installation  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Operation  
4
This chapter explains how a Bus Interface Unit interacts with the modules in its station, how it  
stores data, and how it exchanges data with the system host.  
BIU Data Handling at the I/O Station  
The BIU Sweep  
BIU Backplane Scan Time  
Data Transfer Between the BIU and the Host  
Genius Bus Scan Time  
Operation of the BIU with a Micro Field Processor  
Backing Up Micro Field Processor Outputs  
Backing Up BIU Outputs with a Micro Field Processor  
GFK-0825F  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
BIU Data Handling at the I/O Station  
The BIU manages all movement of data within the I/O station and between the I/O station and the  
Genius bus. The BIU scans the I/O modules in the station, exchanges data with the host, and can  
manage the exchange of data between a Micro Field Processor and other modules in the station. In  
addition to its regular I/O scanning capabilities, the BIU can also selectively transfer specific data  
groups from one intelligent module in the station to another.  
All of the data for the I/O station, whether it is data that is exchanged on the Genius bus or local  
data, utilizes the BIU's four I/O data memories.  
The BIU has 256 bytes of memory available for each of the four types of data (discrete inputs and  
outputs, data types I and Q, and analog inputs and outputs, data types AI and AQ). During BIU  
configuration, data for individual modules is assigned to specific areas of this memory.  
BIU Memory  
Type  
Typically Used For  
Amount Available Highest Available  
in BIU  
Reference Address  
I
discrete inputs, and status data from  
intelligent modules  
256 bytes  
65535  
Q
discrete outputs, and fault clearing for  
intelligent modules  
256 bytes  
65535  
AI  
analog inputs  
256 bytes  
256 bytes  
9999  
9999  
AQ  
analog outputs  
Data can be configured anywhere within the BIU's available memory. If the data will be exchanged  
on the network bus, data must be assigned to contiguous memory locations, as explained later.  
The following paragraphs describe the types of data the BIU exchanges with conventional I/O  
modules and intelligent I/O modules.  
4-2  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
I/O Data for Conventional Modules  
Conventional I/O modules provide or receive just one type of I/O data (sometimes referred to as  
). Normally, this data is assigned to the data types shown below; however, any  
reference data  
module's data can be assigned to any data type in BIU memory.  
Type of Module  
Type of Data  
discrete inputs  
analog inputs  
discrete outputs  
analog outputs  
I
AI  
Q
AQ  
The BIU reads inputs from all conventional input modules and sends outputs to all conventional  
output modules during every “sweep" of operations.  
Field Control Station  
Bus Interface Unit  
I
Conventional  
Discrete Input  
Modules  
Q
AI  
AQ  
Conventional  
Analog Input  
Modules  
Conventional  
Discrete Output  
Modules  
Reference Data  
Is Transferred  
Each BIU Sweep  
Conventional  
Analog Output  
Modules  
I/O Data, Status Data, and Control Data for Intelligent Modules  
“Intelligent" modules such as the Micro Field Processor, Thermocouple, RTD, and other intelligent  
modules provide and receive multiple types of I/O data. (This data is sometimes called  
reference  
). For example, the 16 Point Grouped Analog Input Module provides and receives the  
parameters  
following types of data:  
16 (two-byte) analog inputs for channel input data. This data is normally configured to use AI  
memory, although that is not required.  
88 bits of discrete inputs (I) for module and channel status data.  
16 bits of discrete outputs (Q) for fault-clearing commands to the module.  
Some intelligent modules use all four available data types: discrete inputs and outputs and analog  
inputs and outputs.  
The BIU reads input and status data and sends output and command data to intelligent module  
during every "sweep" of BIU operations.  
Field Control Station  
Bus Interface Unit  
I
intelligent  
Q
AI  
Analog Input  
Module  
AQ  
Reference Parameters are  
Transferred Each BIU Sweep  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 4 Operation  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
Group Data for Intelligent Modules  
Intelligent modules can also be configured for "Group" data transfer with the BIU or with other  
intelligent devices in the same Field Control station. A data group is a selected set of data that the  
BIU transfers from one location to another location in the station. The BIU can transfer the group  
data during every sweep of its operations, or only during specified sweeps. This ability to "skip"  
group data transfers during certain sweeps makes it possible to shorten the BIU's overall sweep  
time.  
Up to 16 groups can be set up for an I/O station.  
A group contains data from only one module to only one module. Either module may be an I/O  
module, a Micro Field Processor, or the Bus Interface Unit.  
Field Control Station  
Bus Interface Unit  
I
Micro Field  
Processor  
I
Q
AI  
Q
AI  
AQ  
AQ  
Intelligent I/O  
Module  
I
Q
AI  
Group Data is  
Transferred  
During Selected  
Sweeps Only  
AQ  
A group can consist of a combination of I, Q, AI, and/or AQ data.  
For each data type, a starting offset and length can be specified. It is not necessary to move all  
of a module's data.  
The data does not need to be moved during each BIU sweep.  
Selective Sweep  
For group data only, the BIU can move the data on each sweep, or on any combination of up to 16  
sweeps. The selection of sweeps is easily made when configuring the group.  
Examples  
Appendix D includes examples of how data might be configured for group moves.  
4-4  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
The BIU Sweep  
46543  
The "sweep" of the Bus Interface Unit is the sequence of actions it executes  
repeatedly as long as the module is receiving power.  
1
2
3
Read all inputs from conventional  
discrete and analog input modules  
1 BIU Reads Inputs from Conventional Modules  
Read all reference parameter inputs from  
•smart" modules  
The BIU first reads inputs from conventional I/O modules. The BIU  
combines input data with any corresponding forced data and puts it in its  
input data tables at the configured locations. If a module fails to supply  
valid input data, the BIU generates a fault report to the host. If the module is  
configured for Hold Last State, the BIU holds the module's data at its last  
valid state. If the module is configured to default its inputs, the BIU places  
zeros in the module's assigned references for all inputs that are not forced.  
Any forced inputs retain their forced states.  
Read all group data moves whose  
destination is the BIU, except groups  
whose source is a Synchronization module  
*
*
4
Send Group Data moves  
to a Synchronization module  
For inputs from conventional analog modules, the BIU also performs  
scaling, calibration, alarm checking, and range checking.  
5
6
Send outputs from BIU tables  
to Synchronization modules  
2 BIU Reads All Input Reference Parameters  
Move all inputs within BIU network map  
from BIU tables to the Genius  
communications buffers  
Next, the BIU reads all configured discrete and analog reference parameters  
from "intelligent" modules (including an MFP). If a module fails to supply  
valid input data, the BIU generates a fault report to the host. If the module  
is configured for Hold Last State, the BIU holds the module's data at its last  
valid state. If the module is configured to default its inputs, the BIU places  
zeros in the module's assigned references for all inputs that are not forced.  
Any forced inputs retain their forced states.  
Move all outputs within BIU network  
map from the Genius communications  
buffers to the BIU internal tables  
7
BIU Waits if  
MFP is busy  
3 BIU Reads Group Data Whose Destination is BIU  
8
9
Read all reference input parameters from  
a Synchronization module  
Next, the BIU reads the input group data for which the destination is slot 0  
(the BIU) from all intelligent modules except a Synchronization module.  
The BIU reads only the group inputs that have been configured to be read  
during that sweep. If a module fails to supply valid input data, the BIU  
generates a fault report to the host. If the module is configured for Hold  
Last State, the BIU holds the module's data at its last valid state. If the  
module is configured to default its inputs, the BIU places zeros in the  
module's assigned references for all inputs that are not forced. Any forced  
inputs retain their forced states.  
Read all group data to the BIU  
from a Synchronization module  
*
*
10  
11  
Send all outputs to conventional modules  
Send all reference parameter outputs to  
•smart" modules, but not to  
a Synchronization module  
4 BIU Sends Group Data to Synchronization Module  
12  
Send all group data to all •smart"  
modules except Synchronization module  
If a module (usually a Micro Field Processor) has been configured as a  
Synchronization module, the BIU next transfers group data assigned to be  
sent to it during that sweep.  
.
.
.
Background Tasks  
5 BIU Sends Reference Parameters to a Synchronization Module  
*
Group Data is moved only  
during its configured BIU sweeps.  
If a module has been configured as a Synchronization module, the BIU next  
sends its reference parameter data from BIU tables.  
The tasks shown in shaded boxes are performed  
only if the I/O Station includes a Synchronization  
module. The Synchronization module is usually a  
Micro FIeld Processor.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 4 Operation  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
6 Move Input Data to the Communications Buffer  
The BIU then moves all current discrete and analog input values presently in its network map into a  
memory buffer, in preparation for transmitting them on the Genius bus.  
7 Move Output Data from the Communications Buffer  
After moving the inputs into the communications buffer, the BIU moves newly-received output  
data from the communications buffer. It combines this data with any existing forced discrete output  
states and analog values and places the combined data in its discrete (%Q) and analog (%AQ)  
output memories, as defined in the BIU I/O map.  
If the BIU is not receiving outputs from the bus, it sets mapped output references for conventional  
modules to their default/hold last state conditions, then forces them. For any intelligent module set  
up for defaults, the BIU sets output table references to their forced state or value, or to zero.  
8 Move Reference Parameters from a Synchronization Module to the BIU  
If a module has been configured as a Synchronization module, the BIU next moves all configured  
reference parameter data from the module to the BIU's internal memory tables, then applies any  
forces. If the Synchronization module is busy, the BIU waits then retries. If the BIU is unable to  
move the data after five seconds, it sets its own corresponding memory locations to zero or holds  
its last states, as configured for the Synchronization module.  
9 Move Group Data from Synchronization Module to BIU  
If a module has been configured as a Synchronization module, the BIU moves all its defined group  
data to the BIU's internal tables, then applies any forces. If the BIU is unable to read the specified  
data, it generates a fault report, and defaults the data to 0 or holds its last states, depending on the  
module's configuration. If any of the data items are presently forced, those forces are retained.  
10 Send Outputs to Conventional Modules  
The BIU next sends output data to conventional output modules in the I/O station. Discrete output  
modules automatically echo the received outputs back to the BIU. If a module fails to echo its  
outputs the BIU generates a fault report for that module. If the module is configured for output  
defaulting, the BIU attempts to set outputs to their default states. This is not always possible,  
depending on the nature of the problem.  
For conventional analog modules, the BIU converts data from the selected scaled units and  
performs range checking before sending the outputs.  
11 Send Reference Parameters to Intelligent Modules  
Next, the BIU sends reference parameter data from its tables to intelligent modules except a  
Synchronization module. If the BIU is unable to contact a module it generates a fault report.  
12 Move Group Data to Intelligent Modules  
The BIU moves group data from intelligent modules or from its own internal memories to any  
intelligent modules, except a Synchronization module, that is configured to receive data during that  
sweep. If the move fails, a fault is generated.  
Background Tasks  
After performing all the data transfers described above, the BIU performs a sequence of  
background tasks such as fault processing, scanning module IDs, and testing memory.  
4-6  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
BIU Backplane Scan Time  
The backplane scan time for the Genius BIU depends on: the type and number of modules present  
in the Field Control station, the scan time of the Genius bus, and the number and type of Group  
Data Move definitions.  
Shorter Genius bus scan times typically impose more overhead on the BIU, increasing backplane  
times. Longer Genius bus scan times tend to reduce the overall load to the BIU and thus slightly  
decrease backplane scan times.  
An estimate of backplane scan times can be found using this equation:.  
Backplane scan time (mS) = ( I/O X ( 0.8 + ( 2.25 / Genius Bus Scan ) ) ) + Groups + MFP + 1  
In the equation:  
I/O  
=
+
+
+
+
0.150 X number of conventional module discrete (I and Q) bytes  
0.500 X number of conventional module analog (AI and AQ) words  
0.090 X number of intelligent module discrete (I and Q) bytes  
0.150 X number of intelligent module analog (AI and AQ) words  
0.500 X number of I/O modules  
Groups  
=
+
+
.0.015 X number of bytes, internal BIU table moves  
0.093 X number of bytes, BIU / module moves  
0.175 X number of bytes, module to module moves  
MFP  
=
MFP logic sweep time (if MFP synchronized)  
Example 1:  
Four modules, no Group Data Moves. Genius bus speed is 47mS.  
Slot  
Module  
Data per Module  
Time per  
word / byte  
Total Time  
in mS  
1
16-Point Grouped Analog Input  
Module (IC670ALG240)  
16 words AI  
11 bytes I  
2 bytes Q  
.150  
.090  
.090  
.150  
.500  
.150  
.090  
.090  
.150  
.500  
Total I/O  
2.40  
0.99  
0.18  
2
3
4
Conventional discrete output module 2 bytes Q  
Conventional analog output module 4 words AQ  
0.30  
2.00  
RTD Input module  
4 words AI  
4 bytes I  
0.60  
0.36  
1 byte Q  
0.09  
4 words AQ  
0.30  
+
=
number of modules ( 4 )  
2.00  
9.52  
9.52 X ( 0.8 X ( 2.25 / 47 mS ) )  
8.07 mS  
0.00  
+
+
+
Groups (none)  
Micro Field Processor (none)  
0.00  
1.00  
Estimated backplane scan time  
9.07 mS  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 4 Operation  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
Example 2:  
Five modules, one Group Data Move. Genius bus speed is 26mS.  
Slot  
Module  
Data per Module  
Time per  
word / byte  
Total Time  
in mS  
1
2
3
4
5
Conventional analog output module 4 words AQ  
Conventional analog input module 8 words AI  
.500  
.500  
.150  
.150  
.150  
2.00  
4.00  
0.30  
0.30  
2.40  
Conventional discrete output module 2 bytes Q  
Conventional discrete input module 2 bytes I  
16-Point Grouped Analog Input  
Module (IC670ALG240)  
16 words AI  
11 bytes I  
2 bytes Q  
.090  
0.99  
0.18  
.090  
+
=
number of modules ( 5 )  
.500  
2.50  
Total I/O  
12.67  
11.23 mS  
0.96  
12.67 X ( 0.8 X ( 2.25 / 26 mS ) )  
64 bytes: Internal BIU  
table move  
+
Groups  
+
+
Micro Field Processor (none)  
0.00  
1.00  
Estimated backplane scan time  
13.19 mS  
4-8  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Data Transfer Between the BIU and the Host  
Each bus scan, a Bus Interface Unit exchanges the following data with the host:  
It sends an input message with up to 128 bytes of discrete and/or analog inputs.  
It receives an output message with up to 128 bytes of discrete and/or analog outputs.  
The exact length of these messages is determined by the network I/O map configured for the Bus  
Interface Unit.  
Data in the BIU's Network (Bus) Map  
As mentioned previously, the BIU has 256 bytes of memory available for each of the four types of  
data (discrete and analog inputs and outputs: I, Q, AI, and AQ). For each data type, up to half (128)  
of the 256 bytes can be used for the data that will be exchanged on the Genius bus. During BIU  
configuration, starting addresses and lengths are set up for each of the BIU's four types of I/O  
memory. These addresses and lengths define the BIU's network I/O map. The data from each table  
(I, AI, Q, and AQ) must be contiguous.  
BIU Memory Type  
Designation  
Amount Available in BIU  
Maximum Length for  
Network Map  
I
256 bytes  
256 bytes  
256 bytes  
256 bytes  
up to 1024 contiguous bits  
up to 1024 contiguous bits  
up to 64 contiguous words  
up to 64 contiguous words  
Q
AI  
AQ  
Note that although it is possible to configure up to 128 bytes of memory in the network map for  
each data type, the maximum amount that can be included in the map is a total of 128 bytes of  
inputs (I plus AI) and 128 bytes of outputs (Q plus AQ).  
Data to be exchanged on the bus must be configured to use references within the network map  
configured for the BIU. Data of individual I/O modules may be configured anywhere within  
available memory. It is possible to have inputs or outputs within the I/O station that are not  
exchanged on the Genius bus-that is, data that is completely local to the I/O station. For example,  
the I/O station might include a Micro Field Processor performing local data processing.  
Communications on the Genius Bus  
After a Bus Interface Unit completes a successful login with the host, it begins sending input data  
on the bus and accepting output data from the bus. The BIU communicates on the bus repetitively  
and asynchronously. When the BIU receives the Genius bus communications token, it sends the  
most recent data from the configured portion of its I and AI memories on the bus. As mentioned,  
these memories are repeatedly updated whenever the Bus Interface Unit scans the input modules in  
the station.  
The Bus Interface Unit receives new outputs from the host when the host's bus controller has the  
communications token. It places these outputs into the configured portion of its Q and AQ output  
tables. These outputs are then passed to the devices in the station on the BIU's next I/O scan.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 4 Operation  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
Input Data Sent by the Bus Interface Unit  
When the Bus Interface Unit takes its turn on the bus, it sends one input data message containing  
the latest values for all configured discrete inputs followed by all configured analog inputs.  
Because they are broadcast (like all Genius inputs), they can be obtained by any Bus Controller on  
the bus.  
Input Data Message  
(up to 128 bytes)  
discrete inputs  
Configured I Length  
I starting reference data  
analog inputs  
To CPU  
Configured AI Length  
AI starting reference data  
The data lengths are equal to the configured lengths of I and AI data selected for the Bus Interface  
Unit (regardless of the host CPU type or the actual amount of output data needed for the modules  
physically present in the station). Either length may be zero.  
The discrete inputs appear in the input message in the same sequence as their assigned input  
references. Each discrete input module occupies one byte per eight circuits.  
The analog inputs are also in the same sequence as their assigned input references. Each analog  
input module occupies two bytes (one word) for each analog channel.  
The Bus Interface Unit sends this data from its internal I and AI memories, beginning at the start  
locations selected during station configuration.  
Input Defaults  
When configuring input modules, either a default state or hold last state can be selected. If an input  
module is removed or fails to operate correctly, the chosen state is substituted for actual input data.  
A diagnostic message is provided to indicate loss of module. Forced input data is not affected.  
I/O Data Handling by Host  
How the host handles input data from the Bus Interface Unit depends on the host type:  
A Series 90-70 PLC places the data in the %I and %AI references selected during PLC  
configuration. These must be the same references selected during Bus Interface Unit  
configuration.  
A Series Six or Series Five PLC places the data into I/O table or register memory. A  
beginning address in Series Six or Series Five I/O Table memory can be entered during station  
configuration.  
A host computer with a PCIM module places the data into the input table segment that  
corresponds to the serial bus address (Device Number) of the Bus Interface Unit.  
4-10  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
Outputs from the Host to the BIU  
Each time the host's Bus Controller has the bus communications token, it sends any outputs it has  
received from the CPU to the devices on the bus. Outputs for the Bus Interface Unit are sent in one  
output data message, with all configured discrete outputs followed by all configured analog  
outputs.  
Output Data Message  
(up to 128 bytes)  
discrete outputs  
analog outputs  
To  
Station  
Configured Q Length  
Configured AQ Length  
Q starting reference data  
AQ starting reference data  
The data lengths are equal to the configured lengths of Q and AQ data selected for the Bus  
Interface Unit (regardless of the host CPU type or the actual amount of output data needed for the  
modules physically present in the station). Either length may be zero.  
Output Data Format  
The output data format shown above is required by the BIU.  
When generating the output data message, a Series 90-70 Bus Controller automatically places the  
Q data ahead of the AQ data. Other types of host must send an output message consisting of the  
correct number of bytes of discrete output data followed by the correct number of bytes of analog  
output data.  
As soon as new output data is received, the Bus Interface Unit checks it to be sure the data is error-  
free and of the correct length. The length must match the combined lengths of the discrete output  
data and analog output data that have been configured for the Bus Interface Unit's network I/O  
map. After verifying the accuracy of the data, the Bus Interface Unit puts the data in its Q and Q  
tables, and begins passing it to the output modules in the station. Each discrete output module  
receives one byte of data for each eight circuits. Each analog output module receives two bytes  
(one word) for each analog channel.  
Output Defaults  
On powerup, all outputs go to their programmed default state, except outputs which had previously  
been forced--they go immediately to their forced state or value.  
If CPU communications are lost for 3 bus scans, all outputs that are not presently forced will either  
default or hold their last state, as configured.  
Conventional I/O modules can have a configured output default value. Intelligent modules default  
outputs are always zero.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 4 Operation  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
Genius Bus Scan Time  
The Genius bus scan time is dependent on the number of devices and amount of data traffic on the  
bus. The bus scan time may vary from 3-400mS, but 20-30mS is typical. Bus Controllers impose a  
minimum Genius bus scan time of 3mS. Therefore, Genius bus scan time can never be less than  
3mS. The Genius bus scan time contribution for Field Control station depends on its I/O data  
usage. The table below shows the scan time contribution, at each baud rate, for stations with a total  
of 16, 32, 64, 128, and 256 bytes, when the Bus Interface Unit receives outputs from  
only one bus  
controller at a time.  
To find the exact scan time contribution for a station, follow the procedure below.  
Total Amount of Input and  
Output Data for  
Contribution time in mS at each baud rate  
153.6 Kb  
std  
153.6 Kb  
ext  
76.8 Kb  
38.4 Kb  
Field Control Station  
16 bytes  
2.09  
3.24  
2.16  
3.31  
3.83  
6.12  
7.16  
11.74  
20.89  
39.20  
75.80  
32 bytes  
64 bytes  
5.52  
5.60  
10.69  
19.85  
38.15  
128 bytes  
10.10  
19.25  
10.17  
19.32  
256 bytes (fully-loaded)  
Procedure for Estimating Bus Scan Time for a Field Control Station  
1. Find the total number of input bytes and output bytes. (Each analog channels is 2 bytes. Eight  
discrete points are one byte).  
number of input bytes  
number of output bytes  
total bytes  
= ________  
= ________  
= ________  
2. With this total, calculate a scan time contribution using the formula below that corresponds to  
the Genius bus baud rate.  
Formula for 153.6 Kbaud Standard:  
0.943mS + (0.0715 x total bytes) = ________ mS  
Formula for 153.6 Kbaud Extended:  
1.015mS + (0.0715 x total bytes) = ________ mS  
Formula for 76.8 Kbaud:  
1.538mS + (0.143 x total bytes)  
Formula for 38.4 Kbaud:  
= ________ mS  
2.583mS + (0.286 x total bytes)  
= ________ mS  
Other devices on the bus, including the Bus Controller, Hand-held Monitor, and I/O blocks also  
add to the bus scan time. The (Volume 1) shows how to calculate  
Genius I/O System Manual  
overall bus scan time for all of the devices on a bus. Remember that the Genius bus scan time can  
never be less than the 3mS minimum enforced by the bus controller.  
4-12  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
Throughput  
If an output in the station is tied to an input in the same station, the output changes state (or value,  
in the case of an analog output module) within a few milliseconds of the new output being sent  
from the bus controller to the Bus Interface Unit. (To guarantee that an output changes state, that  
state must be present for at least one BIU sweep time or bus scan time, whichever is greater.)  
The input which is tied to the output responds as soon as any load-effects have settled out and input  
filtering is completed. This may occur as soon as the Bus Interface Unit's next I/O scan.  
If the host is a PLC, an input must be present for at least one PLC sweep time plus one Genius bus  
scan time plus one BIU sweep time to guarantee its detection by the PLC. If the input changes  
state only briefly, and then changes again before the input data is sent on the bus, the interim state  
may be overwritten in the Bus Interface Unit's internal memory by some new input state or value  
before it can be sent.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 4 Operation  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
Operation of the BIU with a Micro Field Processor  
The Micro Field Processor (MFP) is a specialized Micro PLC that provides local input/output logic  
within a Field Control I/O station. The MFP itself does not perform an I/O scan; that function is  
performed by the BIU.  
MFP and BIU Synchronization  
Automatic operation of the Micro Field Processor must be synchronized with that of the BIU.  
Synchronization between the MFP and the BIU occurs at the following points:  
1. The MFP waits for group data from the BIU.  
2. The MFP waits for its input reference parameter data (see page for a discussion of reference  
parameter data) from the BIU. After receiving the reference parameter data from the BIU, the  
MFP solves its logic program.  
3. After solving its logic program, the MFP waits for the BIU to request its output reference  
parameter data. Or, if the MFP is still busy, the BIU waits for the Micro Field Processor to  
finish solving its logic.  
4. The MFP waits for the BIU to request any group data from the MFP.  
The diagram on the next page shows the basic points of synchronization between a BIU and an  
MFP. The Micro Field Processor always performs housekeeping and programmer window  
functions regardless of the combination of BIU and MFP modes.  
MFP I/O References  
The MFP itself has the following configurable references:  
I001  
to I512  
Q001 to Q512  
AI001 to AI128  
AQ001 to AQ128  
References used by the host may map to these MFP references, although that is not necessary.  
Appendix D gives examples of I/O reference assignments.  
MFP Operating Modes  
In the Standard Program Sweep mode, the Micro Field Processor executes each sweep as quickly  
as possible with a varying amount of time consumed each sweep.  
In the Constant Sweep Time mode, each sweep consumes the same amount of time. This time is  
configurable to be from 5 to 200 milliseconds.  
When the MFP is in Stop mode, the application program is not executed. In this mode, it is  
possible to choose whether or not the I/O is scanned (internally, by the MFP) and whether  
communications with the programmer will continue.  
If the BIU requests data from the Micro Field Processor while the MFP is in Stop Fault mode, the  
requested data will either be defaulted or held in its last state, depending on the configuration of the MFP.  
In Stop-No I/O mode, the MFP updates its internal I/AI tables with data received from the BIU,  
and sends zeros for all data (reference or group) to the BIU.  
4-14  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
Synchronous Operation of a BIU and a Micro Field Processor  
Bus Interface Unit  
Micro Field Processor  
1
2
3
Read all inputs from conventional  
discrete and analog input modules  
MFP Waits  
Read all reference parameter inputs from  
“smart” modules  
MFP receives Group Data  
from the BIU  
Read all group data moves whose  
destination is the BIU, except groups  
whose source is a Synchronization module  
*
*
MFP Waits  
4
Send Group Data moves  
to a Synchronization module  
MFP receives data from the BIU  
and places the data in its input tables  
5
6
Send outputs from BIU  
to Synchronization modules  
MFP “BUSY”  
MFP places received data into its  
configured memory locations  
Move all inputs within BIU network map  
from BIU tables to the Genius  
communications buffers  
MFP solves its program logic  
utilizing newly-received data  
7
Move all outputs within BIU network  
map from the Genius communications  
buffers to the BIU internal tables  
MFP updates its  
configured memory locations  
BIU Waits if  
MFP is busy  
8
9
Read all reference input parameters from  
a Synchronization module  
MFP Waits  
MFP provides data from its  
output tables to the BIU  
Read all group data to the BIU  
from a Synchronization module  
*
*
10  
11  
Send all outputs to conventional modules  
MFP Waits  
Send all reference parameter outputs to  
“smart” modules, but not to  
MFP provides group data  
to the BIU  
a Synchronization module  
The tasks shown in shaded boxes are  
12  
Send all group data to all “smart”  
modules except a Synchronizarion module  
performed only if the I/O Station includes a  
Synchronization module. The Synchronization  
module is usually a Micro FIeld Processor.  
.
.
.
*
Group Data is moved only  
during its configured BIU sweeps.  
Background Tasks  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 4 Operation  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Overview of Synchronous Operation  
The following diagram and table show how data is handled during synchronous operation.  
BIU  
Tables  
Conventional  
Input  
1. Inputs  
Module  
2. All inputs  
3. Groups  
I
Discrete  
Inputs  
4.  
3.  
4.  
AI  
Analog  
Inputs  
6. to  
network  
4. Groups  
5. All outputs  
8. All inputs  
9. Groups  
Micro  
Field  
Processor  
Network  
Smart  
Module  
Q
Discrete  
Outputs  
7. from  
network  
10. Outputs  
AQ  
Analog  
Outputs  
Conventional  
Output  
Module  
11. All outputs  
12. Groups  
12.  
12.  
Sweep  
Step  
Action  
Forces, if  
mapped  
No Network  
Cannot Read  
Module  
1
Inputs from conventional modules  
All inputs from intelligent modules  
Groups not from MFP: to BIU tables  
Groups to MFP  
yes  
yes  
yes  
yes  
-
-
defaults  
2
-
defaults  
3
-
defaults  
4
-
-
-
5
All outputs to MFP (starts solution)  
Move to network  
-
6
-
n/a  
n/a  
-
n/a  
7
Move from network  
yes  
yes  
yes  
n/a  
8
All inputs from MFP (gets solution)  
Groups from MFP to BIU tables  
Outputs to conventional modules  
All outputs to intelligent modules  
Groups to intelligent modules  
Data displayed on HHM  
defaults  
9
-
defaults  
10  
11  
12  
(13)  
-
-
-
-
defaults at step 7  
defaults at step 7  
defaults at step 7  
-
-
-
defaults  
-
4-16  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
Backing Up Micro Field Processor Outputs  
The network can back up outputs normally controlled by the Micro Field Processor if the MFP fails  
or goes into Stop Faulted mode.  
To create this backup capability for one or more output modules, do the following:  
1. Configure the module outputs to lie within  
map.  
the BIU's Network Map and the MFP's I/O  
both  
For example:  
Output References  
Bus Interface Unit Outputs  
Q00001 - Q00128  
Q00001-Q00016  
Network  
Map  
Q00017-Q00128  
Q00001-Q00016  
Q00017-Q00128  
Micro Field Processor Outputs  
Q00001 - Q00128  
Module Outputs  
Q00001 - Q00016  
46738  
2. Configure Hold Last State (not Default) for the MFP output table.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 4 Operation  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
How the Network Backs Up MFP Outputs  
This technique works because of the synchronization between the operations of the Bus Interface  
Unit and the Micro Field Processor. The diagram below shows details of the BIU/MFP  
synchronization process. The numbers on the left side are the same as the numbers on the  
synchronization diagram.  
Bus Interface Unit  
Micro Field Processor  
Move all outputs within BIU network  
map from the Genius communications  
buffers to the BIU internal tables  
7
BIU Waits if  
MFP is busy  
8
Read all reference input parameters from  
a Synchronization module  
MFP provides data  
to BIU  
Send all outputs to conventional modules  
10  
The Bus Interface Unit receives output data for the backed-up output module(s) from the Genius  
bus (step 7). In step 8, the BIU receives data from the Micro Field Processor. Any data with the  
same reference assignments overwrites the data already received from the bus. When the BIU sends  
outputs to I/O modules (step 10), it sends the most recent contents of the output references. If the  
MFP has not provided fresh output data (for example, if the MFP has stopped communicating with  
the BIU), the outputs from the network are sent to the modules instead. Note that this will not work  
if MFP outputs are configured to default instead of Hold Last State, because selecting default  
causes the BIU to write default values into the output references at step 8.  
4-18  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
Backing Up BIU Outputs with a Micro Field Processor  
The Micro Field Processor can take over control of outputs normally provided from the network by  
the Bus Interface Unit, if those outputs become unavailable. This technique requires the addition of  
ladder logic to the application program.  
To create this backup capability for one or more modules, do the following:  
1. Configure the module outputs to the Bus Interface Unit  
of the BIU's network map (that  
outside  
is, the data exchanged with the bus), but  
the I/O range of the MFP.  
within  
For example:  
Network  
Map  
Q00001-Q00024  
(BIU) References Assigned  
to Module Outputs  
Q00025-Q00040  
(BIU) References Assigned  
to Micro Field Processor  
Q00001-Q00024  
Q00025-Q00040  
Q00041-Q00128  
Module Outputs  
Q00025-Q00040  
2. Create variables to monitor the presence of network outputs, BIU outputs, and to serve as a  
heartbeat to verify the presence of the network.  
For the example, the variables are:  
VARIABLE DECLARATION TABLE  
REFERENCE  
NICKNAME  
REFERENCE DESCRIPTION  
I00001  
I00017  
Q00001  
NETOUTS  
NETPRES  
STOUTS  
Network outputs  
Network presence status  
Station outputs  
3. Add ladder logic like the following example to the application program.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 4 Operation  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4
Example Ladder Logic  
[ BLOCK DECLARATIONS ]  
[ START OF PROGRAM LOGIC ]  
(***********************************************************************  
(*Input 17 comes from the network and is always ON while the network is  
(*sending outputs to the Field Control Station. The MFP is set to defaul  
(*its received data if the network disappears. Therefore when the networ  
(*disappears Input 17 will be OFF. Input 17 is a heartbeat detecting the  
(*presence of network outputs.  
*)  
(*When %I17 is ON send all data received from the netrork to the output  
(*table to allow the network to control outputs on the station. *)  
<<RUNG 6 STEP #0003>>  
NETPRES  
%I0017  
MOVE_  
INT  
NETOUTS  
%I0001  
STOUTS  
Q%Q0001  
IN  
LEN  
00001  
(***********************************************************************  
(*When %I17 is OFF the network is not present, allow the MFP to control  
(*what data goes to the output table to control outputs on the station.  
(***********************************************************************  
<<RUNG 8 STEP #0006>>  
NETPRES  
%I0017  
ADD_  
INT  
MOVE_  
INT  
STOUTS  
Q%Q0001  
Q
%R0001 I1  
%R0001 %R0001  
IN  
LEN  
CONST  
+00001 I2  
00001  
<<RUNG 9 STEP #0009>>  
ALW_ON  
%S0007  
EQ_  
INT  
Q
%R0001 I1  
MOVE_  
INT  
CONST  
+32767 I2  
Q
CONST IN  
%R0001  
LEN  
+00000  
00001  
[ END OF PROGRAM LOGIC ]  
4-20  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Station Configuration  
Chapter  
5
This chapter explains how to configure a Bus Interface Unit and the I/O modules in a station using  
a Hand-held Monitor. HHM version 4.6 (IC660HHM501J) or later is required. Note that the BIU  
and I/O modules can also be configured via datagrams from the host. Datagram formats are  
detailed in chapter 8.  
Setting up the serial bus address and baud rate  
Special instructions for Series 90-70 PLC systems  
Set up the Hand-held Monitor  
Display the configuration menu  
Genius configuration  
Select the baud rate  
Select the serial bus address for the Bus Interface Unit  
Select a Series Six or Series Five PLC reference address  
Configure fault reporting  
Configure Genius bus redundancy  
Configure CPU redundancy  
Select configuration protection  
Reference address configuration  
Module Configuration  
Read a module configuration  
Delete or edit an existing module configuration  
Select a module type  
Configure specific I/O modules.  
Configure a Micro Field Processor  
For Additional Information, Also See:  
The Hand-held Monitor datasheet for basic operating instructions.  
The programming/setup instructions for the system host. The instructions in this chapter are for  
local configuration of the BIU and the modules in the I/O station. The system host must also be  
configured appropriately to exchange information with the BIU. If the host is a Series 90-70 PLC,  
with Logicmaster 90 software release 5.0 or earlier the Genius Bus Interface Unit must be  
configured as a "Generic I/O" device.  
GFK-0825F  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Configuring the Serial Bus Address and Baud Rate  
Before a Bus Interface Unit can communicate on the Genius bus, its serial bus address must be  
configured. That means if you install a Bus Interface Unit and power it up BEFORE configuring its  
serial bus address, it does not communicate on the bus. When you subsequently configure the serial  
bus address, the Bus Interface Unit begins communicating on the bus immediately. The baud rate  
must be set first in order to configure the BIU online. See the instructions for setting on the Hand-  
held Monitor on the next page.  
Special Instructions for Series 90-70 PLC Systems  
Assigning the serial bus address is the first configuration step, prior to assignment of the network  
map for the Bus Interface Unit. So when the Bus Interface Unit starts communicating, its network  
map has not yet been assigned. That causes the Series 90-70 PLC to generate CONFIGURATION  
MISMATCH faults. One such fault appears for each non-matching data type and length.  
Depending on the PLC's own configuration, CONFIGURATION MISMATCH faults may be either  
diagnostic only, or “fatal" (shutting down the system).  
To avoid problems, you can do either of the following (method A is preferred):  
A. Check the PLC configuration to determine whether CONFIGURATION MISMATCH is set up  
as a fatal fault. If it is, powering up the bus and Bus Interface Unit then assigning a serial bus  
address will cause a fatal error and shut down the PLC.  
If CONFIGURATION MISMATCH is a diagnostic fault, you can install the Bus Interface  
Unit on the bus and power it up before configuring its serial bus address.  
The Bus Interface Unit will start communicating immediately, generating  
CONFIGURATION MISMATCH faults. Complete the configuration, ignoring the faults  
temporarily. When you complete the Bus Interface Unit configuration, the Bus Interface  
Unit drops off the bus briefly, generating a LOSS OF DEVICE fault. When it returns, an  
ADDITION OF DEVICE diagnostic appears. If no new mismatch faults occur after the  
Bus Interface Unit comes back on the bus (check the timestamp on the faults), the I/O  
.maps match in the PLC and in the Bus Interface Unit.  
If CONFIGURATION MISMATCH is a fatal fault, configure the Bus Interface Unit's  
serial bus address and I/O map offline,  
HHM  
before installing the Bus Interface Unit.  
setup instructions for offline configuration are on the next page. When you then install and  
power up the Bus Interface Unit, CONFIGURATION MISMATCH faults will not be  
generated. You can complete the rest of the configuration after installation and powerup, if  
you prefer.  
B. Take the BIU off the bus prior to configuring the Bus Interface Unit. Configure the Bus  
Interface Unit baud rate, serial bus address and network map while the BIU is off the bus.  
5-2  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Set Up the Hand-held Monitor  
1. If the Bus Interface Unit is connected to an operating bus, the Hand-held Monitor must  
be the ONLY Hand-held Monitor plugged into any device on the bus.  
If the Bus Interface Unit is NOT presently connected to a properly-terminated Genius bus,  
install a 75 Ohm terminating resistor across the Main Bus Serial 1 and Serial 2 terminals on the  
Bus Interface Unit Terminal Block. The resistor is needed only for off-line communications  
between the HHM and the Bus Interface Unit; it should be removed prior to bus installation  
(unless the BIU Terminal Block is the last device on the bus).  
2. Begin with the HHM turned off. Attach it to the connector on the Bus Interface Unit.  
mon  
GENIUS  
H
a
n
d
H
e
ld
M
o
nitor  
cfg  
GEFanuc  
F1  
7
F2  
8
F3  
9
F4  
H
o
m
e  
4
5
6
Y
M
e
nu  
1
2
3
C
l
ear  
+
-
0
On  
O
f
f  
D
3. Turn the Hand-held Monitor on. Adjust its baud rate if necessary.  
Previously unconfigured factory-shipped modules operate at 153.6 Kbaud standard. You  
should be aware of the operating baud rate before trying to communicate with the Bus  
Interface Unit, and the Hand-held Monitor's baud rate should be set correspondingly. After  
HHM powerup and setup, the Home menu appears.  
F1:HHM UTILITIES  
F2:ANALYZE  
F3:CONFIGURATION  
F4:DEVICE MEMORY  
If the message FUNCTION DISABLED appears during configuration, the corresponding HHM  
option has been disabled. To continue, it will be necessary to change HHM options in the HHM  
Utilities menu. If the message CONFIG PROTECTED appears, the Bus Interface Unit  
configuration has been protected. To continue, it will be necessary to "unprotect" the  
configuration.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Create a New Configuration  
If the Bus Interface Unit has already had its Serial Bus Address configured, go to the instructions  
on the next page.  
If the Bus Interface Unit has not been assigned a Serial Bus Address, select F3 (Configuration)  
from the previous menu. The configuration Main Menu appears:  
F1:PROG BLOCK ID  
F2:CONFIG BLOCK  
F3:COPY CONFIG  
F4:  
Select Program Block ID (F1).  
Assigning a Serial Bus Address to a New BIU  
The first step in configuring a new Bus Interface Unit is to assign its Serial Bus Address (block  
number) on the Program Block ID screen. There are 32 available addresses (from 0 to 31) on a  
bus. One is needed for the Hand-held Monitor; typically, this is 0. Another is needed for the Bus  
Controller. Typically, this is 31 (30 or 31 for redundancy systems). A Bus Interface Unit is  
usually assigned a Serial Bus Address from 1 to 29 or 30. Duplicate Serial Bus Addresses disrupt  
communications and are not permitted.  
PROG BLOCK ID  
I/O  
?- ??  
BLOCK NO. ?  
ref blk  
nxt  
1. Press F2 (Block). Then, enter the Device Number (1-30). For example:  
PROG BLOCK ID  
I/O  
?- ??  
BLOCK NO. 14  
blk  
nxt  
If you make a mistake, press F2 again, then enter the correct number.  
2. If you are configuring the Bus Interface Unit on an operating bus, when you press the Enter  
key, an error message appears if the number has been used for another device. If the Bus  
Interface Unit is not online, be sure to assign a unique Serial Bus Address, or there will be a  
conflict when the Bus Interface Unit is powered up on the bus.  
3. Press the Home key to return to the HHM's Main Menu. The message Please Wait appears.  
5-4  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Configure the Bus Interface Unit  
From the HHM's Main Menu:  
F1:HHM UTILITIES  
F2:ANALYZE  
F3:CONFIGURATION  
F4:DEVICE MEMORY  
Press F2 twice to display the HHM's special set of menus for the Bus Interface Unit. (To display  
these menus, a serial bus address must have been configured for the Bus Interface Unit on the  
Program Block ID screen). An overview of these menus is shown on the next page.  
This is the HHM's Main Menu for Field Control:  
F1 Monitor  
F2 Configuration  
From this menu, press F2 (Configuration). This menu appears:  
F1 Genius Config  
F2 Module Config  
More  
From this menu, you can:  
Press F1 to configure the Genius Bus Interface Unit. Instructions begin on the next page.  
Press F2 to configure the individual modules in the station. Instructions begin on page 5-23.  
Press F4 to display the next configuration screen:  
F1 Grp Data Move  
F2 Previous Menu  
More  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Field Control HHM Menu Overview  
F1:HHM UTILITIES  
F2:ANALYZE  
F3:CONFIGURATION  
F4:DEVICE MEMORY  
F2  
F3  
F1:MONITOR BLOCK  
F2:MNTR/CNTL REF  
F3:BLOCK/BUS STS  
F4:PULSE TEST  
F1:PROG BLOCK ID  
F2:CONFIG BLOCK  
F3:COPY CONFIG  
F4:  
F1, F2  
F2  
F2  
F1 Monitor  
F2 Configuration  
Field Control  
Configuration Screens  
F2  
F4 (more)  
F1 Genius Config  
F2 Module Config  
F1 Grp Data Move  
F2 Previous Menu  
Field Control  
Monitor I/O Screens  
F1  
F1  
F1  
F1  
F1  
F2  
F1  
Grp Data Move 01  
NNNNNNNNNNN  
F3  
F1 Monitor I/O  
F2 Faults  
IO Scan  
ENABLED  
Device SBA  
20  
F1  
F4  
F3 Previous Menu  
F1  
Clear  
key  
F1  
F1  
Group Move 1:0  
Source Slot:  
F2  
F2  
0
F1  
F2  
Baud Rate?  
153.6k std  
Network  
ENABLED  
F1  
F2  
F1  
F1 First 16 Flts  
F2 Last 16 Flts  
F3 Previous Menu  
Group Move 1:0  
I0001  
0
B
F4  
Dest Slot:  
7
F2  
<
>
frc hex  
Stat Tbl Addr  
0001  
F1  
Blk Map Start I  
I00001  
F2  
F1  
F2  
change data type  
F3  
Group Move 1:1  
Src Ref:%AI0009  
F1  
F2  
force  
Report Faults  
YES  
F1  
F2  
change offset  
change I/O type  
Blk Map Lngth I  
64  
F1, F2  
F1  
F2  
Group Move 1:1  
Des Ref: %R00002  
Slot 1 Fault#01  
CONFIG  
BSM Present  
NO  
F1  
F1  
F2  
Start, Length for Q  
F1  
F2  
Group Move 1:1  
Byte Len: 032  
F4  
Start, Length for AI  
Start, Length for AQ  
BSM Controller  
NO  
F1  
F1  
F2  
Source and Dest . Slot & Ref  
for Moves 2, 3, 4 in Group  
F2  
CPU Redundancy  
Hot Stby Mode  
Map has changed  
Accept?  
F2  
F1  
F2  
Move Deflt  
YYY  
F1  
CONFIG PROTECT  
Disable  
(F2 moves cursor  
through modules)  
F1  
F2  
F1  
F2  
Specific Hand-held Monitor versions  
may have different menus from  
those shown here.  
Sweep Enab  
NNNNNNNNNNN  
Clear  
key  
Tag Name  
TEMP  
F2  
F4  
slot not  
configured  
slot previously  
configured  
F2  
F2  
S1  
Empty  
S1  
Q:16  
Q01785- Q01800  
F1  
F4 (read)  
Individual Module  
Configuration  
Screens  
SI: Mod Type ?  
Discrete Out 16  
5-6  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Change the Serial Bus Address of the Bus Interface Unit  
For a new BIU, the Serial Bus Address is assigned on the Program Block ID screen, as described  
previously. If you want to change the Serial Bus Address of a previously-configured BIU, use the  
Device SBA screen shown below, instead.  
When you press F1 (Genius Configuration) from the Configuration menu, the following screen  
appears:  
Device SBA  
14  
Serial Bus  
Address  
Prv >  
entr  
Press F1 if you want to  
return to the previous  
menu.  
On this screen, you can change a previously-configured Serial Bus Address (block number). There  
are 32 available addresses (from 0 to 31) on a bus. One is needed for the Hand-held Monitor;  
typically this is Device Number 0. Another is needed for the Bus Controller. Typically, this is 31  
(30 or 31 for redundancy systems). A Bus Interface Unit is usually assigned a Serial Bus Address  
from 1 to 29 or 30. Duplicate SBAs disrupt communications and are not permitted.  
Note  
If a Bus Interface Unit has a Serial Bus Address conflict on an operating bus, it  
will not scan the modules in the station until the fault is cleared.  
1. Enter a Serial Bus Address using the HHM keypad.  
2. Press the F4 (entr) key. An error message appears if the number has been used for another  
device on the bus.  
If you want to go to the next screen without changing the Serial Bus Address, press F2 ( > ).  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Select the Baud Rate  
Genius bus communications can occur at any of four baud rates: 153.6 Kbaud standard, 153.6  
Kbaud extended, 76.8 Kbaud, or 38.4 Kbaud. The default is 153.6 K baud standard. The  
Genius  
gives guidelines for baud rate selection.  
I/O System User's Manual  
Each device's communications baud rate must be the same as that used by all other devices on the  
or the bus will not operate.  
bus,  
Baud Rate?  
153.5k std  
< > tgl entr  
1. If you want to go to the next screen without changing the baud rate, press F2 ( > ).  
If the baud rate should be changed, press F3 (toggle) to display the other baud rate choices.  
The asterisk means a choice now being displayed has been changed by pressing the F3 (tgl)  
key.  
Baud Rate?  
76.8k  
*
F3 (tgl) may be  
pressed to see  
other choices for  
this item.  
< > tgl entr  
2. When the desired baud rate appears, press F4 (enter). On this screen (only) the asterisk will  
remain until you power-cycle the Bus Interface Unit to implement the new baud rate.  
Note  
If the baud rate is changed on any block that is currently installed on an operating  
bus, it must be changed on all devices on that bus. After changing the baud rate,  
you must cycle power at the same time to all devices on the bus to use the new  
baud rate.  
5-8  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Select a Series Six or Series Five PLC Reference Address  
If the network controller is not a Series Six PLC or Series Five PLC, no entry is necessary here.  
Press F4 (entr) to go on.  
If the network controller is a Series Six PLC or Series Five PLC, an I/O or register reference  
address must be assigned to the Bus Interface Unit. This is done on the screen shown below.  
Stat Tbl Addr  
00000  
< > IO6 entr  
shows reference type  
1. The F3 key toggles the selection of Series Six I/O memory, Series Five I/O memory, or  
register memory.  
If I/O memory is used, the amount required is equal to the number of bits of discrete data  
PLUS analog data. Each analog reference used consumes 16 points. Data is stored beginning  
at the assigned I/O reference. In the Input Table, the sequence is: discrete inputs, then analog  
inputs. In the Output Table, the sequence is discrete outputs, then analog outputs. This is  
illustrated in chapter 3.  
If register memory is used, an amount is required that is equal to the total number of bytes of  
input data PLUS all of the output data. Data is stored beginning at the assigned register  
reference. The sequence is: discrete inputs, then analog inputs, then discrete outputs, and  
analog outputs last. See chapter 3 for more information.  
2. Key in the number of the block's beginning I/O or register reference. This may be:  
Series Six I/O  
Series Five I/O 1 to 2041  
Registers 1 to 16383 (or upper limit of CPU, which may be less)  
1 to 993  
3. Press the F4 (Entr) key.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Configure Fault Reporting  
On the next screen, select whether or not the Bus Interface Unit will perform any fault reporting.  
Report Faults  
YES  
< > tgl entr  
If you want to set up partial fault reporting for the station, you can set fault reporting to YES here  
but inhibit fault reporting for some or all individual modules in the station. Instructions for setting  
up or inhibiting fault reporting for individual modules are included in the module configuration  
portion of this chapter.  
1. If you want to go to the next screen without making a change, press F2 ( > ).  
If the Report Faults selection should be changed, press F3 (tgl).  
2. Press F4 (entr) to save the change and go to the next menu.  
5-10  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Configure Genius Bus Redundancy  
If the Bus Interface Unit will be used as a bus switching device itself, or located on a bus stub  
downstream of another device that acts as a bus switching device, BSM Present should be set to  
YES. For all other applications, set it to NO.  
BSM Present  
NO  
< > tgl entr  
1. If you want to go to the next screen without making a change, press F2 ( > ).  
If the selection should be changed, press F3 (tgl).  
2. Press F4 (entr).  
If you selected NO, go to the next page.  
If you selected YES, the following screen appears:  
BSM Controller  
NO  
< > tgl entr  
3. If the Bus Interface Unit will be used as the bus switching device itself, set BSM Controller to  
YES. For all other applications, set it to NO.  
Next, the Output Default Time screen appears:  
Out Def Time  
2.5 sec  
< > tgl entr  
4. If the total bus scan time is expected to exceed 100mS, set the Output Default Time to 10  
seconds. The Output Default Time is normally 2.5 seconds. If the Bus Interface Unit stops  
receiving outputs from the Bus Controller, it will wait for this specified time period before  
defaulting outputs in the station.  
If you want to go to the next screen without making a change, press F2 ( > ).  
If the selection should be changed, press F3 (tgl).  
5. Press F4 (entr).  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Configure CPU Redundancy  
If the Bus Interface Unit will be used on the same bus with two controllers (PLCs or network  
controller computers), and both of the controllers will send it outputs, the Bus Interface Unit must  
be set up for CPU Redundancy. The two types of CPU Redundancy, Hot Standby and Duplex, are  
defined below. If either type of redundancy is selected, the Bus Interface Unit will automatically  
provide inputs and diagnostics to both of the redundant CPUs.  
If the station contains any analog modules, the only form of CPU redundancy permitted is Hot  
Standby. The Hand-held Monitor will permit selection of either type of CPU redundancy. Do not  
select Duplex if there are any analog modules in the station.  
CPU Redundancy  
No Cntl Redund  
< > tgl entr  
1. If you want to go to the next screen without making a change, press F2 ( > ).  
If the selection should be changed, press F3 (tgl).  
Hot Standby CPU Redundancy  
A device configured for Hot Standby redundancy receives outputs from both CPUs. It is  
normally controlled by Device Number 31. If no outputs are available from Device  
Number 31 for a period of three bus scans, the outputs are immediately controlled by  
Device Number 30. If outputs are not available from either Device Number 30 or 31,  
outputs go to their configured default or hold their last state. In Hot Standby redundancy,  
Device Number 31 always has priority, so that when Device Number 31 is on-line, it  
controls the outputs.  
Duplex CPU Redundancy  
In Duplex mode, a  
Only all-discrete stations can operate in Duplex redundancy mode.  
device receives outputs simultaneously from both Device Number 30 and 31. The device  
compares the outputs. If corresponding outputs are the same, the device sets the output to  
that state. If corresponding outputs are not the same, the device will set the output to its  
configured ON or OFF Duplex Default State, which must be configured for all outputs in  
the station. If either Device Number 30 or 31 stops sending outputs to a device, its outputs  
are directly controlled by the remaining device. If both 30 and 31 stop sending outputs,  
the outputs in the station either default to their programmed default state (not the Duplex  
Default State), or hold their last state, as configured.  
5-12  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
2. Press F4 (entr).  
If you selected Duplex, the following screen appears:  
Duplex Default  
OFF  
< > tgl entr  
In Duplex Redundancy mode, the Bus Interface Unit may receive  
output states for  
different  
given points from the two CPUs. If that happens, the Bus Interface Unit "breaks the tie" by  
outputting the Duplex Default State to those points.  
3. If you want to go to the next screen without making a change, press F2 ( > ).  
To change the Duplex Default state, press F3 (tgl).  
4. Press F4 (entr) to save the new selection.  
Note  
If the Bus Interface Unit loses communications with BOTH CPUs, individual  
outputs go to their configured Hold Last State or Output Default State. (This  
selection is part of the individual modules' configurations).  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Select Configuration Protection  
This feature can be used to protect the station configuration. To make subsequent changes,  
protection must be removed again. Before the station is used, its configuration should be protected.  
CONFIG PROTECT  
Disable  
< > tgl entr  
1. If the selection shown on line 3 should be changed, press F3 (tgl). Press F4 (entr).  
2. This is the last Genius Bus Interface Unit configuration screen.  
Tag Name Screen  
Display only.  
Tag Name  
< > tgl entr  
Review or Continue Configuration  
If you want to review or change any of the Bus Interface Unit configuration entries, use the F1  
( < ) key to return to the first Bus Interface Unit configuration screen.  
If you want to continue to the next configuration screen, press the F2 ( > ) key.  
5-14  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Configure Field Control Modules  
Display the Bus Interface Unit configuration menu.  
F1 Genius Config  
F2 Module Config  
More  
From the Configuration Menu, press F2 to configure the individual modules in the station.  
Enable/Disable the I/O Scan  
On the next screen, you can enable or disable the Bus Interface Unit's I/O scanning. (The Bus  
Interface Unit begins scanning I/O as soon as it is powered up). Disabling the I/O scan will leave  
inputs and outputs holding their last states.  
IO Scan  
ENABLED  
Prv > tgl entr  
1. If you want to change the present selection, press F3 (tgl).  
2. Press F4 (entr). If you want to go to the next screen without changing the selection, press F2  
( > ).  
Disable Network I/O Updates  
On this screen, you can enable or disable I/O updates between the BIU and the bus. The BIU  
continues scanning the I/O modules, but does not exchange the data on the bus. A Series 90-70  
PLC will not report this condition as a Loss of Device. However, any alarm contacts in the Series  
90-70 PLC that are assigned to the BIU will be set.  
Network  
ENABLED  
< > tgl entr  
When the network scan is disabled, all inputs hold last state. For previously-configured modules,  
outputs mapped to the network will either default or hold their last state or value, as configured.  
1. If you want to change the present selection, press F3 (tgl).  
2. Press F4 (entr). If you want to go to the next screen without changing the selection, press F2  
( > ).  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Configure the Network Map for the Bus Interface Unit  
The next screens are used to assign the starting addresses and lengths for the Bus Interface Unit's  
network map.  
This is the data exchanged on the Genius bus.  
Blk Map Start I  
?
Indicates no data  
type has been  
< >  
entr  
selected yet.  
I
Q
discrete inputs (bits)  
discrete outputs (bits)  
A
AQ  
analog inputs (16-bit words)  
analog outputs (16-bit words)  
If the system host is a Series 90 PLC, the lengths must correspond to the memory assignments  
made for the Bus Interface Unit during PLC configuration. The starting data addresses configured  
for the BIU network map and the I/O modules in the station usually match the references  
configured for the PLC, but that is not required.  
If the network controller is a Series Six or Series Five PLC, only the length selected here is used;  
the entry made on the starting address screen is not relevant to PLC. For those PLC types, the  
starting address was assigned on an earlier screen.  
The following table shows the maximum amount of each data type that may be configured in the  
network map, and the highest reference address available for each type.  
BIU Memory  
Type  
Used For  
Maximum  
Length for  
Highest Available  
Reference Address  
Network Map  
I
discrete inputs, and status data  
from intelligent modules  
up to 1024  
contiguous bits  
65535  
65535  
9999  
Q
AI  
discrete outputs, and fault clearing  
for intelligent modules  
up to 1024  
contiguous bits  
analog inputs  
up to 64  
contiguous  
words  
AQ  
analog outputs  
up to 64  
contiguous  
words  
9999  
Data to be exchanged on the bus must use references configured here. Any I/O modules (  
or  
) configured outside the network map will be scanned by the Bus Interface  
portions of modules  
Unit, but the data will not be exchanged on the Genius network bus.  
The I/O references of modules in the I/O station are configured separately. Individual I/O modules  
may be configured anywhere within available memory. It is possible to have inputs or outputs  
within the I/O station that are not exchanged on the Genius bus-that is, data that is completely local  
to the I/O station. For example, the I/O station might include a Micro Field Processor performing  
local data processing.  
5-16  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Configuring Extra References in the BIU I/O Map  
Normally, there is no need to configure extra I/O references in the BIU's network I/O map.  
Although unused references do not contain meaningful data, they do add to the Genius bus scan  
time.  
One circumstance under which it might be best to configure extra I/O references would be to allow  
for future addition of I/O modules to a station in a system where the host uses the same reference  
addresses for data as the BIU. In such a system, reserving extra references or leaving vacancies at  
configuration time can be a convenient way to prepare for future additions to a station. (In a  
system where the BIU's reference addresses are not used by the host, changing the BIU's I/O map  
does not affect the host so there is no need to configure unused references for future modules.)  
Input Data Message with Some Inputs Not Used  
unused  
discrete  
references  
unused  
analog  
references  
discrete inputs  
analog inputs  
To CPU  
Configured I Length  
I starting reference data  
Configured AI Length  
AI starting reference data  
Example  
An application has two stations in a system where the host uses the BIU reference addresses.  
Station 2  
Station 1  
I0001 - I0064  
AI0001 - AI0008  
Q0001 - Q0032  
AQ0001 - AQ0008  
I0065 - I0128  
AI0009 - AI0016  
Q0033 - Q0064  
AQ0009 - AQ0016  
At a later time, it becomes necessary to add a discrete input module to station 1. However, in  
station 1, there are already enough input modules to use all of the assigned input references (I0001  
- I0064). Ideally, the extra module would be added to station 1 at I00065, but that is already used  
as a reference in station 2. The alternatives at this stage are:  
1. Change the map of station 2 to free up the needed contiguous I references.  
2. Change the map of station 1 to start at higher references, such as I0097 - I0160.  
3. Add a third I/O station to accommodate the additional modules.  
It would have been easier to add the module to station 1 if extra references had been configured  
originally, or if some vacancies had been allowed, as shown below.  
Station 2  
Station 1  
I0001 - I0096  
AI0001 - AI0008  
Q0001 - Q0032  
AQ0001 - AQ0008  
I0097 - I0160  
AI0009 - AI0016  
Q0033 - Q0064  
AQ0009 - AQ0016  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
You might use a worksheet like the one shown below to record the I/O references and Reference  
Parameters configured for the Bus Interface Unit and for the modules in the I/O Station.  
Slot 0 is the location of the BIU. The references you enter for the BIU are the ones that will be  
communicated on the Genius bus.  
Slots 1 through 8 (maximum) contain conventional I/O modules or intelligent modules. You will  
find another worksheet later in this chapter where you can record I/O assignments made for Group  
Data moves for intelligent modules such as the Micro Field Processor.  
Conventional discrete and analog I/O modules use just one type of data. However, “intelligent” I/O  
modules can use multiple data types.  
Module References and Reference Parameters Worksheet  
Slot #  
Module Type  
Bus Interface Unit  
Memory Type  
References Used  
Data Type  
bits  
Length  
0
I
Q
bits  
(These references are the ones  
transferred on the Genius bus).  
AI  
AQ  
I
2-byte words  
2-byte words  
bits  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Q
bits  
AI  
AQ  
I
2-byte words  
2-byte words  
bits  
Q
bits  
AI  
AQ  
I
2-byte words  
2-byte words  
bits  
Q
bits  
AI  
AQ  
I
2-byte words  
2-byte words  
bits  
Q
bits  
AI  
AQ  
I
2-byte words  
2-byte words  
bits  
Q
bits  
AI  
AQ  
I
2-byte words  
2-byte words  
bits  
Q
bits  
AI  
AQ  
I
2-byte words  
2-byte words  
bits  
Q
bits  
AI  
AQ  
I
2-byte words  
2-byte words  
bits  
Q
bits  
AI  
AQ  
2-byte words  
2-byte words  
5-18  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
1. For each data type to be exchanged on the bus, enter a starting address and a length. This  
screen shows the data type (I) and a starting address (00001) for discrete input data:  
Blk Map Start I  
I00001  
< >  
entr  
2. You can edit the address, or press F4 to accept it. Then, enter a length in bits for the I data. For  
example:  
Blk Map Lngth I  
64  
< >  
entr  
3. Press F4 (entr) to accept the value.  
4. Continue as above, entering starting addresses and lengths for the other data types. Lengths for  
AI and AQ are 2-byte words.  
Note  
The lengths entered must not add up to more than 128 bytes of inputs (discrete +  
analog) and 128 bytes of outputs (discrete + analog).  
The lengths selected should include all the I/O data that will be exchanged on the bus.  
If a data length is too short, modules that overflow the configured limit will not be  
serviced by the main CPU system.  
5. After entering the length for AQ data (the fourth data type), press F1 ( > ).  
If you changed any starting address or length entries, the HHM displays this screen:  
Map has changed  
Accept ?  
no yes  
6. To accept the changes and continue to the next menu, press F4 (yes).  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Add Modules and Assign References  
The steps for configuring an I/O module depend on whether or not the  
module is present at the time of configuration. “Intelligent” modules (see the  
list below) must be present to be configured, conventional I/O modules do  
not have to be present.  
8
7
BIU  
0
1
Slot Number refers to the location of the module in the station, relative to  
the Bus Interface Unit. See the illustration at left.  
6
5
4
3
2
2
3
4
If the slot has not already been configured, after configuring the I/O map, the  
HHM displays:  
S:1  
Empty  
5
6
< > tgl read  
1
0
7
8
If the slot has previously been configured, the HHM shows the existing  
configuration. For example:  
BIU  
S:1  
Q:16  
Q01785-Q01800  
< > del zoom  
See the instructions on the next two pages to configure the slot.  
Module Present, Read/Zoom to Module Present, Read/Enter to  
No Module Present,  
configure:  
configure, or  
Select Generic I/O to configure:  
No Module Present,  
Select Special I/O to configure:  
Analog 16-Point Grouped Input  
Module: IC670ALG240  
Analog 8 volt In  
Discrete Input 4/8  
Discrete Input 16  
Discrete Output 4/8  
Discrete Output 16  
Analog 8 cur In  
Analog 8-Point Voltage Input  
Module:IC670ALG281  
Analog 4 cur Out  
ESCP 8 Disc Out  
Combo Disc 10/06  
Analog 16-Point Voltage Input  
Module: IC670ALG282  
Analog Voltage Output Module:  
IC670ALG310  
Analog Current-source Output  
Module: IC670ALG330  
Analog RTD Input Module:  
IC670ALG620  
Analog Thermocouple Input Module:  
IC670ALG630  
Micro Field Processor: IC670MFP100  
5-20  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Configuration with No Module Present  
If the module is not present in the selected slot, press the F3 (tgl) key to specify a module type. The  
following screen will appear:  
S:1 I/O Type ?  
Special I/O  
S:1 I/O Type ?  
Generic I/O  
OR  
t g l e n t r  
t g l e n t r  
1. Press F3 (tgl) to select Generic I/O or Special I/O. Then press F4 (entr).  
2. Use the F3 (tgl) key again to go through the module names listed below. When the correct  
module name appears, press F4 (entr).  
3.  
Complete the module configuration as described in this chapter.  
Read a Module Identification with the Module Present  
If there is a module in the currently-selected slot, pressing F4 (read) from the "empty slot" screen  
brings up the module's identification screen.  
Example screen for a non-intelligent module (to accept the currently-displayed module type, press  
F4 (entr) then complete the module configuration as described in this chapter):  
R0:S1 Mod type?  
Discrete Out 16  
Module  
type  
tgl entr  
If you want to change the module type displayed press F3 (tgl) to see the other module types.  
,
Example screen for an intelligent module (press F4 (zoom) to configure the I/O references as  
described in this chapter). You cannot change the module type of an intelligent module.  
S:5 ALG630 1.0  
Module type  
and version  
< > tgl zoom  
Delete an Existing Module Configuration  
To delete the configuration of the module in the present slot, press F3 (delete) then F4 (enter). Note  
that this removes the entire module configuration.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Configure a Discrete Input Module  
After you "accept" the module into the slot, a screen like this appears:  
S1: Mod Type ?  
Discrete In 16  
F4  
Number of  
references for  
this module type  
S:1  
I
I:16  
S1:  
I
I:16  
I:16  
F4  
tgl entr  
S1  
I00001- I00016  
F4  
S1 Ref Address  
I00001  
Assign I/O References for the Module  
F1  
F2  
Specify the I/O references to be used by the module. For most applications, you can  
simply have the Bus Interface Unit assign the next available references in that  
memory type. Alternatively, you can enter specific references for the module.  
S1 Report Faults  
YES  
F1  
F2  
S1 Hld Lst State  
NO  
A. To assign the next available references, just press F4 (entr).  
B. If you want to change to another type of I/O table, press F3 (toggle).  
F2  
C. If you want to assign specific references, enter the starting address. Press F4  
(entr).  
For most applications, all module references should fall within the network map  
configured for the Bus Interface Unit. For local control, a module can be configured  
outside the BIU network map.  
In addition, each data type (I, Q, AI, AQ) has a total of 256 bytes allocated within the  
BIU. So for each data type, all references must be located within a 256-byte range.  
For example, if the starting address for input data configured for the Bus Interface  
Unit was I01024, all module inputs would need to be located between I01024 and  
I03072. (Discrete references are assigned on byte boundaries).  
Module references are automatically assigned by the Bus Interface Unit based on its configured  
data addresses and the number of points appropriate for the module type. For example:  
S:1  
I:16  
I00001- I00016  
< > del zoom  
In the example illustrated above, the Bus Interface Unit assigns 16 references beginning at I00001  
to a 16-point input module. In the same system, the next discrete input module in the station would  
automatically be assigned references beginning at I00017.  
To edit the module's configuration, press F4 (zoom).  
5-22  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Module Fault Reporting  
After zooming in from the reference address configuration screen, configure whether or not the Bus  
Interface Unit will report faults from the module to the network controller.  
S1 Report Faults  
YES  
prv > tgl entr  
Use the F1 (previous) key if you want to return to the previous screen.  
1. If you want to change the current selection, press F3 (tgl).  
2. Use the F4 (entr) key to save the selection.  
3. Press F2 to go to the next screen.  
Default Inputs or Hold Last State  
Next, configure what type of data the Bus Interface Unit should provide to the BIU internal table if  
it stops receiving actual input data from the module.  
S1 Hld Lst State  
NO  
< > tgl entr  
1. Select YES if the Bus Interface Unit should hold inputs in their last states and supply that data  
to the BIU internal table.  
Select NO if the Bus Interface Unit should default all the module's inputs to 0 and supply that  
data to the BIU internal table instead.  
2. Use the F4 (entr) key to save the selection.  
3. Press F2 ( > ) to return to the original slot configuration screen.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Configure a Discrete Output Module  
After you "accept" a module into the slot, a screen like this appears:  
S1: Mod Type ?  
Discrete Out 16  
F4  
Number of  
references for  
this module type  
S:1  
Q
Q:16  
S1:  
Q
Q:16  
F4  
tgl entr  
S1  
Q:16  
Q00001- Q00016  
F4  
Assign I/O References for the Module  
S1 Ref Address  
Q0001  
F1  
F2  
Specify the I/O references to be used by the module. For most applications, you can simply have  
the Bus Interface Unit assign the next available references in that memory type. Alternatively, you  
can enter specific references for the module.  
S1 Hld Lst State  
NO  
F1  
F2  
A. To assign the next available references, just press F4 (entr).  
S1 Out Def Pt 01  
B. If you want to change to another type of I/O table, press F3 (toggle).  
C. If you want to assign specific references, enter the starting address. Press F4 (entr).  
F1  
F2  
S1 Report Faults  
YES  
For most applications, all module references should fall within the network map  
configured for the Bus Interface Unit. For local control, a module can be  
configured outside the BIU network map.  
F2  
In addition, each data type (I, Q, AI, AQ) has a total of 256 bytes allocated  
within the BIU. So for each data type, all references must be located within a  
256-byte range. For example, if the starting address for output data configured  
for the Bus Interface Unit was Q01024, all module outputs would need to be  
located between Q01024 and Q03072. (Discrete references are assigned on byte  
boundaries).  
Module references are automatically assigned by the Bus Interface Unit based on its configured  
data addresses and the number of points appropriate for the module type.  
To edit the module's configuration, press F4 (zoom).  
5-24  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Default Outputs or Hold Last State  
After selecting the module's reference address, configure what type of data the Bus Interface Unit  
should provide to the module if it stops receiving outputs from the network.  
S1 Hld Lst State  
NO  
< > tgl entr  
1. Select YES if the Bus Interface Unit should hold outputs in their last states and supply that  
data to the module.  
Select NO if the Bus Interface Unit should default all the module's outputs and supply that data  
to the module instead. Note: This selection has no effect if the BIU itself fails.  
2. Use the F4 (entr) key to save the selection.  
If Hold Last State is set to NO, the following screen appears:  
Number of the point  
at the cursor location  
S1 Out Def Pt 01  
0010000010010101  
< > tgl entr  
3. On this screen, select a default state (1 or 0) for each output.  
4. Use the cursor keys to select outputs. Use the F3 (toggle) key to change the state of the output  
at the present cursor location.  
5. Use the F4 (entr) key to save the selections.  
Module Fault Reporting  
On the next screen, configure whether or not the Bus Interface Unit will report faults from this  
module to the network controller.  
S1 Report Faults  
YES  
< > tgl entr  
1. If you want to change the current selection, press F3 (tgl).  
2. Use the F4 (entr) key to save the entry. Press F2 ( > ) to return to the original slot configuration  
screen.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Configure a Discrete Input/Output Module  
After you "accept" a module into the slot, a screen like this appears:  
S1: Mod Type ?  
Combo Disc 10/06  
Number of  
references for  
this module  
S:1  
I
I:16  
F4  
S1:  
I
I:16  
I:08  
tgl entr  
F4  
S1:  
Q
Assign I/O References  
F4  
S1 I:10  
I00113- Q00033  
Q:06  
Specify the references to be used by the module. For most applications, you can simply have the  
Bus Interface Unit assign the next available references in that memory type. Alternatively, you can  
enter specific references for the module.  
F4  
S1 Ref Address  
I00113  
A. To assign the next available references, just press F4 (entr).  
F1  
B. If you want to change to another type of I/O table, press F3 (toggle).  
C. If you want to assign specific references, enter the starting address. Press F4 (entr).  
F2  
S1 Report Faults  
YES  
F1  
F2  
For most applications, all module references should fall within the network map  
configured for the Bus Interface Unit. For local control, a module can be  
configured outside the BIU network map.  
S1 Hld Lst State  
NO  
F1  
F2  
S1 Ref Address  
Q00033  
In addition, each data type (I, Q, AI, AQ) has a total of 256 bytes allocated  
within the BIU. So for each data type, all references must be located within a  
256-byte range. For example, if the starting address for output data configured  
for the Bus Interface Unit was Q01024, all module outputs would need to be  
located between Q01024 and Q03072. (Discrete references are assigned on byte  
boundaries).  
F1  
F2  
S1 Hld Lst State  
NO  
F1  
F2  
S1 Out Def Pt 01  
0 0 0 0 0 0 x x  
F1  
F2  
Module references are automatically assigned by the Bus Interface Unit based on its configured  
data addresses and the number of points appropriate for the module type.  
To edit the module's configuration, press F4 (zoom).  
5-26  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Module Fault Reporting  
On the next screen, configure whether or not the Bus Interface Unit will report faults from this  
module to the network controller.  
S1 Report Faults  
YES  
< > tgl entr  
1. If you want to change the current selection, press F3 (tgl).  
2. Use the F4 (entr) key to save the entry. Press F2 ( > ) to return to the original slot configuration  
screen.  
Default Inputs or Hold Last State  
Next, configure what type of data the Bus Interface Unit should provide to the network if it stops  
receiving inputs from the module.  
S1 Hld Lst State  
NO  
< > tgl entr  
1. Select YES if the Bus Interface Unit should hold inputs in their last states and supply that data  
to the network.  
Select NO if the Bus Interface Unit should default all the module's inputs and supply that data  
to the network instead. Note: This selection has no effect if the BIU itself fails.  
2. Use the F4 (entr) key to save the selection.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Default Outputs or Hold Last State  
You should also configure what type of data the Bus Interface Unit should provide to the module if  
it stops receiving outputs from the network.  
S1 Hld Lst State  
NO  
< > tgl entr  
1. Select YES if the Bus Interface Unit should hold outputs in their last states and supply that  
data to the module.  
Select NO if the Bus Interface Unit should default all the module's outputs and supply that data  
to the module instead. Note: This selection has no effect if the BIU itself fails.  
2. Use the F4 (entr) key to save the selection.  
If Hold Last State is set to NO, the following screen appears:  
Number of the point  
at the cursor location  
S1 Out Def Pt 01  
0 0 0 0 0 0 x x  
< > tgl entr  
3. On this screen, select a default state (1 or 0) for each output.  
4. Use the cursor keys to select outputs. Use the F3 (toggle) key to change the state of the output  
at the present cursor location.  
5. Use the F4 (entr) key to save the selections.  
5-28  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Configure a Conventional Analog Input Module  
After you "accept" a module into the slot, a screen like this appears:  
S1: Mod Type ?  
Analog 8 cur In  
F4  
Number of  
S:1  
AI  
AI:08  
references for  
S1:  
AI  
AI:08  
this module type  
F4  
tgl entr  
S1  
AI:08  
AI001- AI008  
F4  
S1 Ref Address  
AI00001  
Assign I/O References for the Module  
F1  
F2  
Specify the I/O references to be used by the module. For most applications, you can  
simply have the Bus Interface Unit assign the next available references in that  
memory type. Alternately, you can enter specific references for the module.  
S1 Faults Ch 01  
YYYYYYYY  
F1  
F2  
S1 Active Ch 01  
YYYYYYYY  
A. To assign the next available references, press F4 (entr).  
B. If you want to change to another type of I/O table, press F3 (toggle).  
F1  
F2  
S1 Range Ch 01  
0mA - 20mA  
C. If you want to assign specific references, enter the starting address. Press F4  
(entr).  
F1  
F2  
Range for  
other channels  
For most applications, all module references should fall within the  
network map configured for the Bus Interface Unit. For local control, a  
module can be configured outside the BIU network map.  
F1  
F2  
S1 Scale 1 Ch 01  
00000 Eng lo  
In addition, each data type (I, Q, AI, AQ) has a total of 256 bytes  
allocated within the BIU. So for each data type, all references must be  
located within a 256-byte range. For example, if the starting address for  
analog input data configured for the Bus Interface Unit was AI0101, all  
analog inputs would need to be located between AI0101 and AI0228.  
F1  
F2  
S1 Scale 1 Ch 01  
20000 Eng hi  
F1  
F2  
S1 Scale 4 Ch 01  
00000 Int lo  
F1  
F2  
Module references are automatically assigned by the Bus Interface Unit based on its  
configured data addresses, and the number of points appropriate for the module type.  
S1 Scale 4 Ch 01  
20000 Int hi  
F1  
F2  
To edit the module's configuration, press F4 (zoom).  
Scaling Units for  
other channels  
F1  
F2  
S1 Alarm Ch 01  
00000  
low  
F1  
F2  
S1 Alarm Ch 01  
00000  
high  
F1  
F2  
Alarm Limits for  
other channels  
F1  
F2  
S1 Hld Lst State  
NO  
F2  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Channel Fault Reporting  
The Bus Interface Unit can report faults for each channel to the network controller. If fault  
reporting is enabled for a channel, the Bus Interface Unit sends a message to the network controller  
(such as a Series 90 PLC Bus Controller) if any fault occurs on that channel. If fault reporting is  
disabled, the Bus Interface Unit does not send fault reports for the channel to the network  
controller.  
Regardless of whether fault  
is enabled, the Bus Interface Unit detects faults on the circuit,  
reporting  
and takes appropriate action. If a fault occurs, the fault condition must be corrected for proper  
operation of the I/O module.  
Number of the channel  
at the cursor location  
S1 Faults Ch 01  
YYYYYYYY  
< > tgl entr  
1. For each channel, select Y if the Bus Interface Unit should report module faults to the network  
controller for that channel. Select N if it should not.  
2. Use the F1 ( < ) and F2 ( > ) keys to select channels.  
3. Use the F3 (toggle) to change the selection at the present cursor location.  
4. Use the F4 (entr) key to save the selections on this screen.  
5. Press F2 to go to the next screen.  
Channel Active  
When a channel is configured as Active, it is scanned for data and checked for errors. If a channel  
should not be scanned, that channel can be configured as inactive. An inactive input channel returns  
no faults and no data.  
Number of the channel  
at the cursor location  
S1 Active Ch 01  
YYYYYYYY  
< > tgl entr  
1. For each channel, select Y if the channel should be active. Select N if it should not.  
2. Use the F1 ( < ) and F2 ( > ) keys to select channels.  
3. Use the F4 (entr) key to save the selections on this screen.  
4. Press F2 to go to the next screen.  
5-30  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Input Current Ranges  
Select a current range for each channel, to correspond to the signal level of the input device. Note  
that Current Source Analog Input Module (IC670ALG230) and Current Source Analog Output  
Module (IC670ALG320) cannot be used with negative voltages.  
0 to 20mA  
4 to 20 mA  
for current modules  
"
Number of the  
channel you are  
now configuring  
S1 Range Ch 01  
0ma - 20mA  
< > tgl entr  
1. For each channel, use the F3 (tgl) key to select a range.  
2. Use the F1 ( < ) and F2 ( > ) keys to select channels.  
3. Use the F4 (entr) key to save the selections on this screen.  
4. Press F2 to go to the next screen.  
Note  
Range Selection is a setup parameter; it is not ordinarily changed while the  
module is operating.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Input Scaling  
Based on the actual analog input signal level for a channel, the analog input module reports a value  
from decimal 0 to 4095 to the Bus Interface Unit. The Bus Interface Unit can convert this digital  
input to a value that is more meaningful to the application by using the "scaling values" configured  
on this screen.  
For each channel, two sets of values are configured: high and low "scaled" values and the actual  
high and low digital values they represent. Based on these two pairs of values, the Bus Interface  
Unit will be able to scale values for all other input levels.  
See Appendix A for information on finding appropriate scaling values for your application. If you  
don't have scaling values ready, you can continue to the next screen now, and configure scaling at  
another time. The Bus Interface Unit will use default scaling values of 1:1 if no scaling values are  
entered.  
Indicates which of  
the 4 scaling values  
S1 Scale 1 Ch 01  
you are currently  
Scaling or digital value  
configuring  
00000 Eng lo  
< > entr  
Number of the  
channel you are  
now configuring  
1. For EACH channel in turn, enter scaling values in this order:  
Low scaling value ("eng lo")  
High scaling value ("eng hi")  
Low digital value ("int lo")  
High digital value ("int hi")  
2. If you press F2 ( > ), the display goes from value to value in sequence. If you press F1 ( < ),  
the display goes to the first value for the previous channel  
3. Use the HHM keypad to enter values. To enter a negative value, first enter the numbers, then  
press the - key.  
4. Use the F4 (entr) key to save the selections on this screen.  
5. Press F2 to go to the next screen.  
5-32  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Alarm Limits  
Each input channel can have two alarm thresholds, one for a low engineering units (scaled) value  
and one for a high value.  
Maximum values are +/-32,767. The high threshold should be greater than the low threshold.  
Threshold limits are based on circuit scaling. If scaling is changed, review and readjust the Alarm  
Thresholds if necessary.  
Alarm Thresholds can be set anywhere over the dynamic range of the signal. Typically, they are  
set at levels beyond which the input should not operate or levels beyond which alternate processing  
is required. They can also be set beyond the dynamic range of the signal, ensuring that they will  
never be activated. See the examples below.  
1. For EACH channel in turn, first, enter a low alarm value:  
Number of the  
S1 Alarm Ch 01  
channel you are  
00000  
low  
now configuring  
< >  
entr  
2. Press F4 (entr) key.  
3. Then enter a high alarm value:  
S1 Alarm Ch 01  
00000  
high  
< >  
entr  
4. Use the F1 ( < ) and F2 ( > ) keys to select channels.  
5. Press F4 (entr) key to save the selection.  
6. Press F2 ( > ) to go to the next screen.  
A circuit is expected to report engineering unit values of -20 ft/sec (-6 m/sec) to +180 ft/sec  
(+50 m/sec). The high alarm is set at 150 ft/sec (+40 m/sec) and the low alarm at -25 ft/sec (-  
7.5m/sec).  
Example 1:  
Example 2:  
If an input reached its high alarm, a new threshold could be set. This could generate a high-  
high alarm or an alarm-cleared threshold.  
An Alarm Threshold is set at 150 ft/sec. Upon receiving an alarm message, the CPU changes  
the Alarm Threshold to 165 ft/sec by using a Write Configuration command and sends the  
appropriate Clear Circuit Fault command. No alarm message is sent upon changing the  
threshold unless the speed is greater than 165 ft/sec. If the speed is only 157 ft/sec but  
increasing, a second message would be sent at 165 ft/sec. Since these two diagnostic messages  
are the same, it would be necessary for the program to keep track of the level of the Alarm  
Thresholds and recognize this as a higher alarm than that received initially. At the same time,  
it could move the low alarm to 140 ft/sec and use this level to detect the end of the high alarm  
conditions.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Default Inputs or Hold Last Values  
Next, configure what type of data the Bus Interface Unit should provide to the network controller if  
it stops receiving actual input data from the module.  
S1 Hld Lst State  
NO  
< > tgl entr  
1. Select YES if the Bus Interface Unit should hold inputs in their last states and supply that data  
to the network controller.  
Select NO if the Bus Interface Unit should default all the module's inputs to 0 and supply that  
data to the network controller instead.  
2. Use the F4 (entr) key to save the entry.  
3. Press F2 ( > ) to return to the original slot configuration screen.  
5-34  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Configure a Conventional Analog Output Module  
After you “accept” a module into the slot, a screen like this appears:  
S1: Mod Type ?  
Analog 4 cur Out  
F4  
S1:  
AQ  
Number of  
references for  
this module type  
S:1  
AQ_  
AQ:04  
AQ:04  
F4  
S1  
AQ:04  
tgl entr  
AQ00001-  
F4  
S1 Ref Address  
AQ00001  
Assign I/O References for the Module  
F1  
F2  
S1 Hld Lst State  
NO  
Specify the I/O references to be used by the module. For most applications, you can simply have  
the Bus Interface Unit assign the next available references in that memory type. Alternately, you  
can enter specific references for the module.  
F1  
F2  
S1 Out Def Ch 01  
00000  
A. To assign the next available references, just press F4 (entr).  
F1  
Ou
t
put
D
e
faults  
F2  
B. If you want to change to another type of I/O table, press F3 (toggle).  
C. If you want to assign specific references, enter the starting address. Press F4 (entr).  
for other channels  
F1  
F2  
S1 Faults Ch 01  
NNYY  
For most applications, all module references should fall within the network map  
configured for the Bus Interface Unit. For local control, a module can be  
configured outside the BIU network map.  
F1  
F2  
S1 Active CH 01  
NYYN  
In addition, each data type (I, Q, AI, AQ) has a total of 256 bytes allocated within  
the BIU. So for each data type, all references must be located within a 256-byte  
range. For example, if the starting address for analog output data configured for the  
Bus Interface Unit was AQ0101, all analog outputs would need to be located  
between AQ0101 and AQ0357.  
F1  
F2  
S1 Range Ch 01  
0mA - 20mA  
F1  
F2  
Range for  
other channels  
F1  
Module references are automatically assigned by the Bus Interface Unit based on its configured  
data addresses and the number of points appropriate for the module type.  
F2  
S1 Scale 1 Ch 01  
00000 Eng lo  
To edit the module's configuration, press F4 (zoom).  
F1  
F2  
S1 Scale 1 Ch 01  
00000 Eng hi  
F1  
F2  
S1 Scale 4 Ch 01  
00000 Int lo  
F1  
F2  
S1 Scale 4 Ch 01  
00000 Int hi  
F1  
F2  
Scaling Units for  
other channels  
F2  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Default Outputs or Hold Last Values  
After zooming in from the reference address screen, configure what type of data the Bus Interface  
Unit should provide to the module if it stops receiving actual output data from the network  
controller.  
S1 Hld Lst State  
NO  
< > tgl entr  
1. Select YES if the Bus Interface Unit should hold outputs in their last states and supply that  
data to the module.  
Select NO if the Bus Interface Unit should default all the module's outputs and supply that data  
to the module instead. Note: This selection has no effect if the BIU itself fails.  
2. Press F4 to save the selection.  
3. Press F2 ( > ) to go to the next screen.  
Output Default Values  
If Hold Last State is set to NO, the following screen appears:  
S1 Out Def Ch 01  
00000  
< >  
entr  
1. Enter output default values from the HHM keypad. To enter a negative value, press the minus  
key after entering the value.  
2. Use the F1 ( < ) and F2 ( > ) keys to select channels.  
3. Press F4 (entr) key to save the selection.  
4. Press F2 ( > ) to go to the next screen.  
5-36  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Channel Fault Reporting  
The Bus Interface Unit can report faults for each channel to the network controller. If fault  
reporting is enabled for a channel, the Bus Interface Unit sends a message to the network controller  
if any fault occurs on that channel. If fault reporting is disabled, the Bus Interface Unit does not  
send fault reports for the channel to the network controller.  
Regardless of whether fault  
is enabled, the Bus Interface Unit detects faults on the circuit,  
reporting  
and takes appropriate action. If a fault occurs, the fault condition must be corrected for proper  
operation of the I/O module.  
Number of the channel  
at the cursor location  
S1 Faults Ch 01  
NNYY  
Selections for all 4  
channels  
< > tgl entr  
1. Use the F3 (tgl) key to select Y or N for each channel. Select Y if the Bus Interface Unit  
should report module faults to the network controller for that channel. Select N if it should not.  
2. Use the F1 ( < ) and F2 ( > ) keys to select move the cursor (selects channels).  
3. Use the F4 (entr) key to save the selections on this screen.  
4. Press F2 ( > ) to go to the next screen.  
Channel Active  
When a channel is configured as Active, it is scanned for data and checked for errors. If a channel  
should not be scanned, that channel can be configured as inactive. An inactive input channel  
provides no faults and uses no data.  
Number of the channel  
at the cursor location  
S1 Active Ch 01  
NYYN  
< > tgl entr  
1. For each channel, select Y if the channel should be active. Select N if it should not.  
2. Use the F1 ( < ) and F2 ( > ) keys to select channels.  
3. Use the F4 (entr) key to save the selections on this screen.  
4. Press F2 ( > ) to go to the next screen.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Output Current Ranges  
Select the current range for each channel, to correspond to the signal level of the output device:  
0 to 20mA  
4 to 20 mA  
for current modules  
"
Number of the  
channel you are  
now configuring  
S1 Range Ch 01  
0ma - 20mA  
< > tgl entr  
1. Use the F3 (tgl) key to select a current/voltage range.  
2. Use the F1 ( < ) and F2 ( > ) keys to select channels.  
3. Use the F4 (entr) key to save the selections on this screen.  
4. Press F2 ( > ) to go to the next screen.  
Note  
Range Selection is a setup parameter; it is not ordinarily changed while the  
module is operating.  
5-38  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Output Scaling  
While the actual values received from the application program may represent various types of  
engineering units, the Bus Interface Unit reports values from decimal 0 to 4095 to an analog output  
module. The BIU converts the application data using “scaling values” configured for each output  
channel.  
For each channel, two sets of values are configured: high and low “scaled” values and the actual  
high and low digital values they represent. Based on these two pairs of values, the Bus Interface  
Unit will be able to scale values for all other output levels.  
See Appendix A for information on finding appropriate scaling values for your application. If you  
don't have scaling values ready, you can continue to the next screen now and configure scaling at  
another time. The Bus Interface Unit will use default scaling values of 1:1 if no scaling values are  
entered.  
Indicates which of  
the 4 scaling values  
S1 Scale 1 Ch 01  
you are currently  
Scaling or digital value  
configuring  
00000  
< >  
Number of the  
channel you are  
now configuring  
entr  
1. For EACH channel in turn, enter scaling values in this order:  
Low scaling value (“eng lo”)  
High scaling value (“eng hi”)  
Low digital value (“int lo”)  
High digital value (“int hi”)  
2. If you press F2 ( > ), the display goes from value to value in sequence. If you press F1 ( < ),  
the display goes to the first value for the previous channel  
3. Use the HHM keypad to enter values. To enter a negative value, first enter the numbers, then  
press the - key.  
4. Use the F4 (entr) key to save the selections on this screen. Press F2 ( > ) to return to the  
original slot configuration screen.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Configure a 16-Point Grouped Analog Input Module  
When you select “Read” from the empty slot HHM screen, this module screen appears:  
S1: ALG240: 1.1  
S:4 ALG240 1.0  
< > del zoom  
F4  
S1: AI *AI016  
AI00001-00016  
F4, F2  
S1: I  
I00001-00088  
* I:088  
F4, F2  
S1: Q  
*Q016  
Q00001-00016  
F4, F2  
Assign I/O References for the Module  
S1 Module-> %I  
DEFAULT ZERO  
When you "zoom" into the module's slot, a screen like this appears:  
F2  
F1  
S1 Module-> %AI  
DEFAULT ZERO  
S:4 AI *AI:016  
Default data length  
Next available reference  
F1  
F2  
AI01307-01322  
S1 Network->%Q  
DEFAULT ZERO  
Default BIU data type  
F1  
S1 FILTERING  
F2  
< > chg entr  
20MS  
F2  
F1  
S1 LINE FREQ  
60 HZ  
This screen shows the default table and length, and the next available reference address in  
that table for that reference parameter. The length is displayed in units that are  
appropriate for that data type (AI and AQ are in words, Q and I are in bits). The asterisk  
indicates that this reference has not yet been defined.  
F2  
F1  
S1 LINE FREQ  
60 HZ  
F2  
F1  
S1 CH 1  
CONFIG  
If the present selection is acceptable, press F4 (enter) to accept it. The asterisk will  
disappear. If you prefer to change the BIU table mapping, length, or reference value, press  
F3 (change).  
F1, F2 select  
channels  
F4 ZOOM  
S1 CH 1  
ACTIVE  
S:4 AI AI  
Select table  
F1  
F2  
S1 CH1 DEF RNG  
1
F2  
F1  
tgl entr  
S1 CH1 ENG L  
04000  
F1  
S1 CH1 ENG H  
F2  
From this screen, you can display the other BIU data types by pressing F3 (toggle). Press  
F4 (enter) when the desired data type is displayed.  
20000  
F2  
F1  
S1 CH1 SPAN L  
04000  
S:4 AI AI:016  
Select length  
F2  
F1  
S1 CH1 SPAN H  
20000  
F2  
F1  
clr entr  
S1 CH1 AL L  
04000  
F2  
F1  
S1 CH1 AL H  
20000  
If you want to enter a different length for the displayed data type, press F3 (clear) to clear  
the length field. Enter the new length from the keypad. If you enter an invalid length, the  
F1  
F2  
Repeat for other  
channels  
HHM prompts BAD LENGTH ERR  
:
F2  
5-40  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
After “entering”the correct length, the offset (starting reference) screen appears. The BIU  
automatically supplies the next available address in the selected table. You can press F4 (enter) to  
accept this value, or F3 (clear) then enter a new value from the keypad. Press the F4 (enter) key  
after entering a new offset.  
S:4 AI AI:016  
Ref Addr 01896  
< > clr entr  
The 16-Point Grouped Analog Input Module is an intelligent module, which uses more than one  
type of data. Use the F2 ( > ) key to display the screen for the module's discrete input diagnostic  
data.  
S:4 I * I:088  
I01817-01904  
< > chg entr  
You can edit this screen or accept it using the F4 (enter) key. The asterisk beside the data type  
disappears, to show that the current values have been saved.  
S:4 I  
I:088  
I01817-01904  
< > chg entr  
Next, go to the screen that shows the module's discrete output references, which are used for fault  
clearing.  
S:4 Q * Q:016  
Q01817-01832  
< > chg entr  
You can also edit this screen. Use the F4 (enter key) to save the selections and continue to the next  
item. Note that all required references for the module must be entered. You can give a reference  
parameter a length of zero if you do not want to map the data to the BIU. If you attempt to back out  
before the references are all configured, the HHM displays the following screen:  
Cfg Incomplete  
Clear Slot?  
yes no  
If you exit, the references you have configured are not saved  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Configure Data Defaults  
For data types AI and I, you can determine what the BIU should do with the module's data if the  
BIU loses communications with the module. Data can either be held at its present values or  
defaulted to zero.  
You can accept DEFAULT: ZERO with the F4 (enter) key, or press F3 (toggle) then F4 (enter) to  
change to DEFAULT: HOLD and save it.  
S:4 Module-> %I  
DEFAULT:ZERO  
< > tgl entr  
S:4 Module-> %I  
DEFAULT:HOLD  
< > tgl entr  
S:4 Module-> %AI  
DEFAULT:ZERO  
< > tgl entr  
For data going to the module (type Q) which is included within the BIU's I/O map, you can  
determine what data the BIU will send to the module if the BIU loses communications with the  
network.  
S:4 Network-> %Q  
DEFAULT:ZERO  
< > tgl entr  
5-42  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Configure Filtering  
Next, select the filtering delay to eliminate noise due to the AC power lines. Filtering increases the  
response time to changes in a channel.  
The choices for filtering are:  
A. 10 ms: The module averages the most recent 8 samples of the input.  
B. 20 ms: The module averages the most recent 16 samples of the input.  
The module will perform filtering on all inputs on the module that are configured as “active”  
S:4 FILTERING  
20MS  
< > tgl entr  
1. If you want to change the displayed selection, press F3 (Tgl).  
2. Use the F4 (entr) key to save the selection.  
3. Press F2 ( > ) to go to the next screen.  
Configure the Line Frequency  
Next, set the line frequency for the module. Select 50 or 60 Hz.  
Disturbances due to AC noise cause variations around the desired DC level. The amplitude of  
these variations can be reduced by configuring the rate at which the module scans inputs for the  
operating frequency. If the line frequency is configured at 60 Hz, the module scans each input  
channel every 1.04 milliseconds. If the line frequency is configured at 50 Hz, the module scans  
each input channel every 1.25 mS.  
S:4 LINE FREQ  
60 HZ  
< > tgl entr  
1. If you want to change the displayed selection, press F3 (Tgl).  
2. Use the F4 (entr) key to save the selection.  
3. Press F2 ( > ) to go to the next screen.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Circuit Configuration  
The sequence in which circuit configuration screens appear depends on the revision level of the  
module, the Hand-held Monitor and the BIU.  
Channel Header  
For module IC670ALG240, version 1.3 or later, if the BIU and Hand-held Monitor support display  
of channel headers, a header screen appears for each channel as shown below.  
S:1 CH 1 CONFIG  
< >  
zoom  
A. Press F2 (>) from this screen to go to the header screen for the next channel. Pressing F2 (>)  
from channel 8 displays the module's first reference parameter screen.  
B. Press F1 (<) from this screen to go to the header screen for the previous channel. Pressing F1  
(<) from channel 1 displays the module's last reference parameter screen.  
C. Press F4 (zoom) to go to the first configuration screen for the channel.  
D. When in a channel-specific configuration screen, press the up arrow/MENU key to go to that  
channel's header screen.  
If the BIU and Hand-held Monitor do not support display of channel headers, the header screens do  
not appear and keys F1 (<) and F2 (>) are used to scroll through channel-specific configuration  
screens.  
The following features are configured for each channel.  
5-44  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Channel Active  
When a channel is configured as Active, it is scanned for data and checked for errors. If a channel  
should not be scanned, that channel can be configured as inactive. An inactive input channel returns  
the value 0.  
S:4 CH 1  
ACTIVE  
< > tgl entr  
1. If you want to change the displayed selection, press F3 (Tgl).  
2. Use the F4 (entr) key to save the selection.  
3. Press F2 ( > ) to go to the next screen.  
Input Range  
On this screen, specify the range for the input. There are four predetermined range and data scaling  
combinations (selections 1, 2, 3, and 4), plus custom scaling.  
S:4 CH1 DEF RNG  
1
< > tgl entr  
The default is 1. Selections 1 or 2 will convert the full input current span down to 0 milliamps and  
produce negative values below 4 mA. Selection 1 produces engineering unit data in microAmps.  
These also enable an "Open Wire" diagnostic bit which is true whenever the input falls below the  
normal range.  
Input current (µA) = Data range  
4000 to 20000 = 4000 to 20000  
4000 to 20000 = 0 to 32000  
0 to 20000 = 0 to 32000  
Selection  
1
2
3
4
0 to 24000 = 0 to 32000  
(none)  
Configurable scaling (see below)  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Input Scaling  
The following screens can be used to set up custom scaling values. The 16-Point Grouped Analog  
Input Module performs its own scaling (unlike conventional Field Control analog modules, whose  
scaling is performed by the BIU).  
Scaling can be used to define a linear relationship between a channel's input current in microAmps  
(µA) and the value in engineering units returned to the BIU. The default scaling configuration  
provides values from 4,000 to 20,000 for an input current range of 4mA (low span value) to 20mA  
(high span value).  
To scale a channel, choose a high and low point and enter the actual input value (span) and a  
corresponding engineering units value for each. During operation, the module will use these values  
to convert input currents into digital values that represent engineering units. Scaling does not  
increase the resolution of the data, but it does transform the values returned to the BIU into more  
convenient units. The “Open Wire” diagnostic bit is enabled if actual input current value used for  
the “Low Point” is greater than 2 milliamps.  
If the scaled data falls below the minimum for engineering units, the module returns the minimum  
engineering units value (-32768). If the scaled data rises above the maximum for engineering units,  
the module returns the maximum engineering units value (32767).  
The illustration below shows the module's default scaling.  
Engineering Units  
25000  
24000  
High Point  
20000  
16000  
Overrange  
12000  
8000  
4000  
Low Point  
0
4000  
20000 24000  
25000  
Input Current in MicroAmps (Span)  
The first scaling screen shows the engineering units value that is considered equivalent to the low  
span (actual) value. Engineering units may be from -32768 to 32767.  
S:4 CH1 EU L  
00000  
< > chg entr  
5-46  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Enter the high span value for the channel. This is the actual current in microAmps to be scaled to  
the high engineering units value.  
S:4 CH1 EU H  
32000  
< > chg entr  
Next, enter the actual current in microAmps to be scaled to the low engineering units value.  
S:4 CH1 SPAN L  
04000  
< > chg entr  
Span values are 16 unsigned integers ranging from 0 to 25,000. After entering the low span value  
for the input, press the F4 (enter) key. Enter a high span value for the same input.  
S:4 CH1 SPAN H  
20000  
< > chg entr  
Alarm Limits  
The next screen is used to set the low alarm limit for the channel in engineering units.  
S:4 CH1 AL L  
00000  
< > chg entr  
Each input channel can have a low alarm limit and a high alarm limit. Alarm limits can be set  
anywhere over the dynamic range of the signal. The range for each is -32,768 to +32,767. The high  
alarm limit must be greater than the low alarm limit. If alarm reporting is not wanted, alarm limits  
can be set beyond the dynamic range of the signal so they will never be activated.  
After entering the Low Alarm Limit, press the F4 (enter) key. Then enter the High Alarm Limit for  
the channel.  
S:4 CH1 AL H  
32000  
< > chg entr  
That completes the configuration steps for one input channel on the 16-Point Grouped Analog  
Input module. Continue as described above to configure the rest of the inputs.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Configure an 8-Point Grouped Analog Voltage Input Module  
When you select “Read” from the empty slot HHM screen, this module screen appears:  
S1: ALG281: 1.0  
F4  
S1: AI *AI008  
AI00001-00008  
S : 2  
<
AL G2 8 1 1 . 0  
d e l z o o m  
F4, F2  
S1: I  
* I:040  
I00001-00040  
>
S1: Q  
*Q008  
Q00001-00008  
S1 Module-> %I  
DEFAULT ZERO  
Assign I/O References for the Module  
F4, F2  
S1 Module-> %AI  
DEFAULT ZERO  
When you “zoom" into the module's slot, a screen like this appears:  
F4, F2  
S1 Network->%Q  
DEFAULT ZERO  
S : 2 AI  
AI 0 1 9 7 0 - 0 1 9 7 7  
* AI : 0 0 8  
Default data length  
F1  
F2  
S1 FILTERING  
20MS  
Next available reference  
Default BIU data type  
<
>
c h g e n t r  
F1  
F2  
S1 LINE FREQ  
60 HZ  
F1  
F2  
This screen shows the default table and length, and the next available reference address  
in that table for that reference parameter. The length is displayed in units that are  
appropriate for that data type (AI and AQ are in words, Q and I are in bits). The asterisk  
indicates that this reference has not yet been defined.  
S1 CH 1 CONFIG  
F1, F2, select  
channel  
F4  
If the present selection is acceptable, press F4 (enter) to accept it. The asterisk will  
disappear.  
S1 CH 1  
ACTIVE  
F1  
F2  
S1 CH1 RANGE  
-10V to +10V  
If you prefer to change the BIU table mapping, length, or reference value, press F3  
(change).  
F1  
F2  
S1 CH1 ENG LO  
-10000  
S : 2 AI  
S e l e c t t a b l e  
AI  
F1  
F2  
S1 CH1 ENG HI  
10000  
F2  
F1  
t g l e n t r  
S1 CH1 SPAN LO  
-10000  
F1  
F2  
From this screen, you can display the other BIU data types by pressing F3 (toggle).  
Press F4 (enter) when the desired data type is displayed.  
S1 CH1 SPAN HI  
10000  
F1  
F2  
S1 CH1 ALRM LO  
-10000  
S : 2 AI  
S e l e c t l e n g t h  
AI : 0 0 8  
F1  
F2  
S1 CH1 AL HI  
10000  
F1  
F2  
c l r e n t r  
Repeat for other  
channels  
If you want to enter a different length for the displayed data type, press F3 (clear) to  
clear the length field. Enter the new length from the keypad. If you enter an invalid  
F2  
BAD LENGTH ERR  
length, the HHM prompts:  
5-48  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
After entering the correct length, the offset (starting reference) screen appears. The BIU  
automatically supplies the next available address in the selected table. You can press F4 (enter) to  
accept this value, or F3 (clear) then enter a new value from the keypad. Press the F4 (enter) key  
after entering a new offset.  
S:2 AI  
AI:008  
Ref Addr 00114  
< >  
clr entr  
The 8-Point Grouped Analog Voltage Input Module is an intelligent module, which uses more than  
one type of data. Use the F2 ( > ) key to display the screen for the module's discrete input  
diagnostic data.  
S:2 I * I:040  
I01152-01191  
< > chg entr  
You can edit this screen or accept it using the F4 (enter) key. The asterisk beside the data type  
disappears, to show that the current values have been saved.  
S:2 I  
I:040  
I01152-01191  
< > chg entr  
Next, go to the screen that shows the module's discrete output references, which are used for fault  
clearing.  
S:2 Q * Q:008  
Q00916-00923  
< > chg entr  
You can also edit this screen. Use the F4 (enter key) to save the selections and continue to the next  
item. Note that all required references for the module must be entered. You can give a reference  
parameter a length of zero if you do not want to map the data to the BIU. If you attempt to back out  
before the references are all configured, the HHM displays the following screen:  
Cfg Incomplete  
Clear Slot?  
yes no  
If you exit, the references you have configured are not saved.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Configure Data Defaults  
For data types AI and I, you can determine what the BIU should do with the module's data if the  
BIU loses communications with the module. Data can either be held at its present values or  
defaulted to zero.  
You can accept DEFAULT: ZERO with the F4 (enter) key, or press F3 (toggle) then F4 (enter) to  
change to DEFAULT: HOLD and save it.  
S:2 Module-> %I  
DEFAULT:ZERO  
< > tgl entr  
S:2 Module-> %I  
DEFAULT:HOLD  
< > tgl entr  
S:2 Module-> %AI  
DEFAULT:ZERO  
< > tgl entr  
For data going to the module (type Q) which is included within the BIU's I/O map, you can  
determine what data the BIU will send to the module if the BIU loses communications with the  
network.  
S:2 Network-> %Q  
DEFAULT:ZERO  
< > tgl entr  
5-50  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Configure Filtering  
Next, select the filtering delay to eliminate noise due to the AC power lines. Filtering increases the  
response time to changes in a channel.  
The choices for filtering are:  
A. None : The module returns the most recent sample of the input.  
B. 10 ms: The module averages the most recent 8 samples of the input.  
B. 20 ms: The module averages the most recent 16 samples of the input.  
The module will perform filtering on all inputs on the module that are configured as "active".  
S:2 FILTERING  
20MS  
< > tgl entr  
1. If you want to change the displayed selection, press F3 (tgl).  
2. Use the F4 (entr) key to save the selection.  
3. Press F2 ( > ) to go to the next screen.  
Configure the Line Frequency  
Next, set the line frequency for the module. Select 50 or 60 Hz.  
Disturbances due to AC noise cause variations around the desired DC level. The amplitude of  
these variations can be reduced by configuring the rate at which the module scans inputs for the  
operating frequency. If the line frequency is configured at 60 Hz, the module scans each input  
channel every 1.04 milliseconds. If the line frequency is configured at 50 Hz, the module scans  
each input channel every 1.25 mS.  
S:2 LINE FREQ  
60 HZ  
< > tgl entr  
1. If you want to change the displayed selection, press F3 (tgl).  
2. Use the F4 (entr) key to save the selection.  
3. Press F2 ( > ) to go to the first circuit configuration screen.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Circuit Configuration  
The sequence in which circuit configuration screens appear depends on the revision level of the  
Hand-held Monitor and the BIU.  
Channel Header  
If the BIU and Hand-held Monitor support display of channel headers, a header screen appears for  
each channel as shown below.  
S:1 CH 1 CONFIG  
< >  
zoom  
A. Press F2 (>) from this screen to go to the header screen for the next channel. Pressing F2 (>)  
from channel 8 displays the module's first reference parameter screen.  
B. Press F1 (<) from this screen to go to the header screen for the previous channel. Pressing F1  
(<) from channel 1 displays the module's last reference parameter screen.  
C. Press F4 (zoom) to go to the first configuration screen for the channel.  
D. When in a channel-specific configuration screen, press the up arrow/MENU key to go to that  
channel's header screen.  
If the BIU and Hand-held Monitor do not support display of channel headers, the header screens do  
not appear and keys F1 (<) and F2 (>) are used to scroll through channel-specific configuration  
screens.  
The following features are configured for each channel.  
5-52  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Channel Active  
When a channel is configured as Active, it is scanned for data and checked for errors. If a channel  
should not be scanned, that channel can be configured as inactive. An inactive input channel returns  
the value 0.  
S : 2 CH 1  
ACT I VE  
<
>
t g l e n t r  
1. If you want to change the displayed selection, press F3 (tgl).  
2. Use the F4 (entr) key to save the selection.  
3. Press F2 ( > ) to go to the next screen.  
Input Range  
On this screen, specify the range for the input. There are two predetermined range and data scaling  
combinations.  
S : 2 CH1 RANGE  
- 1 0 V t o + 1 0 V  
<
>
t g l e n t r  
The default is -10V to +10V.  
Selection  
Input voltage (mV) = Data range  
-10000 to 10000 = -10000 to 10000  
0 to 10000 = 0 to 10000  
1
2
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Input Scaling  
The 8-Point Grouped Analog Voltage Input Module performs its own scaling (unlike conventional  
Field Control analog modules, whose scaling is performed by the BIU).  
Scaling can be used to define a linear relationship between a channel's input voltage in millivolts  
(mV) and the value in engineering units returned to the BIU. The default scaling configuration  
provides values from -10,000 to 10,000 for an input voltage range of -10V (low span value) to 10V  
(high span value).  
To scale a channel, choose a high and low point and enter the actual input value (span) and a  
corresponding engineering units value for each. During operation, the module will use these values  
to convert input voltages into digital values that represent engineering units. Scaling does not  
increase the resolution of the data, but it does transform the values returned to the BIU into more  
convenient units.  
If the scaled data falls below the minimum for engineering units, the module returns the minimum  
engineering units value (-32767). If the scaled data rises above the maximum for engineering units,  
the module returns the maximum engineering units value (32767).  
The illustration below shows the module's default scaling.  
15000  
High Point  
10000  
5000  
0
-15000  
-10000  
-10250  
-5000  
0
5000  
10000  
10250  
15000  
-5000  
-10000  
-15000  
Low Point  
Input Voltage in millivolts  
The first scaling screen shows the engineering units value that is considered equivalent to the low  
span (actual) value. Engineering units may be from -32767 to 32767.  
S : 2 CH1 E NG L O  
- 1 0 0 0 0  
<
>
c h g e n t r  
5-54  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Enter the high span value for the channel. This is the actual voltage in millivolts to be scaled to the  
high engineering units value.  
S : 2 CH1 E NG HI  
1 0 0 0 0  
<
>
c h g e n t r  
Next, enter the actual voltage in millivolts to be scaled to the low engineering units value.  
S : 2 CH1 S P AN L O  
- 1 0 0 0 0  
<
>
c h g e n t r  
Span values are 8 signed integers ranging from -10,000 to 10,000. After entering the low span  
value for the input, press the F4 (enter) key. Enter a high span value for the same input.  
S : 2 CH1 S P AN HI  
- 1 0 0 0 0  
<
>
c h g e n t r  
Alarm Limits  
The next screen is used to set the low alarm limit for the channel in engineering units.  
S : 2 CH1 AL RM L O  
- 1 0 0 0 0  
<
>
c h g e n t r  
Each input channel can have a low alarm limit and a high alarm limit. Alarm limits can be set  
anywhere over the dynamic range of the signal. The range for each is -32,767 to +32,767. The high  
alarm limit must be greater than the low alarm limit. If alarm reporting is not wanted, alarm limits  
can be set beyond the dynamic range of the signal so they will never be activated.  
After entering the Low Alarm Limit, press the F4 (enter) key. Then enter the High Alarm Limit for  
the channel.  
S : 2 CH1 AL RM HI  
1 0 0 0 0  
<
>
c h g e n t r  
That completes the configuration steps for one input channel on the 8-Point Grouped Analog  
Voltage Input module. Continue as described above to configure the rest of the inputs.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Configure a 16-Point Grouped Analog Voltage Input Module  
When you select “Read” from the empty slot HHM screen, this module screen appears:  
S1: ALG282: 1.0  
F4  
S : 2  
<
AL G2 8 2 1 . 0  
d e l z o o m  
S1: AI *AI016  
AI00001-00016  
F4, F2  
S1: I  
I00001-00072  
* I:072  
>
F4, F2  
S1: Q  
*Q016  
Q00001-00016  
Assign I/O References for the Module  
F4, F2  
S1 Module-> %I  
DEFAULT ZERO  
When you “zoom" into the module's slot, a screen like this appears:  
F1  
F2  
S1 Module-> %AI  
DEFAULT ZERO  
S : 2 AI  
* AI : 0 1 6  
Default data length  
AI 0 1 9 7 0 - 0 1 9 8 5  
F1  
F2  
Next available reference  
S1 Network->%Q  
DEFAULT ZERO  
Default BIU data type  
<
>
c h g e n t r  
F1  
F2  
S1 FILTERING  
20MS  
F2  
F1  
This screen shows the default table and length, and the next available reference address  
in that table for that reference parameter. The length is displayed in units that are  
appropriate for that data type (AI and AQ are in words, Q and I are in bits). The  
asterisk indicates that this reference has not yet been defined.  
S1 LINE FREQ  
60 HZ  
F1  
F2  
S1 CH 1 CONFIG  
F1, F2 select  
channel  
If the present selection is acceptable, press F4 (enter) to accept it. The asterisk will  
disappear. If you prefer to change the BIU table mapping, length, or reference value,  
press F3 (change).  
F4  
S1 CH 1  
ACTIVE  
F1  
F2  
S:2 AI AI  
Select table  
S1 CH1 RANGE  
-10V to +10V  
F1  
F2  
S1 CH1 ENG LO  
-10000  
tgl entr  
F1  
F2  
S1 CH1 ENG HI  
10000  
From this screen, you can display the other BIU data types by pressing F3 (toggle).  
Press F4 (enter) when the desired data type is displayed.  
F2  
F1  
S1 CH1 SPAN LO  
-10000  
F1  
F2  
S:2 AI AI:016  
Select length  
S1 CH1 SPAN HI  
10000  
F1  
F2  
S1 CH1 ALRM LO  
-10000  
clr entr  
F1  
F2  
S1 CH1 AL HI  
10000  
If you want to enter a different length for the displayed data type, press F3 (clear) to  
clear the length field. Enter the new length from the keypad. If you enter an invalid  
F1  
F2  
Repeat for other  
channels  
BAD LENGTH ERR  
length, the HHM prompts:  
F2  
5-56  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
After entering the correct length, the offset (starting reference) screen appears. The BIU  
automatically supplies the next available address in the selected table. You can press F4 (enter) to  
accept this value, or F3 (clear) then enter a new value from the keypad. Press the F4 (enter) key  
after entering a new offset.  
S:2 AI AI:016  
Ref Addr 00114  
< > clr entr  
The 16-Point Grouped Analog Voltage Input Module is an intelligent module, which uses more  
than one type of data. Use the F2 ( > ) key to display the screen for the module's discrete input  
diagnostic data.  
S:2 I * I:072  
I01152-01223  
< > chg entr  
You can edit this screen or accept it using the F4 (enter) key. The asterisk beside the data type  
disappears, to show that the current values have been saved.  
S:2 I  
I:072  
I01152-01223  
< > chg entr  
Next, go to the screen that shows the module's discrete output references, which are used for fault  
clearing.  
S:2 Q * Q:016  
Q00916-00931  
< > chg entr  
You can also edit this screen. Use the F4 (enter key) to save the selections and continue to the next  
item. Note that all required references for the module must be entered. You can give a reference  
parameter a length of zero if you do not want to map the data to the BIU. If you attempt to back out  
before the references are all configured, the HHM displays the following screen:  
Cfg Incomplete  
Clear Slot?  
yes no  
If you exit, the references you have configured are not saved  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Configure Data Defaults  
For data types AI and I, you can determine what the BIU should do with the module's data if the  
BIU loses communications with the module. Data can either be held at its present values or  
defaulted to zero.  
You can accept DEFAULT: ZERO with the F4 (enter) key, or press F3 (toggle) then F4 (enter) to  
change to DEFAULT: HOLD and save it.  
S:2 Module-> %I  
DEFAULT:ZERO  
< > tgl entr  
S:2 Module-> %I  
DEFAULT:HOLD  
< > tgl entr  
S:2 Module-> %AI  
DEFAULT:ZERO  
< > tgl entr  
For data going to the module (type Q) which is included within the BIU's I/O map, you can  
determine what data the BIU will send to the module if the BIU loses communications with the  
network.  
S:2 Network-> %Q  
DEFAULT:ZERO  
< > tgl entr  
5-58  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Configure Filtering  
Next, select the filtering delay to eliminate noise due to the AC power lines. Filtering increases the  
response time to changes in a channel.  
The choices for filtering are:  
A. None : The module returns the most recent sample of the input.  
B. 10 ms: The module averages the most recent 8 samples of the input.  
B. 20 ms: The module averages the most recent 16 samples of the input.  
The module will perform filtering on all inputs on the module that are configured as "active".  
S:2 FILTERING  
20MS  
< > tgl entr  
1. If you want to change the displayed selection, press F3 (tgl).  
2. Use the F4 (entr) key to save the selection.  
3. Press F2 ( > ) to go to the next screen.  
Configure the Line Frequency  
Next, set the line frequency for the module. Select 50 or 60 Hz.  
Disturbances due to AC noise cause variations around the desired DC level. The amplitude of  
these variations can be reduced by configuring the rate at which the module scans inputs for the  
operating frequency. If the line frequency is configured at 60 Hz, the module scans each input  
channel every 1.04 milliseconds. If the line frequency is configured at 50 Hz, the module scans  
each input channel every 1.25 mS.  
S:2 LINE FREQ  
60 HZ  
< > tgl entr  
1. If you want to change the displayed selection, press F3 (tgl).  
2. Use the F4 (entr) key to save the selection.  
3. Press F2 ( > ) to go to the first circuit configuration screen.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Circuit Configuration  
The sequence in which circuit configuration screens appear depends on the revision level of the  
Hand-held Monitor and the BIU.  
Channel Header  
If the BIU and Hand-held Monitor support display of channel headers, a header screen appears for  
each channel as shown below.  
S:1 CH 1 CONFIG  
< >  
zoom  
A. Press F2 (>) from this screen to go to the header screen for the next channel. Pressing F2 (>)  
from channel 8 displays the module's first reference parameter screen.  
B. Press F1 (<) from this screen to go to the header screen for the previous channel. Pressing F1  
(<) from channel 1 displays the module's last reference parameter screen.  
C. Press F4 (zoom) to go to the first configuration screen for the channel.  
D. When in a channel-specific configuration screen, press the up arrow/MENU key to go to that  
channel's header screen.  
If the BIU and Hand-held Monitor do not support display of channel headers, the header screens do  
not appear and keys F1 (<) and F2 (>) are used to scroll through channel-specific configuration  
screens.  
The following features are configured for each channel.  
Channel Active  
When a channel is configured as Active, it is scanned for data and checked for errors. If a channel  
should not be scanned, that channel can be configured as inactive. An inactive input channel returns  
the value 0.  
S:2 CH 1  
ACTIVE  
< > tgl entr  
1. If you want to change the displayed selection, press F3 (tgl).  
2. Use the F4 (entr) key to save the selection.  
3. Press F2 ( > ) to go to the next screen.  
5-60  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Input Range  
On this screen, specify the range for the input. There are two predetermined range and data scaling  
combinations.  
S:2 CH1 RANGE  
-10V to +10V  
< > tgl entr  
The default is -10V to +10V.  
Selection  
Input voltage (mV) = Data range  
-10000 to 10000 = -10000 to 10000  
0 to 10000 = 0 to 10000  
1
2
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Input Scaling  
The 16-Point Grouped Analog Voltage Input Module performs its own scaling (unlike conventional  
Field Control analog modules, whose scaling is performed by the BIU).  
Scaling can be used to define a linear relationship between a channel's input voltage in millivolts  
(mV) and the value in engineering units returned to the BIU. The default scaling configuration  
provides values from -10,000 to 10,000 for an input voltage range of -10V (low span value) to 10V  
(high span value).  
To scale a channel, choose a high and low point and enter the actual input value (span) and a  
corresponding engineering units value for each. During operation, the module will use these values  
to convert input voltages into digital values that represent engineering units. Scaling does not  
increase the resolution of the data, but it does transform the values returned to the BIU into more  
convenient units.  
If the scaled data falls below the minimum for engineering units, the module returns the minimum  
engineering units value (-32767). If the scaled data rises above the maximum for engineering units,  
the module returns the maximum engineering units value (32767).  
The illustration below shows the module's default scaling.  
15000  
High Point  
10000  
5000  
0
-15000  
-10000  
-10250  
-5000  
0
5000  
10000  
10250  
15000  
-5000  
-10000  
-15000  
Low Point  
Input Voltage in millivolts  
The first scaling screen shows the engineering units value that is considered equivalent to the low  
span (actual) value. Engineering units may be from -32767 to 32767.  
S:2 CH1 ENG LO  
-10000  
< > chg entr  
5-62  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Enter the high span value for the channel. This is the actual voltage in millivolts to be scaled to the  
high engineering units value.  
S : 2 CH1 E NG HI  
1 0 0 0 0  
<
>
c h g e n t r  
Next, enter the actual voltage in millivolts to be scaled to the low engineering units value.  
S : 2 CH1 S P AN L O  
- 1 0 0 0 0  
<
>
c h g e n t r  
Span values are 16 signed integers ranging from -10,000 to 10,000. After entering the low span  
value for the input, press the F4 (enter) key. Enter a high span value for the same input.  
S : 2 CH1 S P AN HI  
- 1 0 0 0 0  
<
>
c h g e n t r  
Alarm Limits  
The next screen is used to set the low alarm limit for the channel in engineering units.  
S : 2 CH1 AL RM L O  
- 1 0 0 0 0  
<
>
c h g e n t r  
Each input channel can have a low alarm limit and a high alarm limit. Alarm limits can be set  
anywhere over the dynamic range of the signal. The range for each is -32,767 to +32,767. The high  
alarm limit must be greater than the low alarm limit. If alarm reporting is not wanted, alarm limits  
can be set beyond the dynamic range of the signal so they will never be activated.  
After entering the Low Alarm Limit, press the F4 (enter) key. Then enter the High Alarm Limit for  
the channel.  
S : 2 CH1 AL RM HI  
1 0 0 0 0  
<
>
c h g e n t r  
That completes the configuration steps for one input channel on the 16-Point Grouped Analog  
Voltage Input module. Continue as described above to configure the rest of the inputs.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Configure an RTD Input Module  
When you select “Read” from the empty slot HHM screen, this module screen appears:  
S1: ALG620  
F4  
Module version  
S:4 ALG620 *.*  
S1: AI *AI004  
AI00001-00004  
F4, F2  
S1: I  
I00001-00032  
*I:032  
< > del zoom  
F4, F2  
S1: Q  
Q00001-00008  
*Q:08  
Assign I/O References for the Module  
F4, F2  
Press F4 to zoom into the slot. A screen like this appears:  
S1 AQ *AQ:004  
AQ00001-00004  
F1  
F4, F2  
Number of  
references for  
this module type  
S1 Module-> %I  
DEFAULT ZERO  
S:4 AI *AI:004  
AI01311-01314  
F1  
F2  
S1 Module-> %AI  
DEFAULT ZERO  
< > chg entr  
F1  
F2  
S1 Network->%Q  
DEFAULT ZERO  
This screen shows the default table and length and the next available reference address  
for that reference type. The length is displayed in appropriate units (AI and AQ in  
words, Q and I are bits). An asterisk indicates that the reference is not yet defined. If the  
present selection is acceptable, press F4 (enter) to accept it. The asterisk will disappear.  
F1  
F2  
S1 LINE FREQ  
60 HZ  
F1  
F2  
S1 CH 1 CONFIG  
If you prefer to change the BIU table mapping, length, or reference value, press F3  
(change).  
F1, F2 select  
channels  
F4  
S:4 AI AI  
Select table  
S1 CH 1  
ACTIVE  
F1  
F2  
chg entr  
S1 CH1 UNITS  
DEG C  
F1  
F2  
S
1
C
H
1
R
T
D
T
Y
P
E  
From this screen, you can display the other data types by pressing F3 (toggle). Press F4  
(enter) when the desired data type is displayed.  
100 PT 385  
F1  
F2  
S
1
C
H
1
W
I
R
E
T
YP  
3 WIRE  
F1  
F2  
S:4 AI AI:004  
Select length  
S1 CH1 ALARM LO  
-00200  
F1  
F2  
chg entr  
S1 CH1 ALARM HI  
00800  
F1  
F2  
S1 RESIST.1  
00000  
If you want to enter a different length for the displayed data type, press F3 (clear) to  
clear the length field. Enter the new length from the keypad. If you enter an invalid  
length, the HHM prompts: BAD LENGTH ERR After “entering” the correct length, the  
offset (starting reference) screen appears. The BIU automatically supplies the next  
available address in the selected table.  
F1  
F2  
Repeat for  
Other Channels  
F2  
5-64  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
You can press F4 (enter) to accept this value, or F3 (clear) then enter a new value from the keypad.  
Press the F4 (enter) key after entering a new offset.  
S:4 AI AI:004  
Ref Addr 01896  
clr entr  
Use the F2 ( > ) key to display the screen for the module's discrete input diagnostic data.  
S:4 I * I:032  
I01817-01904  
< > chg entr  
You can edit this screen or accept it using the F4 (enter) key. After you press the Enter key, the  
asterisk disappears to show that the current values have been saved. Next, press F2 to go to the  
screen that shows the module's Q references, which are for fault clearing.  
S:4 Q * Q:008  
Q01817-01832  
< > chg entr  
You can also edit this screen. Use the F4 (enter key) to save the selections. Press F2 to continue to  
the next item. The next screen displays AQ references for the module. Enter a length of 0. Use  
the F4 (enter) key to save and continue.  
S:4 AQ AQ:004  
AQ01057-01060  
< > chg entr  
All required references for the module must be entered. You can give a reference parameter a  
length of zero if you do not want to map the data to the BIU. If you attempt to back out before the  
references are all configured, the HHM displays the following screen:  
Cfg Incomplete  
Clear Slot?  
yes no  
If you exit from this display, the references you have configured are not saved.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Assign Data Defaults  
For data types AI and I, you can determine what the BIU should do with the module's data if the  
BIU loses communications with the module. Data can either be held at its present values or  
defaulted to zero.  
You can accept DEFAULT: ZERO with the F4 (enter) key, or press F3 (toggle) then F4 (enter) to  
change to DEFAULT: HOLD and save it.  
I data is diagnostic data sent by the module.  
S:4 Module-> %I  
DEFAULT:ZERO  
< > tgl entr  
AI data is RTD input data sent by the module.  
S:4 Module-> %AI  
DEFAULT:ZERO  
< > tgl entr  
For command data going to the module (data types Q and AQ) which is included within the BIU's  
I/O map, you can determine what data the BIU will send to the module if the BIU loses  
communications with the network.  
S:4 Network-> %Q  
DEFAULT:ZERO  
< > tgl entr  
Line Frequency  
Next, set the line frequency for the module. Select 50 or 60 Hz.  
S:1 LINE FREQ  
60 HZ  
< > tgl entr  
5-66  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Circuit Configuration  
The sequence in which circuit configuration screens appear depends on the revision level of the  
module, the Hand-held Monitor and the BIU.  
Channel Header  
For module version IC670ALG620, version 1.4 or later, if the BIU and Hand-held Monitor support  
display of channel headers, a header screen appears for each channel as shown below.  
S:1 CH 1 CONFIG  
< >  
zoom  
A. Press F2 (>) from this screen to go to the header screen for the next channel. Pressing F2 (>)  
from channel 8 displays the module's first reference parameter screen.  
B. Press F1 (<) from this screen to go to the header screen for the previous channel. Pressing F1  
(<) from channel 1 displays the module's last reference parameter screen.  
C. Press F4 (zoom) to go to the first configuration screen for the channel.  
D. When in a channel-specific configuration screen, press the up arrow/MENU key to go to that  
channel's header screen.  
If the BIU and Hand-held Monitor do not support display of channel headers, the header screens do  
not appear and keys F1 (<) and F2 (>) are used to scroll through channel-specific configuration  
screens.  
The following features are configured for each channel.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Channel Active  
S:4 CH 1  
ACTIVE  
< > tgl entr  
When a channel is configured as Active, it is scanned for data and checked for errors. If a channel  
should not be scanned, that channel can be configured as inactive. An inactive input channel returns  
the value 0.  
1. If you want to change the displayed selection, press F3 (Tgl).  
2. Use the F4 (entr) key to save the selection.  
3. Press F2 ( > ) to go to the next screen.  
Units  
Next, select the conversion type for each RTD: tenths of degrees Fahrenheit, tenths of degrees  
Celsius, or tenths of Ohms.  
S:1 CH1 UNITS  
DEG C  
< > tgl entr  
1. Press F3 (toggle) if you want to change the displayed type of units.  
2. Use the F4 (enter) key to save the selections on this screen and go on to the next item.  
Units' Ranges  
The following table shows the ranges for the types of units configured on this screen. Notice that  
Tenths of Ohms units are unsigned.  
Units Selected  
(Tenths of) Degrees (F or C)  
(Tenths of) Ohms  
Integer Ranges  
-32767 to +32767  
0 to 65535  
Engineering Units Ranges  
-3276.7deg. to +3276.7deg.  
0 Ohms to 6553.5 Ohms  
5-68  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
RTD Type  
Select the RTD type that most closely matches the RTD used on that channel. The table below has  
more information about RTD categories.  
S:1 CH1 RTD TYPE  
100 PT 385  
< > tgl entr  
1. Use the F3 (toggle) key if you want to change the displayed RTD type.  
2. Use the F4 (enter) key to save the selections on this screen and go on to the next item.  
Selection  
Comments  
Selection  
Comments  
Selection  
Comments  
10 PT  
10 Ohm Platinum (PT)  
100 PT 3916  
100 Ohm Platinum,  
100 NI 618  
100 Ohm Nickel At 0 deg. C,  
alpha  
alpha  
=.003916  
1 KOhm Platinum,  
alpha  
DIN43760,  
120 Ohm Nickel, at 0 deg. C,  
alpha  
=.00618  
25 PT  
25 Ohm Platinum IPTS-68  
1K PT 375  
10 CU  
120 NI 672  
=.00375  
=.00672  
604 NI/FE 518 604 Ohm Nickel/Iron, at  
alpha  
25.5 PT 392  
10 Ohm Copper, at  
25deg. C, IPTS-68  
alpha  
25.5 Ohm Platinum,  
=.00392 at 0 deg. C Lab Std  
0deg. C,  
=.00518  
100 PT 385 100 Ohm Platinum,  
alpha  
9.035 CU 427 9.035 Ohm Copper, at  
alpha  
IK NI/FE 527  
1 KOhm Nickel/Iron, at  
alpha  
=.00527  
DIN43760,  
=.00385  
alpha  
25deg. C,  
=.00427  
70deg. F,  
100 PT 3902 100 Ohm Platinum,  
=.003902  
50 CU 427  
100 CU 427  
100 NI  
50 Ohm Copper,  
500 OHM  
Select UNITS of 1/10 Ohms  
alpha  
=.00427  
100 Ohm Copper,  
alpha  
100 PT 392 100 Ohm Platinum,  
3000 OHM  
Select UNITS of 1/10 Ohms  
alpha  
=.00392 IPTS-6 8  
=.00427  
alpha  
100PT 3923 98.13 Ohm Platinum,  
=.003923  
100 Ohm Nickel,  
IPTS-68  
Wire Type  
Next, specify the type of field wiring present at the terminal board connectors for each RTD. The  
choices are 3 WIRE and 4 WIRE.  
S:1 CH1 WIRE TYP  
3 WIRE  
< > tgl entr  
1. Use the F3 (toggle) key if you want to change the displayed RTD Wire type.  
2. Use the F4 (enter) key to save the selections on this screen and go on to the next item.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Low Alarm Limit  
Next, set the low alarm limit for the RTD. The range is -32,767 to +32,767.  
Each RTD channel can have a low alarm limit and a high alarm limit. Alarms do not stop the  
process or change the value of the input.  
Alarm limits can be set anywhere over the dynamic range of the signal. If alarm reporting is not  
wanted, alarm limits can be set beyond the dynamic range of the signal so they will never be  
activated.  
The units used for alarm limits are the same type entered on the Units screen (tenths of Ohms, or  
tenths of degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit). If units are subsequently changed, alarm limits should be  
reviewed and adjusted if necessary.  
S:1 CH1 ALARM LO  
-200  
< > chg entr  
1. Use the F3 (change) key if you want to change the Low Alarm Limit, and enter the new value.  
2. Use the F4 (enter) key to save the selections on this screen and go on to the next item.  
High Alarm Limit  
Next, set the high alarm limit for an RTD. The range is -32,767 to +32,767. The high alarm limit  
must be greater than the low alarm limit.  
S:1 CH1 ALARM HI  
800  
< > chg entr  
1. Use the F3 (change) key if you want to change the High Alarm Limit, and enter the new value.  
2. Use the F4 (enter) key to save the selections on this screen and go on to the next item.  
5-70  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Resistance  
The RTD Resistance is a resistance adjustment that can change the Ohms value of an input. Its use  
is optional. The range is 0 to 3276.7.  
The value is entered and displayed in tenths of Ohms.  
S:1 RESIST.1  
00000  
Tenths of Ohms  
< > chg entr  
The resistance value is used to correct for RTD values that are not at the nominal value. For  
example, if a 100 Ohm platinum RTD is being used and it measures 99 Ohms at 25°C instead of  
the nominal 100 Ohms at 25°C, the value 990 should be entered here to correct the temperature  
readings.  
1. Use the F3 (change) key if you want to change the RTD Resistance.  
2. Enter the new value in tenths of ohms.  
3. Use the F4 (enter) key to save the selections on this screen and go on to the next channel.  
RTD Resistance specifications are available from the RTD manufacturer, or may be determined by  
actual measurement.  
RTD Type  
Low  
Temp. Deg.  
C
High Temp.  
Deg. C  
Low Ω  
Limit  
High Ω  
Limit  
6.13600  
14.8200  
-75.00  
-70.00  
-201.1111  
-40.00  
-200.00  
-180.0  
-17.7777  
-200.0  
-200.0  
-200.0  
-200.0  
-100.0  
-100.0  
-100.0  
-60.0  
150.00  
1000.00  
537.77  
140.00  
500.00  
850.0  
99.9999  
630.0  
600.0  
620.0  
630.0  
10 Ohm Copper @ 25°C  
7.02000  
4.14500  
80.88890  
199.4880  
27.01  
37.2599  
74.3089  
147.7700  
2754.620  
389.936  
135.000  
327.744  
311.874  
323.780  
83.575  
10 Ohm Platinum @ 25°C  
25 Ohm Platinum  
100 Ohm Nickel  
1 KOhm Platinum, α=.00375  
100 Ohm Platinum α=.00385  
100 Ohm Platinum, α=.003902  
100 Ohm Platinum IPTS68 (PA)  
100 Ohm Platinum SAMA-RC21-4 (PC)  
100 Ohm Platinum JISC-1604-'81  
25.5 Ohm Platinum Lab Std (PJ)  
9.035 Ohm Copper (CA)  
50 Ohm Copper (CB/2)  
93.5400  
26.5  
26.5  
26.5  
4.50  
6.05  
16.400  
260.0  
260.0  
260.0  
180.0  
260.0  
204.0  
204.0  
28.379  
56.757  
69.520  
66.600  
372.789  
566.576  
105.787  
211.574  
223.221  
380.310  
1318.722  
1985.891  
100 Ohm Copper (CB)  
100 Ohm Nickel (NB)  
120 Ohm Nickel (NA)  
-80.0  
604 Ohm Nickel/Iron (FA)  
1 KOhm Nickel/Iron (FB)  
-100.0  
-100.0  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Configuring a Thermocouple Input Module  
When you select “Read” from the empty slot HHM screen, this module screen appears:  
S1: ALG630  
F4  
S:4 ALG630 *.*  
S1: AI *AI008  
AI00001-00008  
F4, F2  
S1: I  
*I:048  
I00001-00032  
< > del zoom  
F4, F2  
S1: Q  
Q:016  
Q00001-00016  
F4, F2  
Assign I/O References for the Module  
S1 AQ *AQ:008  
AQ00001-00004  
F1  
F2  
Press F4 to zoom into the slot. A screen like this appears:  
S1: AI AI:008  
AI00001-00008  
F1  
F2  
S1 Module-> %I  
DEFAULT ZERO  
Number of  
references for  
this module type  
S:4 AI *AI:008  
AI00009-00016  
F1  
F2  
S1 Module-> %AI  
DEFAULT ZERO  
F1  
F2  
< > chg entr  
NETWORK->%AQ  
DEFAULT ZERO  
F1  
F2  
NETWORK->%Q  
This screen shows the default table and length and the next available reference address for  
that reference type. The length is displayed in appropriate units (AI and AQ in words, Q  
and I are bits). The asterisk indicates that the reference is not yet defined. If the present  
selection is acceptable, press F4 (enter) to accept it. The asterisk will disappear.  
DEFAULT ZERO  
F1  
F2  
S1 LINE FREQ  
60 HZ  
F1  
F2  
S1 OTC SUPPRESS  
NO  
If you prefer to change the BIU table mapping, length, or reference value, press F3  
(change).  
F1  
F2  
S1 CH1  
ACTIVE  
F1  
F2  
S1 CH1 UNITS  
MV  
S:4 AI AI  
Select table  
F1  
F2  
S1 CH1 TC TYPE  
NONE  
tgl entr  
F1  
F2  
S1 CH1 RANGE TP  
625  
F1  
F2  
From this screen, you can display the other data types by pressing F3 (toggle). Press F4  
(enter) when the desired data type is displayed.  
S1 CH1 ALARM LO  
-00250  
F1  
F2  
S1 CH1 ALARM HI  
01400  
F1  
F2  
S:4 AI AI:008  
Select length  
S1 CH1 RJ TYPE  
LOCAL  
F1  
F2  
S1 CH1 RJVAL.01  
00000  
clr entr  
F1  
F2  
S1 CH1 OFFST.01  
00000  
If you want to enter a different length for the displayed data type, press F3 (clear) to clear  
the length field. Enter the new length from the keypad. If you enter an invalid length, the  
HHM prompts: BAD LENGTH ERR After “entering” the correct length, the offset  
(starting reference) screen appears. The BIU automatically supplies the next available  
address in the selected table.  
F1  
F2  
Repeat for  
Other  
F2  
5-72  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
You can press F4 (enter) to accept this value, or F3 (clear) then enter a new value from the keypad.  
Press the F4 (enter) key after entering a new offset.  
S : 4 AI  
AI : 0 0 8  
Re f Ad dr 0 18 96  
c l r e n t r  
Use the F2 ( > ) key to display the screen for the module's discrete input diagnostic data.  
S: 4 I  
* I : 0 48  
I 0 1 8 0 1 - 0 1 8 4 8  
<
>
c h g e n t r  
You can edit this screen or accept it using the F4 (enter) key. After you press the Enter key, the  
asterisk disappears to show that the current values have been saved. Next, go to the screen that  
shows the module's Q references, which are for fault clearing.  
S:4 Q * Q:016  
Q01801-01816  
< >  
chg entr  
You can also edit this screen. Use the F4 (enter key) to save the selections and continue to the next  
item. The next screen displays the AQ reference for the module. You can edit the address and  
length. This one-word reference is used only if a remote compensation value will be supplied to the  
module by the BIU. ("Remote" must be configured as the RJ Type). For all other RJ Types, enter a  
length of 0. Use the F4 (enter) key to save and continue.  
S:4 AQ  
AQ:001  
AQ01057-01058  
< >  
chg entr  
All required references for the module must be entered. You can give a reference parameter a  
length of zero if you do not want to map the data to the BIU. If you attempt to back out before the  
references are all configured, the HHM displays the following screen:  
Cfg Incomplete  
Clear Slot?  
yes no  
If you exit from this display, the references you have configured are not saved  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Assign Data Defaults  
For input data types AI and I, you can determine what the BIU should do with the module's data if  
the BIU loses communications with the module. Data can either be held at its present values or  
defaulted to zero.  
You can accept DEFAULT: ZERO with the F4 (enter) key, or press F3 (toggle) then F4 (enter) to  
change to DEFAULT: HOLD and save it.  
Discrete input (I) data is diagnostic data sent by the module.  
S:4 Module-> %I  
DEFAULT:ZERO  
< > tgl entr  
Analog input (AI) data is input data sent by the module.  
S:4 Module-> %AI  
DEFAULT:ZERO  
< > tgl entr  
For command data going to the module (data types Q and AQ) which is included within the BIU's  
I/O map, you can determine what data the BIU will send to the module if the BIU loses  
communications with the network.  
S:4 Network-> %Q  
DEFAULT:ZERO  
< > tgl entr  
S:4 Network->%AQ  
DEFAULT:ZERO  
< > tgl entr  
5-74  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Line Frequency  
Next, set the line frequency for the module. Select 50 or 60 Hz.  
S:1 LINE FREQ  
60 HZ  
< > tgl entr  
Suppress Open Thermocouple Diagnostic  
S:4 OTC SUPPRESS  
NO  
< > tgl entr  
Configure whether the module should perform Open Thermocouple diagnostics on the input data.  
1. Select NO (the default) if the module should perform Open Thermocouple diagnostics. Select  
YES if it should not.  
2. Use the F4 (enter) key to save the selections on this screen and go on to the next item.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Circuit Configuration  
The following features are configured for each channel in turn.  
Channel Active  
S:4 CH 1  
ACTIVE  
< > tgl entr  
When a channel is configured as Active, it is scanned for data and checked for errors. If a channel  
should not be scanned, that channel can be configured as inactive. An inactive input channel returns  
the value 0.  
1. If you want to change the displayed selection, press F3 (Tgl).  
2. Use the F4 (entr) key to save the selection.  
3. Press F2 ( > ) to go to the next screen.  
Engineering Units  
Specify whether the module should report values for the input as hundredths of millivolts, or as  
tenths of degrees C or F.  
S:1 CH1 UNITS  
MV  
< > tgl entr  
1. Use the F3 (tgl) key if you want to change the current choice.  
2. Use the F4 (enter) key to save the selection.  
5-76  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Thermocouple Type  
Next, specify the type of Thermocouple present on the channel: J, K, T, E, S, R, B, N, G, C, D, or  
Platinel II. The default is NONE. If this default is selected, the module will report inputs as  
millivolts.  
S:1 CH1 TC TYPE  
NONE  
< > tgl entr  
Note: If you selected Engineering Units of millivolts on the previous screen, the TC Type should  
be NONE.  
1. Use the F3 (toggle) key if you want to change the displayed thermocouple type.  
2. Use the F4 (enter) key to save the selection.  
TC Type  
Low mV Limit  
High mV Limit  
Low Temperature High Temperature  
Limit (C)  
-210.00  
-200.00  
-200.00  
-200.00  
-40.00  
Limit (C)  
1000.00  
1370.00  
390.00  
J
-8.0960  
-5.8910  
-5.6030  
-8.8240  
-0.1940  
-0.1880  
0.03300  
-0.57480  
-0.00600  
0.23400  
-0.16300  
0.0000  
57.9420  
54.8069  
20.2520  
76.3580  
18.5040  
20.8780  
13.8140  
47.5019  
38.5639  
37.0660  
39.5060  
52.25  
K
T
E
1000.00  
1750.00  
1750.00  
1820.00  
1300.00  
2315.55  
2315.55  
2315.55  
1300.00  
S
R
-40.00  
B
100.00  
-22.222  
4.444  
N
G
C
D
-17.7777  
-17.7777  
0.00  
Platinel II  
Range Type  
If None was configured for Thermocouple Type, specify the range for millivolt inputs. The number  
displayed represents a +/- span of millivolts. For example, 19.5 represents +/-19.53 millivolts. The  
choices are: unused, 19.5mV, 39mV, 78.125mV, 156.25mV, 312.5mV, and 625mV. The default is  
625.  
S:1 CH1 RANGE TP  
625  
< > tgl entr  
1. Use the F3 (toggle) key if you want to change the displayed thermocouple range.  
2. Use the F4 (enter) key to save the selection and go on to the next item.  
Note: If you selected Engineering Units of millivolts, be sure to configure alarm limits (see next  
page) within the Range selected here.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Low Alarm Limit  
Next, set the low alarm limit for the input. The range is -32,767 to +32,767.  
Each thermocouple channel can have a low alarm limit and a high alarm limit. If an input reaches  
one of its limits, the module reports the actual value and a LOW ALARM or HIGH ALARM  
message. The message identifies the circuit in alarm. Only one message is sent upon reaching the  
limit. Alarms do not stop the process or change the value of the input.  
Alarm limits can be set anywhere over the dynamic range of the signal. If alarm reporting is not  
wanted, alarm limits can be set beyond the dynamic range of the signal so they will never be  
activated.  
The units used for alarm limits are the same type entered on the Units screen (hundredths of  
millivolts or tenths of degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit). If units are subsequently changed, alarm  
limits should be reviewed and adjusted if necessary.  
S:1 CH1 ALARM LO  
-00250  
< > chg entr  
1. Use the F3 (change) key if you want to change the Low Alarm Limit, and enter the new value.  
2. Use the F4 (enter) key to save the selections on this screen and go on to the next item.  
High Alarm Limit  
Next, set the high alarm limit for a thermocouple. The range is -32,767 to +32,767. The high alarm  
limit must be greater than the low alarm limit.  
S:1 CH1 ALARM HI  
01400  
< > chg entr  
1. Use the F3 (change) key if you want to change the High Alarm Limit, and enter the new value.  
2. Use the F4 (enter) key to save the selections on this screen and go on to the next item.  
5-78  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Reference Junction Compensation  
Specify how or whether the channel will perform cold junction compensation. The choices are  
Local, Remote, Fixed, and None. The default is Local.  
S:1 CH1 RJ TYPE  
LOCAL  
< > tgl entr  
Select Local if cold junction compensation will be provided for locally-terminated thermocouples  
using a locally-mounted thermistor (either as part of a Thermocouple Terminal Block (catalog  
number IC670CHS004), as described in the Installation Instructions, or connected directly to the A  
and B terminals of the I/O Terminal Block on which the module is installed).  
Select Remote if the module will receive a cold junction compensation value from the controller,  
via the BIU, as analog output (AQ) data. The value is in degrees C, and includes 2 decimal places.  
Select Fixed if you want to configure a specific reference value (on a later screen). The fixed value  
is configurable on a per channel basis.  
Select None for measuring millivolt inputs or if cold junction will be maintained at zero degrees C.  
1. Use the F3 (toggle) key if you want to change the displayed Reference Junction type.  
2. Use the F4 (enter) key to save the selection and go on to the next item.  
Reference Junction Value  
If you selected Fixed for RJ (Reference Junction) Type, enter the fixed value here. The .01 in the  
display is a reminder that the value entered includes tenths and hundredths. For example, you  
would enter 5522 to specify a value of 55.22 millivolts. The fixed value is added to the input  
millivolt value before linearization occurs. The fixed value should be obtained from a table for the  
appropriate thermocouple type.  
S:1 CH1 RJVAL.01  
00000  
< > chg entr  
1. Use the F3 (change) key if you want to change the value, and enter the new value.  
2. Use the F4 (enter) key to save the selections on this screen and go on to the next item.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Offset  
The last selection for each channel is Offset. This parameter is normally left at zero.  
The Offset is an optional fixed value that can be used to adjust for differences in thermocouples  
when the configured engineering units are either degrees C or degrees F. For example, if a  
thermocouple reads 25.3 degrees C when the actual temperature is known to be 25.0 degrees C, a  
value of -30 would be entered to cause the thermocouple to read 25.0 degrees.  
The value contains two decimal places and should be supplied in the units specified by the Range  
Type. The value is applied before high and low alarm checks.  
S:1 CH1 OFFST.01  
00000  
< > chg entr  
1. Use the F3 (change) key if you want to change the Offset, and enter the new value.  
2. Use the F4 (enter) key to save the selections on this screen and go on to the next item.  
Configure the Next Channel  
Continue to configure the next channel in the same manner.  
5-80  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Configure an 8-Point Analog Voltage Output Module  
S1: ALG310 1.0  
S:1 ALG310 1.0  
< > del zoom  
< > del zoom  
F4  
S1: I  
* I:024  
I00001-00016  
F4, F2  
S1: AQ *AQ:008  
AQ00001-00008  
F4, F2  
Assign I/O References for the Module  
S1: Q  
Q00001-00016  
* Q:016  
F4, F2  
When you "zoom" into the module's slot, a screen like this appears:  
S1 Module-> %I  
DEFAULT ZERO  
Backplane Slot  
F1  
F2  
S:1 I * I:024  
I00257-I00280  
Default data length  
S1 Network->%AQ  
DEFAULT ZERO  
F1  
F2  
Next available reference  
Default BIU data type  
S1 Network->%Q  
DEFAULT ZERO  
< > chg entr  
F1  
F2  
S1 LOC DEF OUT  
ZERO  
This I/O reference assignment screen shows the length and the next available reference address  
for each data type in BIU memory.  
F2  
F1  
For HHM version 4.8 or  
above this channel  
selection menu appears:  
The 8-Point Analog Voltage Output Module is an intelligent module that uses more than one type  
of data.  
S1 CH1 CONFIG  
F4  
up to 8 words of analog output data (data type AQ on the Hand-held Monitor)  
S1 CH 1  
ACTIVE  
0-3 bytes of discrete input data (data type I) for module and channel status. Use of this data  
is optional.  
F1  
F2  
S1 CH1 DEF RNG  
1
0-2 bytes of discrete output data (data type Q) for clearing alarms. Use of this data is  
optional.  
F1  
F2  
S1 CH1 ENG L  
-10000  
The length is displayed in units that are appropriate for the data type (analog output data is in  
words, discrete inputs and outputs are in bits). The asterisk indicates that the reference has not  
yet been defined.  
F1  
F2  
S1 CH1 ENG H  
+10000  
F2  
F1  
S1 CH1 SPAN L  
-10000  
The first screen shows references for discrete input (I) diagnostic data. You can display the other  
BIU data types by pressing F3 (toggle). Press F4 (enter) when the desired data type is displayed.  
F1  
F2  
S1 CH1 SPAN H  
+10000  
If the starting reference and length for the data type are acceptable, press F4 (enter) to accept  
them. The asterisk will disappear.  
F1  
F2  
Repeat for other  
channels  
F2  
For HHM version 4.8 or  
above press F1 from  
Channel Active screen  
or Up Menu key to go to  
Channel Config screen.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
If you prefer to change the BIU table mapping, length, or reference value, press F3 (change). Then  
press F3 to select a data table (data type).  
S:1 I  
I
Select table  
tgl entr  
To configure the selected data type, press F4 (entr). You can edit the length on this screen.  
S:1 I  
I:024  
Select length  
clr entr  
Enter the new length from the keypad. Valid values are:  
0, 8, 16, or 24 (bits) for discrete input (data type I) data.  
0, 8, or 16 bits for discrete output (data type Q) data.  
up to 8 words for analog output (data type AQ) data  
If you enter a length of zero, the HHM displays Unassigned for that data type.  
If you enter an invalid length, the HHM prompts: BAD LENGTH ERR. Data must be contained  
within byte boundaries; entries for length and reference address are automatically adjusted if  
needed. Lengths are adjusted down and reference addresses are adjusted down. For example, a  
length of 18 would be decreased to 16 and a starting address of 5 would be decreased to 1.  
After entering a valid length, the offset (starting reference address) screen appears. The BIU  
automatically supplies the next available address for the selected data type. You can press F4  
(enter) to accept the default value, or enter a new value from the keypad. Press the F4 (enter) key  
after entering a new offset.  
S:1 I  
I:024  
Ref Addr 00481  
< > clr entr  
Module reference addresses for each data type must be greater than or equal to the starting  
addresses listed in the BIU map. If you enter an invalid address, the HHM prompts: BAD REF  
ADDRESS.  
Use the F2 ( > ) key to display the screen for the module's analog output data  
5-82  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
S:1 AQ *AQ:008  
AQ00025-00032  
< > chg entr  
You can edit this screen or accept it using the F4 (enter) key. The asterisk beside the data type  
disappears, to show that the current values have been saved. Valid values for analog output data  
length are 0-8. If this length is set to less than 8 and the module has not been previously configured  
the outputs of unused channels will go to 0mV. However, if the module has been configured  
previously and is reconfigured to use fewer channels, the channels that are "removed" will continue  
to output voltage at their previously-configured levels until the module is reset.  
S:1 AQ AQ:008  
AQ00025-00032  
< > chg entr  
Pressing F2 (>) moves you to the screen that shows the module's discrete output bits, which can be  
used by the host for clearing faults. Valid lengths for this data type are 0-16. The data must lie on  
byte boundaries; entered lengths and reference addresses are automatically adjusted if necessary.  
S:1 Q * Q:016  
Q01817-01832  
< > chg entr  
Edit the reference address and length if needed. Press F4 (enter) to save the selections.  
Entries must be made for data types I, Q, and AQ. If you do not want to use one of these data types,  
give it a length of zero.  
If you back out before all data types have been configured, the HHM displays the following screen:  
Cfg Incomplete  
Clear Slot?  
yes no  
If you exit, the I/O configuration choices are not saved.  
The BIU will not send commands to the module until all three data types (I, Q, and AQ) have been  
configured.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Configure Data Defaults  
Data default screens are displayed next. For the module's diagnostic input bits (data type I), you  
can determine what the BIU should do with the data if the BIU loses communications with the  
module. Data can either be held at its present values or defaulted to zero.  
S:1 Module-> %I  
DEFAULT:ZERO  
< > tgl entr  
You can accept DEFAULT: ZERO with the F4 (enter) key, or press F3 (toggle) then F4 (enter) to  
change the default and save it.  
S:1 Module-> %I  
DEFAULT:HOLD  
< > tgl entr  
For the module's fault clearing discrete output bits (AQ and Q) you can determine what data the  
BIU will send to the module if the BIU loses communications with the network. Selectable values  
are ZERO and HOLD.  
S:1 Network->%AQ  
DEFAULT:ZERO  
< > tgl entr  
S:1 Network- %Q  
DEFAULT:ZERO  
< > tgl entr  
In an I/O station that includes local I/O control, some or all of the module's outputs may be  
assigned to addresses that are not within the BIU's I/O map. The defaults configured here do NOT  
apply to module outputs that are outside the BIU's I/O map.  
5-84  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Configure Local Default Outputs  
Next, select the default output mode used for all channels in the event of a local (module) failure or  
reset.  
This is not the same as the data defaults described on the previous page, which are for the BIU.  
The choices for local default output are:  
A.  
ZERO: The output of each channel goes to 0mV in the event of a local failure or reset.  
B.  
HOLD LAST: The output of each channel is held at the last value latched by the D/A  
converters in the event of a local failure or reset (provided the appropriate user power supply is  
present).  
S:1 LOC DEF OUT  
ZERO  
< > tgl entr  
1.  
2.  
3.  
If you want to change the displayed selection, press F3 (Tgl).  
Use the F4 (entr) key to save the selection.  
Press F2 ( > ) to go to the next screen.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Circuit Configuration  
The sequence in which circuit configuration screens appear depends on the revision level of the  
Hand-held Monitor and the BIU.  
Channel Header  
If the BIU and Hand-held Monitor support display of channel headers, a header screen appears for  
each channel as shown below.  
S:1 CH 1 CONFIG  
< >  
zoom  
A. Press F2 (>) from this screen to go to the header screen for the next channel. Pressing F2 (>)  
from channel 8 displays the module's first reference parameter screen.  
B. Press F1 (<) from this screen to go to the header screen for the previous channel. Pressing F1  
(<) from channel 1 displays the module's last reference parameter screen.  
C. Press F4 (zoom) to go to the first configuration screen for the channel.  
D. When in a channel-specific configuration screen, press the up arrow/MENU key to go to that  
channel's header screen.  
If the BIU and Hand-held Monitor do not support display of channel headers, the header screens do  
not appear and keys F1 (<) and F2 (>) are used to scroll through channel-specific configuration  
screens.  
The following features are configured for each channel.  
Channel Active  
When a channel is configured as Active, its analog output data is processed and its alarm  
conditions are returned. When a channel is configured as Inactive, its output goes to 0mV and its  
alarm conditions are not returned although any alarms that were already set can still be cleared  
using discrete output (Q) data.  
S:1 CH 1  
ACTIVE  
< > tgl entr  
1.  
2.  
3.  
If you want to change the displayed selection, press F3 (Tgl).  
Use the F4 (entr) key to save the selection.  
Press F2 ( > ) to go to the next screen.  
5-86  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Scaling Range  
Scaling can be used to define a constant-slope mapping from the value in engineering units sent by  
the BIU to a channel's output voltage. The default scaling configuration (-10V to +10V) provides  
an output voltage range of -10,000 (low span value) to +10,000 (high span value) for engineering  
units (AI) values of -10,000 to +10,000.  
On this screen, specify the default range used for scaling analog output data. There are two  
predetermined range and data scaling combinations (-10V to +10V and 0V to +10V).  
S:1 CH1 RANGE  
-10V TO +10V  
< > tgl entr  
The default is -10V to +10V, which provides negative/positive scaled values. For positive values  
only, select 0V to +10V. Note that if the 0V to +10V range is used, the module will  
underrange faults during operation.  
report  
not  
For either selection, you can use the default scaling parameters or enter different ones on the  
scaling screens.  
Selection  
Data Range = Output Voltage (mV)  
-10,000 to +10,0000 = -10,000 to +10,0000  
0 to +10,000 = 0 to +10,000  
-10V to +10V  
0V to +10V  
The illustration below shows the default relationship between span values and digital to analog  
counts.  
Digital to Analog Converter Output Values  
16383  
15170  
12000  
Maximum Output  
(~ 10.8V)  
Range: 0V to +10V  
Range: -10V to +10V  
Minimum Output  
(~ -10.8V)  
212  
-10000  
0
10000  
Commanded Value in Engineering Units (in Millivolts)  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Custom Scaling  
To scale a channel, choose a high and low point and enter the actual input value (span) and a  
corresponding engineering units value for each point. During operation, the module will use these  
values to convert engineering units into digital values that represent output voltage. Engineering  
units values are 16-bit signed integers from -32,768 to 32,767. Span values are signed integers  
ranging from -10,000 to +10,000 or 0 to +10,000.  
The first scaling screen shows the engineering units (AQ) value that corresponds the low span  
(output) value. Valid engineering units are -32768 to 32767.  
S:1 CH1 ENG L  
-10000  
< > chg entr  
1.  
2.  
3.  
If you want to change the displayed selection, press F3 (chg).  
Enter the new value using the numeric keypad.  
Press F4 ( entr) to enter the new value or F3 (clr) to abort the change.  
The high engineering units value for the channel is displayed next.  
S:1 CH1 ENG H  
10000  
< > chg entr  
If the low and high engineering units values are equal, the output of the channel is:  
the minimum output level (0mV) if the AQ data is less than the low engineering units value.  
the maximum output level (approximately 10.5V) span value if the AQ data is greater than or  
equal to the low engineering units value.  
The low span value is displayed next. This is the actual voltage in microvolts that a channel will  
output when the low engineering units value is commanded. Span values are changed in the same  
way that engineering units values are changed. Valid span values are -10,000 to +10,000 or 0 to  
+10,000. In the 0 to 10V range, a negative value for low span can not be configured.  
S:1 CH1 SPAN L  
-10000  
< > chg entr  
5-88  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
The high span value for the channel is displayed next.  
S:1 CH1 SPAN H  
10000  
< > chg entr  
If the low and high span values are configured to be equal, the channel will output the same voltage  
for all engineering units (AQ) values. The output voltage will correspond to that low/high span  
value. For example, if both the low span and high span values were configured as 10,000, the  
output voltage for the channel would be 10V regardless of the AQ value.  
The high span value must be greater than or equal to the low span value. If you enter a high or low  
span value that violates this condition, you will not be able to leave the span configuration screens  
until valid low and high values are configured. Pressing the CLEAR key in this situation will cause  
the HHM to display the following message:  
Cfg Incomplete  
Clear Slot ?  
yes no  
If you want to return to the span configuration screens, press F4 (no). If you want to clear the  
entire slot configuration instead, press F3 (yes). The slot will then be displayed as empty.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Configure an 8-Point Analog Current Output Module  
S1: ALG330 1.0  
F4  
S:1 ALG330 1.0  
< > del zoom  
S1: I  
I00001-00016  
* I:032  
F4, F2  
S1: AQ *AQ:008  
AQ00001-00008  
F4, F2  
S1: Q  
* Q:016  
Q00001-00016  
Assign I/Assign I/O References for the Module  
F4, F2  
S1 Module-> %I  
DEFAULT ZERO  
When you “zoom” into the module's slot, a screen like this appears:  
F1  
F2  
S1 Network->%AQ  
DEFAULT ZERO  
Ba ckplane Slot  
S : 1  
I
*
I : 0 3 2  
Default data length  
F1  
F2  
I 0 0 2 5 7 - I 0 0 2 8 8  
S1 Network->%Q  
DEFAULT ZERO  
Next available reference  
Default BIU da ta type  
F1  
F2  
<
>
c h g e n t r  
S1 LOC DEF OUT  
ZERO  
F2  
F1  
For HHM version 4.8 or  
above this channel  
This I/O reference assignment screen shows the length and the next available reference  
address for each data type in BIU memory.  
selection menu appears:  
S1 CH1 CONFIG  
The 8-Point Analog Current Output Module is an intelligent module which uses more than  
one type of data.  
F4  
S1 CH 1  
ACTIVE  
up to 8 words of analog output data (data type AQ on the Hand-held Monitor)  
F1  
F2  
1
0-4 bytes of discrete input data (data type I) for module and channel status. Use of this  
data is optional.  
S1 CH1 DEF RNG  
F1  
F2  
04000  
S1 CH1 ENG L  
0-2 bytes of discrete output data (data type Q) for clearing alarms. Use of this data is  
optional.  
F1  
F2  
20000  
S1 CH1 ENG H  
The length is displayed in units that are appropriate for the data type (analog output data is  
in words, discrete inputs and outputs are in bits). The asterisk indicates that the reference  
has not yet been defined.  
F2  
F1  
04000  
S1 CH1 SPAN L  
F1  
F2  
The first screen shows references for discrete input (I) diagnostic data. You can display the  
other BIU data types by pressing F3 (toggle). Press F4 (enter) when the desired data type is  
displayed.  
20000  
S1 CH1 SPAN H  
F1  
F2  
Repeat for other  
channels  
If the starting reference and length for the data type are acceptable, press F4 (enter) to  
accept them. The asterisk will disappear.  
F2  
For HHM version 4.8 or  
above press F1 from  
Channel Active screen  
or Up Menu key to go to  
Channel Config screen.  
5-90  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
If you prefer to change the BIU table mapping, length, or reference value, press F3 (change). Then  
press F3 to select a data table (data type).  
S:1 I  
I
Select table  
tgl entr  
To configure the selected data type, press F4 (entr). You can edit the length on this screen.  
S:1 I  
I:032  
Select length  
clr entr  
Enter the new length from the keypad. Valid values are:  
0, 8, 16, 24, or 32 (bits) for discrete input (data type I) data.  
0, 8, or 16 bits for discrete output (data type Q) data.  
up to 8 words for analog output (data type AQ) data  
If you enter a length of zero, the HHM displays Unassigned for that data type.  
If you enter an invalid length, the HHM prompts: BAD LENGTH ERR. Data must be contained  
within byte boundaries; entries for length and reference address are automatically adjusted if  
needed. Lengths and reference addresses are adjusted down. For example, a length of 18 would be  
adjusted to 16 and a starting address of 5 would be adjusted to 1.  
After entering a valid length, the offset (starting reference address) screen appears. The BIU  
automatically supplies the next available address for the selected data type. You can press F4  
(enter) to accept the default value, or enter a new value from the keypad. Press the F4 (enter) key  
after entering a new offset.  
S:1 I  
I:032  
Ref Addr 00481  
< > clr entr  
Module reference addresses for each data type must be greater than or equal to the starting  
addresses listed in the BIU map. If you enter an invalid address, the HHM prompts: BAD REF  
ADDRESS.  
Use the F2 ( > ) key to display the screen for the module's analog output data.  
S:1 AQ *AQ:008  
AQ00025-00032  
< > chg entr  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
You can edit this screen or accept it using the F4 (enter) key. The asterisk beside the data type  
disappears, to show that the current values have been saved. Valid values for analog output data  
length are 0-8. If this length is set to less than 8 and the module has not been previously configured  
the outputs of unused channels will go to 0mA. However, if the module has been configured  
previously and is reconfigured to use fewer channels, the channels that are “removed” will continue  
to output current at their previously-configured levels until the module is reset.  
S:1 AQ AQ:008  
AQ00025-00032  
< > chg entr  
Pressing F2 (>) moves you to the screen that shows the module's discrete output bits, which can be  
used by the host for clearing faults. Valid lengths for this data type are 0-16. The data must lie on  
byte boundaries; entered lengths and reference addresses are automatically adjusted if necessary.  
S:1 Q * Q:016  
Q01817-01832  
< > chg entr  
Edit the reference address and length if needed. Press F4 (enter) to save the selections.  
Entries must be made for data types I, Q, and AQ. If you do not want to use one of these data types,  
give it a length of zero.  
If you back out (using F1 (<) or MENU) before all data types have been configured, the HHM  
displays the following screen:  
Cfg Incomplete  
Clear Slot?  
yes no  
If you exit, the I/O configuration choices are not saved.  
The BIU will not send data to the module until all three data types (I, Q, and AQ) have been  
configured.  
5-92  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Configure Data Defaults  
Data default screens are displayed next. For the module's diagnostic input bits (data type I), you  
can determine what the BIU should do with the data if the BIU loses communications with the  
module. Data can either be held at its present values or defaulted to zero.  
S : 1 Mo d u l e - >  
DE F AUL T : Z E RO  
%I  
<
>
t g l e n t r  
You can accept DEFAULT: ZERO with the F4 (enter) key, or press F3 (toggle) then F4 (enter) to  
change the default and save it.  
S:1 Module-> %I  
DEFAULT:HOLD  
< > tgl entr  
For the module's fault clearing discrete output bits (AQ and Q) you can determine what data the  
BIU will send to the module if the BIU loses communications with the network. Selectable values  
are ZERO and HOLD.  
S:1 Network-> %Q  
DEFAULT:ZERO  
< > tgl entr  
S:1 Network->%AQ  
DEFAULT:ZERO  
< > tgl entr  
In an I/O station that includes local I/O control, some or all of the module's outputs may be  
assigned to addresses that are not within the BIU's I/O map. The defaults configured here do NOT  
apply to module outputs that are outside the BIU's I/O map.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Configure Local Default Outputs  
Next, select the default output mode used for all channels in the event of a local (module) failure or  
reset.  
This is not the same as the data defaults described on the previous page, which are for the BIU.  
The choices for local default output are:  
A.  
B.  
ZERO: The output of each channel goes to 0mA in the event of a local failure or reset.  
HOLD LAST: The output of each channel is held at the last value latched by the D/A  
converters in the event of a local failure or reset (provided the appropriate user power  
supply is present).  
S:1 LOC DEF OUT  
ZERO  
< > tgl entr  
1.  
2.  
3.  
If you want to change the displayed selection, press F3 (Tgl).  
Use the F4 (entr) key to save the selection.  
Press F2 ( > ) to go to the next screen.  
5-94  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Circuit Configuration  
The sequence in which circuit configuration screens appear depends on the revision level of the  
Hand-held Monitor and the BIU.  
Channel Header  
If the BIU and Hand-held Monitor support display of channel headers, a header screen appears for  
each channel as shown below.  
S:1 CH 1 CONFIG  
< >  
zoom  
A.  
B.  
Press F2 (>) from this screen to go to the header screen for the next channel. Pressing F2  
(>) from channel 8 displays the module's first reference parameter screen.  
Press F1 (<) from this screen to go to the header screen for the previous channel. Pressing  
F1 (<) from channel 1 displays the module's last reference parameter screen.  
C.  
D.  
Press F4 (zoom) to go to the first configuration screen for the channel.  
When in a channel-specific configuration screen, press the up arrow/MENU key to go to  
that channel's header screen.  
If the BIU and Hand-held Monitor do not support display of channel headers, the header screens do  
not appear and keys F1 (<) and F2 (>) are used to scroll through channel-specific configuration  
screens.  
The following features are configured for each channel.  
Channel Active  
When a channel is configured as Active, its analog output data is processed and its alarm  
conditions are returned. When a channel is configured as Inactive, its output goes to 0mA and its  
alarm conditions are not returned although any alarms that were already set can still be cleared  
using discrete output (Q) data.  
S:1 CH 1  
ACTIVE  
< > tgl entr  
1.  
2.  
3.  
If you want to change the displayed selection, press F3 (Tgl).  
Use the F4 (entr) key to save the selection.  
Press F2 ( > ) to go to the next screen.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Scaling Range  
Scaling can be used to define a constant-slope mapping from the value in engineering units sent by  
the BIU to a channel's output current. The default scaling configuration (selection 1 on this screen)  
provides an output current range of 4mA (low span value) to 20mA (high span value) for  
engineering units (AI) values of 4,000 to 20,000.  
On this screen, specify the default range used for scaling analog output data. There are three  
predetermined range and data scaling combinations (selections 1, 2 and 3).  
S:1 CH1 DEF RNG  
1
< > tgl entr  
The default is 1. Selections 1 or 2 have low span (output current) values which are greater than  
3.5mA and therefore enable an "Open Wire" diagnostic bit which is set whenever the output falls  
below approximately 2mA. "NONE" is used for display purposes only and cannot be selected if  
range 1, 2 or 3 is being used (see next section). If you want to enter different scaling parameters  
than those used for selections 1, 2, or 3, change the span and engineering units values from the  
scaling screens.  
Data Range = Output current (µA)  
4000 to 20000 = 4000 to 20000  
0 to 32000 = 4000 to 20000  
0 to 32000 = 0 to 20000  
Selection  
1
2
3
none  
User-configured scaling  
The illustration below shows scaling for the default range selections.  
46771  
Output Current in MicroAmps  
20000  
Maximum Output (~20.48mA)  
High Point  
10000  
4000  
Low Point  
0
4000  
10000  
20000  
Commanded Value in Engineering Units  
5-96  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Output Scaling  
If engineering and span values for a channel are entered during configuration rather than being set  
by a default range, “NONE” is displayed on the Default Range screen. “NONE” can then be  
selected again but will have no effect on the module configuration. The module performs its own  
scaling (unlike conventional Field Control analog modules, whose scaling is performed by the  
BIU).  
Custom Scaling  
To scale a channel, choose a high and low point and enter the actual input value (span) and a  
corresponding engineering units value for each point. During operation, the module will use these  
values to convert engineering units into digital values that represent output current. Engineering  
units values are 16-bit signed integers from -32,768 to 32,767. Span values are unsigned integers  
ranging from 0 to 20,000.  
The engineering and span points you select do not limit the actual hardware output range. For  
example, a channel whose range is configured to 1 will output current below 4mA for engineering  
units values below 4,000 even though the low span value is 4mA. It is possible to choose scaling  
parameters that will cause the current output to be limited by the scaling process. For example,  
using a low engineering units value of -32,768 (minimum value) and a high engineering units value  
of 32,767 (maximum value) would effectively limit the output current to values between the  
corresponding low and high span values.  
The first scaling screen shows the engineering units (AQ) value that corresponds to the low span  
(output) value. Valid engineering units are -32768 to 32767.  
S:1 CH1 ENG L  
04000  
< > chg entr  
1.  
2.  
3.  
If you want to change the displayed selection, press F3 (chg).  
Enter the new value using the numeric keypad.  
Press F4 ( entr) to enter the new value or F3 (clr) to abort the change.  
The high engineering units value for the channel is displayed next.  
S:1 CH1 ENG H  
20000  
< > chg entr  
If the low and high engineering units values are equal, the output of the channel is:  
the minimum output level (0mA) if the AQ data is less than the low engineering units value.  
the maximum output level (approximately 20mA) span value if the AQ data is greater than or  
equal to the low engineering units value.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
The low span value is displayed next. This is the actual current in microAmps that a channel will  
output when the low engineering units value is commanded. Span values are changed in the same  
way that engineering units values are changed. Valid span values are 0 to 20,000.  
S:1 CH1 SPAN L  
04000  
< > chg entr  
The high span value for the channel is displayed next.  
S:1 CH1 SPAN H  
20000  
< > chg entr  
If the low and high span values are configured to be equal, the channel will output the same current  
for all engineering units (AQ) values. The output current will correspond to that low/high span  
value. For example, if both the low span and high span values were configured as 10,000, the  
output current for the channel would be 10mA regardless of the AQ value.  
The high span value must be greater than or equal to the low span value. If you enter a high or low  
span value that violates this condition, you will not be able to leave the span configuration screens  
until valid low and high values are configured. Pressing the MENU Up key in this situation will  
cause the HHM to display the following message:  
Cfg Incomplete  
Clear Slot ?  
yes no  
If you want to return to the span configuration screens, press F4 (no). If you want to clear the  
entire slot configuration instead, press F3 (yes). The slot will then be displayed as empty.  
5-98  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Configure a Micro Field Processor  
There are two basic steps to configuring a Micro Field Processor (MFP):  
1. Configuring the MFP's Reference Parameters, as described here. Reference  
Parameter is the term used here to describe data (usually of more than one data  
type) that is transferred between an intelligent module and the Bus Interface Unit  
MFP x.x  
F4  
All data exchanged by intelligent modules in a Field  
during each BIU sweep.  
S1: MFPQ1  
Unassigned  
Control station is called Reference Parameters.  
F3  
2. Configuring any Group Data Moves that will be used to transfer Micro Field  
F1  
Processor data  
. All Group Data Moves are  
during specified BIU sweeps  
S1: MFPQ1  
Select table  
I
considered part of the Bus Interface Unit's own configuration.  
F4  
F1  
It is possible to configure a Micro Field Processor (or any other type of intelligent  
module) to have only Reference Parameters and no Group Data, or only Group Data  
and no Reference Parameters. But both types of data transfers can be used in a  
system. The typical configuration is to use only Reference Parameters.  
S1: MFPQ1 I:000  
Select length  
F4  
F1  
S1: MFPQ1 I:008  
Ref Addr00001  
Configure the Reference Parameters for the Micro Field  
Processor  
F4  
F1  
S1: MFPQ1 I:008  
I00001-00008  
To configure Reference Parameters for a Micro Field Processor, go to this menu:  
F3  
F1  
F4, F2  
Assign other reference  
parameters: MFPAQ, MFPI1,  
and MFPAI  
F1 Monitor  
F2 Configuration  
F4, F2  
F1  
S1: Module-> %AI  
DEFAULT:ZERO  
F4, F2  
F1  
Select F2 (configuration). If the module has not previously been added to the BIU  
configuration, the module configuration screen looks like this:  
S1: Network->%AQ  
DEFAULT:ZERO  
F4, F2  
F1  
Slot  
number  
S:1  
EMPTY  
DEFAULT:ZERO  
F4, F2 F1  
tgl read  
DEFAULT:ZERO  
F4, F2  
If the module is already installed and powered up, select F2 ( > ) repeatedly until the  
menu below appears, then press the F4 (read) key.  
S7: MFP1.0  
< > del zoom  
Press F4 (zoom). The HHM displays the first MFP data type screen.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Select Data Types for Micro Field Processor Data  
To configure BIU references for MFP data, use the cursor (F1, F2) keys to go through the available  
MFP data types. On the example screen below, the displayed MFP data type is Q (discrete outputs).  
If a data type has not been configured, or if it has been configured with a length of zero, the display  
indicates that it is not assigned:  
Currently-selected MFP  
data type  
S:7 MFPQ1  
Unassigned  
< > chg entr  
Note that data from the BIU to the Micro Field Processor's discrete output ( Q ) table will always  
start at Q00001 within the Micro Field Processor, as shown on the HHM screen above (MFPQ1).  
Similarly, data from the Micro Field Processor discrete input ( I ) table to the BIU will always  
come from the MFP starting at I00001 (which is indicated on the HHM as MFPI1).  
If you do not want any reference parameters for a Micro Field Processor (if you are using Group  
Moves to transfer all data between the MFP and the BIU), you must still configure at least one  
reference parameter with a length of zero. The reference parameter configured with the zero length  
will show as unassigned.  
To assign references to the presently-displayed data type, press the F3 (change) key. the screen  
displays:  
Currently-selected table  
in BIU  
S:7 MFPQ1  
Select table  
I
< > chg entr  
The upper right corner of the screen shows the BIU table type for the data. On the screen above, it  
is the discrete input ( I ) table. Normally, the same data type is used in both the MFP and the BIU.  
Use the F3 (change) key to choose the correct BIU table type.  
The HHM then requests a length for that data type. This is the amount of data of the selected type  
that will be exchanged with the BIU.  
S:7 MFPQ1 Q:000  
Select length  
< > chg entr  
5-100  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Enter the data length from the keypad, then press F4 (enter) to save it. The HHM displays the offset  
(reference address) of the first reference of the selected type that is available in the BIU. For  
example, if Q00001 through Q00032 were already assigned to other modules, the next available  
reference would be Q00033:  
S:7 MFPQ1 Q:016  
Ref Addr 00033  
< > chg entr  
If you enter an invalid length value or overlapping references, the HHM displays an error message.  
If that happens, press the HHM Clear key and make a new entry.  
If you enter a number that is not on a byte boundary for discrete data, the BIU will round down to  
the nearest correct offset.  
Select other MFP data types and specify BIU data types and references.  
Assign Data Defaults  
Next, set the default for each configured type of BIU data (unassigned data types are not displayed  
here).  
For the input data types AI and I, select what the BIU should do with the MFP's data if the BIU  
loses communications with the MFP. Data can either be held at its present values or defaulted to  
zero.  
S:4 Module-> %AI  
DEFAULT:ZERO  
S:4 Module-> %I  
DEFAULT:ZERO  
< > tgl entr  
< > tgl entr  
You can accept DEFAULT: ZERO with the F4 (enter) key, or press F3 (toggle) then F4 (enter) to  
change to DEFAULT: HOLD and save it.  
For output (Q and AQ) data which is included within the BIU's I/O map, determine what data the  
BIU will send to the module if the BIU loses communications with the network.  
S:4 Network-> %Q  
DEFAULT:ZERO  
S:4 Network->%AQ  
DEFAULT:ZERO  
< > tgl entr  
< > tgl entr  
When you are finished assigning and saving the Reference Parameters and data defaults for the  
Micro Field Processor, use the F2 ( > ) to return to the first Micro Field Processor configuration  
screen.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Configure Group Data Moves  
The BIU, Micro Field Processor, and intelligent modules can also be configured for "Group" data  
transfer. Group data is a set of data that the BIU regularly transfers from one location in the station  
to another.  
Up to 16 data groups can be set up for an I/O station. Each group can consist of up to four separate  
data moves  
. You might use a form like the  
between the same two devices and in the same direction  
one below to record your Group Data assignments.  
Group Data Moves Worksheet  
Data Source Dest. BIU Scans Move Src. Dest. Data  
Data  
Source Dest. BIU Scans Move Src. Dest. Data  
Group  
Slot  
Slot  
#
1
2
3
4
Ref.  
Ref.  
Len. Group  
Slot  
Slot  
#
1
2
3
4
Ref. Ref.  
Len.  
1
5
9
2
6
3
7
4
8
1
9
1
5
9
2
6
3
7
4
8
10 11 12  
10 11 12  
13 14 15 16  
13 14 15 16  
1
5
9
2
6
3
7
4
8
1
5
9
2
6
3
7
4
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
1
2
3
4
10 11 12  
10 11 12  
13 14 15 16  
13 14 15 16  
1
5
9
2
6
3
7
4
8
1
5
9
2
6
3
7
4
8
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
10 11 12  
10 11 12  
13 14 15 16  
13 14 15 16  
1
5
9
2
6
3
7
4
8
1
5
9
2
6
3
7
4
8
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
10 11 12  
10 11 12  
13 14 15 16  
13 14 15 16  
1
5
9
2
6
3
7
4
8
1
5
9
2
6
3
7
4
8
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
10 11 12  
10 11 12  
13 14 15 16  
13 14 15 16  
1
5
9
2
6
3
7
4
8
1
5
9
2
6
3
7
4
8
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
10 11 12  
10 11 12  
13 14 15 16  
13 14 15 16  
1
5
9
2
6
3
7
4
8
1
5
9
2
6
3
7
4
8
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
10 11 12  
10 11 12  
13 14 15 16  
13 14 15 16  
1
5
9
2
6
3
7
4
8
1
5
9
2
6
3
7
4
8
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
10 11 12  
10 11 12  
13 14 15 16  
13 14 15 16  
5-102  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Set Up a Group Data Move  
To configure one or more Data Groups, begin at the Main Menu for the BIU:  
F1 Monitor  
F2 Configuration  
From this menu, press F2 (Configuration). This menu appears:  
F1 GENIUS CONFIG  
F2 Module Config  
More  
Press F3 to display the next configuration screen:.  
F1 Grp Data Move  
F2 Previous Menu  
More  
Press F1 to display the first Group Data Move configuration screen:  
Grp Data Move 01  
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN  
Group at Cursor  
Location  
Each N or Y  
represents a potential  
Group Data move  
< > del zoom  
On this screen, each of the 16 potential Data Groups is represented by a letter N (no moves are  
defined for that group) or Y (for Yes, at least one move is defined in the group). The number of the  
Data Group indicated by the cursor also appears in the upper right corner of the screen.  
Move the cursor under the number of a group to set up and press F4 (zoom).  
Identify the Source and Destination Device  
The HHM is now ready to configure the parameters for the Group.  
Group Move 1:0  
Source Slot: 0  
< >  
entr  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
The number in the upper right corner of the HHM screen shows the group number (1 in the  
example above). The 0 indicates the slot definition.  
For each group move, the BIU can move data in one direction, to or from any intelligent module in  
the I/O Station including itself. It is also possible to move data from one memory type in the BIU to  
another memory type in this manner.  
Note the following about Group Moves:  
1. If a Group Move involves an intelligent module, the module must be present to configure the  
Group Move.  
2. If a Group Move has been configured with an intelligent module involved and the intelligent  
module is then deleted from the configuration, the Group Move containing that module is  
automatically deleted.  
3. The individual moves within a Group Move are not done by the BIU in sequential order. For  
example, two Group Moves would be needed to make the following moves sequentially:  
Slot 0 (the BIU)  
I00001  
Q00001  
to  
to  
to  
Slot 0 (the BIU)  
Q00001, length 2  
I00017, length 2  
The BIU would not move the contents of I00001 - I00016 into Q00001 - Q00016, then move  
the same data out of Q00001 - Q00016 into I00017 - I00032.  
Both the device being read from and the device being written to are identified by specifying their  
“slot” number (location in the I/O Station) as part of the group configuration.  
On the screen shown above, enter the slot number of the module (0 for the BIU, 1 to 8 for any other  
module) that will be the source of the data.  
Press the F4 (enter) key to accept the slot. Press F2 ( > ) to go to the next configuration screen.  
Next, enter the slot number of the module (0 for the BIU, 1 to 8 for another module) that will  
receive the Group Data. For example:  
Group Move 1:0  
Dest Slot: 7  
< >  
entr  
The Destination can be the same module specified as the Source.  
Press the F4 (enter) key to accept the destination slot, then press F2 ( > ) to go to the next  
configuration screen.  
5-104  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Configure the First Move for a Group  
Group Move 1:1  
Src Ref:%AI00009  
< > tgl entr  
For each data type, a starting offset and length can be specified. It is not necessary to move all of a  
module's data of a particular type. You can specify any suitable offset and length.  
If the reference is to a BIU table, you must enter the actual address of the data. The BIU will  
calculate the offset.  
For a Micro Field Processor, the following data types can be read or written: R, AI, AQ, A, I, Q, M,  
T, G. In addition, data of types S, SA, SB, and SC can be moved from the MFP to BIU (only). The  
BIU has read access only to these tables.  
Press the F4 (enter) key to accept the Source Reference. Press F2 ( > ) to go to the next  
configuration screen.  
Next, enter the Destination Reference:  
Group Move 1:1  
Des Ref: %R00002  
< > tgl entr  
Press the F4 (enter) key to accept the Destination Reference. Press F2 ( > ) to go to the next  
configuration screen.  
Enter the length for the data to be moved.  
Group Move 1:1  
Byte Len: 032  
< >  
entr  
Configure More Moves for a Group  
Continue from the screen shown above to configure additional moves in the same group.  
It is not necessary to configure moves that are not used-a group can have 1, 2, 3, or 4 moves.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Configure the Defaults for Each Move in a Group  
Next, establish the defaults for each move in a Group. This determines how the BIU responds if it  
loses communications with the module that is the source of the data. The BIU continues performing  
the Group Data moves even if it is not able to read fresh data from the Source module. If the  
source is slot 0 (the BIU itself) and the data type is discrete or analog output (Q or AQ), and that  
data is included within the BIU's I/O map of data received from the network, these determine what  
happens if network communications are lost.  
On the next screen, specify whether the BIU should set the data it transfers to all zeros or hold the  
data in its last valid states.  
Make this selection for each move in the Group by moving the cursor under the selection for each  
move (move 1 of Group 1 in the example below). Use the F3 (toggle) key to select either Y for  
Default to Zero, or N for Hold Last State.  
Move Deflt 1:1  
YYYY  
< > tgl entr  
Press the F4 (enter) key then press F2 ( > ) to go to the next configuration screen.  
Specify the BIU Scanning Frequency for the Data Group  
An important characteristic of Group Data is that it does not need to be moved during each BIU  
sweep. The last step in configuring a Group is to specify the sweeps during which the data should  
be moved.  
The screen shows the scans (1 to 16) when the BIU will transfer the indicated Data Group. The  
number of the current Data Group appears in the upper left corner of the screen.  
If every location on this screen is set to Y (yes), the BIU will transfer the data during each of its  
sweeps. If every location s set to N, the BIU will never move the Group Data. Setting only one  
location to Y and the rest to N means the data will be transferred during every 16th sweep by the  
BIU.  
Sweep Enab 02:03  
YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY  
Group:BIU sweep  
BIU Sweeps  
< > del zoom  
for the Group  
Use the F3 (toggle) key to change to “N” any sweep the Group should not be moved. You can  
select any combination of sweeps. Select a number that is appropriate for the data in the Group.  
Remember that skipping sweeps will speed up the operation of the BIU.  
After completing this screen, press F4 (enter) to download the group definitions to the module and  
update the group in the BIU EEPROM.  
Return to the Group Screen  
After configuring a Group, use the HHM's Clear key or F1 ( < ) to return to the Group screen.  
5-106  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
Deleting a Group Data Move  
To remove one or more Data Groups, begin at the Main Menu for the BIU:  
F1 Monitor  
F2 Configuration  
From this menu, press F2 (Configuration). This menu appears:  
F1 GENIUS CONFIG  
F2 Module Config  
More  
Press F3 to display the next configuration screen:  
F1 Grp Data Move  
F2 Previous Menu  
More  
Press F1 to display the first Group Data Move configuration screen:  
Grp Data Move 01  
YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY  
Group at Cursor  
location  
Each N or Y  
< > del zoom  
represents a Group  
Data move  
On this screen, each of the 16 potential Data Groups is represented by a letter N (for No) or Y (for  
Yes). The number of the Data Group indicated by the cursor also appears in the upper right corner  
of the screen.  
To delete a previously-configured data group, on the screen shown directly above, move the cursor  
under the group to delete. Press F3 (delete) to remove the configuration for that group.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 5 Station Configuration  
5-107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diagnostics and Fault Clearing  
Chapter  
6
This chapter describes the diagnostics capabilities of the Bus Interface Unit, and explains how  
faults can be cleared from a Hand-held Monitor or programmer.  
Diagnostics and Fault Clearing for Intelligent Modules  
Diagnostics and Fault Clearing for the BIU and Conventional Modules  
Display and Clear Faults from a Genius Hand-held Monitor  
Display and Clear Faults from a Series 90 PLC  
Display and Clear Faults from a Series Five or Series Six PLC  
Diagnostics and Fault Clearing for Intelligent Modules  
Some types of Field Control modules, for example, RTD and Thermocouple modules, can provide  
module and circuit diagnostics in the form of discrete input data. This data can be automatically  
sent to the host and used by the host as needed. The content of each type of intelligent module's  
diagnostic data is different. Details are given in the module's datasheet.  
This diagnostic information is separate from the fault table and fault clearing procedures used by  
the BIU and conventional I/O modules. The faults do not count in the total number of faults that  
can be stored by the BIU.  
The host can clear an intelligent module's diagnostic bits using the module's discrete output bits.  
These faults cannot be cleared using a Hand-held Monitor or by sending a Clear Faults datagram.  
GFK-0825F  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Diagnostics and Fault Clearing for the BIU and Conventional  
Modules  
The Bus Interface Unit reads faults from conventional modules in the I/O station. These faults can  
be viewed, and cleared from a programmer fault table or from a Hand-held Monitor. The following  
table lists the fault messages generated by the Genius Bus Interface Unit for module and circuit  
faults on conventional I/O modules.  
BIU Level Faults  
Corrupted EEPROM  
Module Level Faults  
Unsupported Feature  
Calibration Memory Failure  
System Configuration Mismatch  
Fuse Blown  
Loss of I/O Module  
Addition of I/O Module  
Extra I/O Module  
Loss of User Power  
Circuit Level Faults  
Analog Open Wire  
Analog High Alarm  
Analog Low Alarm  
Analog Over Range  
Analog Under Range  
In addition to module and circuit faults, the Bus Interface Unit itself provides the following  
diagnostics to the host:  
Serial Bus Address conflict  
Loss of communications  
Loss of controllers  
EPROM fault  
RAM fault  
Processor fault  
Maximum Number of Uncleared Faults  
The Bus Interface Unit can store up to 32 uncleared faults at one time in its internal fault table. The  
same internal table is used for faults from I/O modules and Bus Interface Unit faults.  
As faults occur, the first 16 are saved in the internal table. They stay there until the faults are  
cleared; none of these 16 faults will be lost if the table overflows. However, for faults 17 through  
32, the internal fault table operates as a First-In-First-Out stack. When fault 33 occurs, fault 17 is  
dropped from the table.  
Fault 1  
.
.
Fault 16  
Fault 17  
Fault 32  
Faults overflow here  
New faults are added here  
6-2  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6
Display and Clear Faults from a Genius Hand-held Monitor  
A Genius Hand-held Monitor can display faults from a Bus Interface Unit while attached anywhere  
on the Genius bus.  
1. From the HHM Main Menu shown below, display the HHM's special set of menus for the Bus  
Interface Unit.  
F1:HHM UTILITIES  
F2:ANALYZE  
F3:CONFIGURATION  
F4:DEVICE MEMORY  
A. If the Bus Interface Unit is the currently-selected device, press either F3 (Configuration)  
or F2 (analyze) twice.  
B. If the Bus Interface Unit is NOT the currently-selected device:  
Select F2 (analyze) then F3 (Block/Bus Status).  
Press the F1 (nxt) or F2 (prev) key repeatedly until you reach the serial bus address of  
the Bus Interface Unit. Press F3 to make the Bus Interface Unit the active device.  
Then, press the keypad Menu key, followed by F2 (Monitor/Control Reference).  
The HHM's Main Menu for the Bus Interface Unit appears:  
F1 Monitor  
F2 Configuration  
2. Select F1 (monitor) to display this menu:  
F1 Monitor I/O  
F2:Faults  
F3 Previous Menu  
3. Select F2 (faults) to display fault information for the Bus Interface Unit and its modules.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Fault Clearing  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6
4. The Faults menu appears:  
F1 First 16 Flts  
F2 Last 16 Flts  
F3 Previous Menu  
5. Press F1 to display the first set of 16 faults (one fault at a time). For example:  
Slot #1 Fault#01  
Fault  
EXTRA I/O MODULE  
message  
Use F1 and F2 to  
display another  
fault  
< >  
exit  
If there are no faults, the HHM displays the message: No Faults on the top line.  
6. To display the last 16 faults (if any):  
A. Press F4 (exit) to return to the screen shown at the top if this page.  
B. Press F2 (last 16 faults).  
Clearing Faults  
If faults are present, pressing Clear here has no  
effect. To clear faults from the Hand-held Monitor  
you need to do the following:  
F 1 : H H M  
U T I L I T I E S  
F 2 : A N A L Y Z E  
F 3 : C O N F I G U R A T I O N  
F 4 : D E V I C E  
M E M O R Y  
1. Return to the HHM Main Menu.  
2. Press F2 (Analyze).  
F2  
F 1 : M O N I T O R  
B L O C K  
F 2 : M N T R / C N T L  
F 3 : B L O C K / B U S  
F 4 : P U L S E  
R E F  
S T S  
T E S T  
3. Press F3 (Block/Bus Status).  
4. Press the Clear key.  
F3  
R E F S  
* _  
*
OI  
Clearing faults from the Hand-held Monitor does  
not clear faults at the host PLC. To keep the entire  
system in step and up-to-date, fault clearing should  
be performed from the host PLC.  
F L D P R  
2 0 v * . *  
N O  
F O R C E  
p r v  
n x t  
a c t v  
b u s  
6-4  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Display and Clear Faults from a PLC  
A PLC places faults from a Field Control station in the I/O and PLC Fault Tables.  
Series 90 PLC: I/O Fault Table  
The content of the I/O fault display depends on the revision level of the PLC's Bus Controller  
module, and the type of programmer software being used. With a Bus Controller that is version  
4.6 or later, when a fault occurs on a Field Control station, the I/O Fault Table shows the station ID  
and the rack and slot within the station where the fault has occurred:  
14#0.4  
Serial Bus Address  
Rack  
Slot  
If the Bus Controller is only a rev. 3 version, it cannot transfer to the PLC the detailed fault  
information provided by a Bus Interface Unit. Instead, a rev. 3 Bus Controller reports any fault  
from a remote station as a GENA fault. To clear the fault table, press the Clear (F9) key.  
You must clear the I/O Fault Table from the programming software for the fault to be  
cleared in the PLC CPU and for the associated fault contact to be cleared.  
Clearing faults  
with a Hand-held Monitor alone does not remove them from the Fault Table, or cause any  
-[FAULT]-  
associated  
contacts to stop passing power flow.  
Clearing the I/O Fault Table at the PLC causes the Bus Controller to send a Clear All  
Circuit Faults background message to all blocks on the bus. Faults can be cleared from the  
Fault Table either from the fault table display or by the application program.  
Clearing the fault table removes the faults it contains; it does not clear fault conditions in  
the system. If the condition that caused a fault still exists and is detected, the fault will be  
reported again.  
Note: If faults are cleared from the PLC before the BIU has received outputs from the  
PLC, some faults such as Loss of Module or Extra Module are lost.  
Series 90 PLC: PLC Fault Table  
The PLC Fault Table shows the station ID and the location in the station where the fault occurred:  
14#0.4  
Serial Bus Address  
Rack  
Slot  
Pressing the Clear key from this display clears the entire PLC Fault Table. If there are no faults in  
the I/O Fault Table, then pressing Clear will also clear Bus Interface Unit faults.  
Series Five or Series Six PLC  
If the host CPU is a Series Five or Series Six PLC, faults from a Field Control station are displayed  
in the Genius Fault Table. Faults from Field Control stations are identified as GENA faults. The  
GENA is the component within the Bus Interface Unit that handles the Genius bus interface.  
Pressing the Clear Faults key clears all faults currently in the fault table. This sets the fault count to  
zero, and sends a Clear command to the Bus Interface Unit.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 6 Diagnostics and Fault Clearing  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Monitoring and Controlling Field Control Data  
Chapter  
7
This chapter explains how to monitor or control Field Control I/O data using a Genius Hand-held  
Monitor or a programmer.  
Overview  
Forcing Circuits  
Overriding I/O Circuits  
Monitor/Control I/O Data: Genius Hand-held Monitor  
Changing the Reference Type Being Displayed  
Displaying Another Reference  
Changing the Display Mode  
Forcing/Unforcing the Displayed Reference  
Monitor/Control I/O Data: Series 90 PLC  
Reference Tables Display from the PLC  
Monitor/Control I/O Data: Series Six PLC or Series Five PLC  
Field Control Data in I/O Table Memory  
Field Control Data in Register Memory  
Mixed Reference Table Displays  
Monitor/Control I/O Data: Computer  
If you are using another type of programmer software, please consult the documentation supplied  
with that software for instructions.  
GFK-0825F  
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Overview  
There are two ways to manipulate I/O data in a station:  
A. by forcing an input or output to assume a desired state or value that will be stored in the BIU's  
EEPROM memory. This is done with a Hand-held Monitor; no equipment other than the I/O  
module(s) is required. It can also be done using datagrams. Forces can only be applied to the  
portions of the BIU's internal memory that are included in the BIU's I/O map. Forces cannot be  
applied to references that lie outside the I/O map. Forcing guarantees consistent I/O behavior  
regardless of power failures or communications interruptions. If you want to check out a  
circuit at the station, the simplest way is with a Hand-held Monitor, using force/unforce.  
B. for a host PLC, data can be manipulated by overriding an input or output state in the PLC's  
override tables. This is done with the programmer. The PLC and Genius Bus Controller must  
be connected to the Bus Interface Unit and must be operating.  
Both methods are described on the following pages. They are valuable tools for verifying circuit  
wiring in a Field Control station.  
Forcing Circuits  
Forcing an I/O circuit from a Hand-held Monitor causes the circuit to assume a selected state (for  
discrete circuits) or value (for analog circuits). Once forced, a circuit retains the selected state or  
value even if power is cycled. The forced circuit ignores data from an attached input device or  
output data from a CPU. Forcing is the only method of manipulating I/O circuits that guarantees a  
fixed output/input state.  
While any circuit in the station is forced, the Bus Interface Unit's I/O Enabled LED blinks.  
The force is normally applied and removed with an HHM. When unforced, a circuit responds to  
real input or output data. Output circuits begin accepting CPU outputs. If no CPU outputs are  
available, the output will either go to its programmed default state or hold its last state, according to  
the circuit's preselected configuration.  
The only other action that removes forces is a configuration change to delete a module. In that case,  
forced data for that module is assumed obsolete and is discarded.  
Notes  
Forcing supercedes all other considerations, including default and hold last state.  
If a discrete circuit configured to hold its last state is forced while the Bus Interface Unit is online,  
the forced state is considered to be the last state.  
If the BIU goes offline and the force is removed while offline, the circuit remains forced, rather  
than assuming its actual last state. When the BIU goes back online, the circuit will again accept  
outputs normally.  
Overriding I/O Circuits  
Overriding an I/O circuit means changing its state or value in the PLC's Override Tables.  
Overrides must be done from the PLC, with the Bus Interface Unit online. Results can be viewed  
on the programmer screen. The override data is stored in the PLC, and survives loss of power in  
the PLC. However, if power is lost at the PLC but not at the Bus Interface Unit, the Bus Interface  
Unit operates as it normally does if CPU communications are lost. Outputs go to their default state  
or hold their last state (as configured). Once power is restored at the PLC and CPU  
communications resume, the output overrides again take effect.  
7-2  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7
Monitor/Control I/O Data:  
Genius Hand-held Monitor  
A Genius Hand-held Monitor can be used to display diagnostics (see chapter 8) and current I/O  
states, and to force and unforce individual I/O points.  
1. From the HHM Main Menu shown below, display the HHM's special set of menus for the Bus  
Interface Unit.  
F1:HHM UTILITIES  
F2:ANALYZE  
F3:CONFIGURATION  
F4:DEVICE MEMORY  
A. If the Bus Interface Unit is the current-selected device, press either F3 (Configuration) or  
F2 (analyze) twice.  
B. If the Bus Interface Unit is NOT the currently-selected device:  
select F2 (analyze) then F3 (Block/Bus Status).  
Press the F1 (nxt) or F2 (prev) key repeatedly until you reach the serial bus address of  
the Bus Interface Unit. Press F3 to make the Bus Interface Unit the active device.  
Then, press the keypad Menu key, followed by F2 (Monitor/Control Reference).  
The HHM's Main Menu for the Bus Interface Unit appears:  
F1 Monitor  
F2 Configuration  
2. Select F1 (monitor) to display this menu:  
F1 Monitor I/O  
F2:Faults  
F3 Previous Menu  
3. Select F1 (monitor I/O) to display I/O information for the Bus Interface Unit and its modules.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 7 Monitoring and Controlling Field Control Data  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7
The first screen that appears is the Monitor screen for the first discrete input ( I ) reference.  
Indicates force is in effect  
Current state or value  
Reference being monitored  
Display mode:  
B binary  
H hex  
D decimal  
I00001 *0 B  
< > frc hex  
Changing the Reference Type Being Displayed  
Use the F1 ( < ) key to select a reference type: I (discrete inputs), Q (discrete outputs), AQ (analog  
outputs), or AI (analog inputs).  
Stepping Through the Configured References of the Displayed Type  
Use the F2 ( > ) key to advance through the point reference screens for the selected reference type.  
Displaying a Specific Reference  
If you want to go directly to a specific reference:  
1. Display the reference type ( I (discrete inputs), Q (discrete outputs), AQ (analog outputs), or  
AI (analog inputs) as described above).  
2. Press the HHM's + key.  
3. Enter the reference number from the keypad.  
4. Press the F4 (enter) key.  
Displaying References that are Outside the BIU's I/O Map  
If you want to display a reference that lies outside the I/O map that has been configured for the Bus  
Interface Unit, follow the instructions for Displaying a Specific Reference.  
Changing the Display Mode  
Use the F4 (mode) key to change the displayed point state or value to hex (H), binary (B) or  
decimal (D) format.  
Returning to the Previous Menu  
From this screen, press the HHM Clear key to return to the main Bus Interface Unit menu.  
7-4  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Forcing/Unforcing the Displayed Reference  
Individual I/O points can be forced and unforced from the Hand-held Monitor (the HHM's circuit  
forcing capability must be enabled to use this function).  
Forcing an I/O point changes its state in the Bus Interface Unit's EEPROM memory. If the circuit  
is an output, the physical state of the output also changes. If the circuit is an input, the forced input  
data is sent to the CPU. Once forced, a circuit retains the forced state or value if power is removed.  
The forced circuit ignores data from an attached input device, or output data from the CPU. The  
force can ONLY be removed from the Hand-held Monitor.  
1. Select the correct data type for forcing (Binary for discrete I/O or Decimal for analog I/O).  
Press F4. to change the data type.  
I00001 *0 B  
< > frc hex  
2. Press the F3 (force) key to force the reference now being displayed:  
I00001 1 B  
frc unfrc  
Indicates force is in effect  
Current state or value  
I00001 *0 B  
frc unfrc  
3. Press F3 (force) again. Then, use the HHM keypad to enter the force state or value.  
4. Use the F4 (unforce) key from the same screen when you want to unforce the point.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 7 Monitoring and Controlling Field Control Data  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7
Monitor/Control I/O Data:  
Series 90 PLC  
If the host is a Series 90 PLC, I/O data can be displayed in the PLC's reference tables. The PLC's  
reference tables displays will include those portions of the PLC's I, Q, AI, and AQ memory being  
used by a Bus Interface Unit.  
In the reference tables for the PLC, these inputs are displayed along with other system inputs.  
When the programmer is attached to the PLC, the programmer software can override or toggle the  
I/O data and cause a change.  
Monitor/Control I/O Data:  
Series Six PLC or Series Five PLC  
For a Series Six or Series Five PLC, I/O data for a Field Control station may be configured to use  
either I/O or register memory. To utilize the data correctly, it is necessary to know the slot number  
of each module, and the amount of input and output data it has. Data lengths are equal to the  
amounts configured for I, AI, Q, and AQ. For discrete data, 16 points = 16 I/O references or 1  
register. For analog data, 1 channel = 16 I/O references or 1 register.  
Input Data Message  
(up to 128 bytes)  
discrete inputs  
analog inputs  
To CPU  
Configured I Length  
Configured AI Length  
Field Control Data in I/O Table Memory  
In I/O memory, data from a Bus Interface Unit is stored beginning at the assigned I/O reference. In  
the Input Table, the sequence is: discrete inputs then analog inputs. In the Output Table, the  
sequence is discrete outputs then analog outputs.  
Field Control Data in Register Memory  
If Series Six or Series Five register memory is used for data from the Bus Interface Unit, an amount  
is required that is equal to the total number of bytes of input data PLUS output data. The data is  
stored beginning at the assigned register reference. The sequence is: discrete inputs, then analog  
inputs, then discrete outputs, and analog outputs last. Data lengths are equal to the amounts of I,  
AI, Q, and AQ configured for the Bus Interface Unit.  
7-6  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7
Monitor/Control I/O Data:  
Computer  
To utilize the Bus Interface Unit's I/O data correctly, a computer must know the sequence of  
modules in the station, and the amount of input and output data each has.  
For the PCIM, QBIM, and other GENI-based interfaces, the input and output data will occupy the  
Device Input and Output Tables at the segments associated with the serial bus address of the Bus  
Interface Unit.  
I/O Tables  
Input Table  
32 segments, 128 bytes each  
Output Table  
32 segments, 128 bytes each  
The Bus Interface Unit automatically sends all discrete inputs followed by all analog inputs from  
the station, each bus scan. The PCIM or QBIM places this data into its Input Segment. The  
application program must read the Input Segment to obtain the input data from the PCIM or QBIM.  
Input Table Segment for a  
Bus Interface Unit  
Discrete Inputs Bits  
(number of bytes = configured  
I length / 8)  
Analog Input Words  
(number of bytes = configured  
AI length X 2)  
The Output Segment is used similarly. The application program must send to the PCIM or QBIM's  
Output Segment all the discrete outputs followed by all the analog outputs for the station. The  
PCIM or QBIM will automatically direct the outputs to the Bus Interface Unit each bus scan.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 7 Monitoring and Controlling Field Control Data  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Datagrams  
Chapter  
8
This chapter lists datagrams that can be sent to a Bus Interface Unit, and shows the datagrams for  
Field Control modules that are different from the formats used by other modules.  
It also shows the format of configuration data for the Bus Interface Unit and the modules in the  
station.  
Datagram Types  
Read Map  
Read Map Reply  
Write Map  
Report Fault Datagram Format  
Configuration Data  
Set Bus Interface Unit Operating Mode  
Set Micro Field Processor Operating Mode  
16 Point Grouped Analog Module Recalibration Datagram  
For Additional Information, Also See:  
The bus controller User's Manual for the PLC or computer, which explains the specific  
programming used to send datagrams.  
The Genius I/O System and Communications Manual, which describes Genius datagrams and  
data formats.  
GFK-0825F  
8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Datagram Types  
The table below shows the primary datagrams that may be acted upon by the Bus Interface Unit.  
The table lists the types of device that can send each datagram, and the resulting action taken by the  
Bus Interface Unit.  
Datagram Type  
Subfunction  
Code  
Sent  
From  
Bus Interface Unit  
Action  
Read Identification  
Read Configuration  
Write Configuration  
00  
02  
04  
BC, HHM  
BC, HHM  
BC, HHM  
send Read ID Reply  
send Read Configuration Reply  
process (possibly send  
configuration changes)  
Assign Monitor  
05  
06  
07  
10  
13  
17  
1A  
1B  
BC  
process  
Begin Packet Sequence  
End Packet Sequence  
Pulse Test  
BC, HHM  
BC, HHM  
HHM  
start sequence  
end/check sequence  
send Pulse Test Complete  
process  
Clear All Faults  
BC, HHM  
BC, HHM  
BC, HHM  
BC, HHM  
Set Status Table Address  
Force BSM  
process  
process (send config. change)  
Unforce BSM  
process (send config. change  
when last point is unforced)  
Switch BSM  
1C  
21  
21  
2A  
2C  
39  
40  
42  
BC  
process  
Set MFP Operating Mode  
Recalibrate Analog Module  
Read Map  
BC  
BC  
BC, HHM  
BC, HHM  
BC  
send Read Map Reply  
process-autoconfigure  
process  
Write Map  
Set Operating Mode  
Read I/O Forces  
Read Slot Diagnostics  
BC  
send Read I/O Forces Reply  
BC  
send Read Slot Diagnostics  
Reply  
A PLC or computer can send a datagram to the Bus Interface Unit in the same manner as sending a  
datagram to an I/O block or Bus Controller.  
8-2  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8
Read Map  
Subfunction Code: 2A hex  
This datagram is used to read the reference addresses and lengths that have been configured for the  
BIU’s network I/O map.  
Data Field Format: none  
Read Map Reply  
Subfunction Code: 2B hex  
A Bus Interface Unit sends this reply datagram after receiving a Read Map datagram. It contains  
the previously-configured BIU network map addresses. The BIU’s network map defines the BIU  
memory locations of the data that is exchanged on the bus. It provides no information about the  
I/O assignments of individual I/O modules in the station. However, the checksums indicate that the  
overall configuration remains unchanged.  
Byte No.  
Byte Description  
0
1
Not used  
Starting reference for discrete input ( I ) data (LSB)  
Starting reference for discrete input ( I ) data (MSB)  
Length of discrete input ( I ) data (in bytes)  
Starting reference of analog input ( AI ) data  
Length of analog input ( AI ) data (in bytes)  
Starting reference of discrete output ( Q ) data  
Length of discrete output ( Q ) data (in bytes)  
Starting reference of analog output ( AQ ) data  
Length of analog output ( AQ ) data (in bytes)  
8-bit Additive Checksum Unused  
2
3
4, 5  
6
7, 8  
9
10,11  
12  
13  
14, 15  
16  
16-bit LRC Critical Checksum (lsb in 14, msb in 15) READ ONLY  
Field Control 8-bit Additive Checksum. Unused  
17, 18  
Field Control 16-bit CRC Non-Critical Checksum (lsb in 17, msb in 18) READ  
ONLY  
Starting references in I, AI, Q, and AQ memory are returned. For each memory type, a data length  
is also supplied. If a length is zero, the associated starting reference can be ignored; it is not  
meaningful.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 8 Datagrams  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8
Write Map  
Subfunction Code: 2C hex  
This datagram allows a CPU to change a previously-configured or unconfigured BIU network map  
addresses, if configuration is not currently protected. The BIU’s network map defines the BIU memory  
locations of the data that is exchanged on the bus. Starting references in I, AI, Q, and AQ memory are  
sent. If any length is zero, the associated starting reference is ignored; it is not meaningful.  
Byte No.  
Byte Description  
0
1
Not used  
Starting reference for discrete input ( I ) data (LSB)  
Starting reference for discrete input ( I ) data (MSB)  
Length of discrete input ( I ) data (in bytes)  
2
3
4, 5  
6
Starting reference of analog input ( AI ) data  
Length of analog input ( AI ) data (in bytes)  
7, 8  
9
Starting reference of discrete output ( Q ) data  
Length of discrete output ( Q ) data (in bytes)  
Starting reference of analog output ( AQ ) data  
Length of analog output ( AQ ) data (in bytes)  
Not used, but these bytes must be present for correct length message.  
10,11  
12  
13-15  
How a Write Map Datagram Affects I/O Modules in the Station  
Receiving a Write Map datagram with different starting addresses and/or lengths changes the  
memory assigned previously configured for the BIU's network map, as explained above. Because  
only data included within the map is exchanged on the bus, the BIU responds to such changes in its  
network map by automatically reassigning the I/O addresses of the modules in the station. This  
assures that the I/O data will continue to be exchanged on the bus. It is important that the lengths  
supplied in the Write Map datagram accommodate all of the data that should be exchanged. The  
data of any modules configured outside the BIU's network map will be scanned by the BIU, but not  
exchanged on the bus.  
For example, suppose an I/O station has three 16-point discrete input modules, originally  
configured to use addresses I0001 through I0048. All of this input data is included in the BIU's  
network map and is sent on the bus.  
Original Configuration: Starting reference: I00001, Length of I data: 6 bytes  
slot 1  
slot 2  
slot 3  
I00001  
I00009  
I00017  
I00025  
I00033  
I00041  
I00048  
Later, a Write Map datagram is sent to the BIU, specifying a beginning address of I0065 and a  
length of 5 bytes for I data. The BIU would automatically reassign starting addresses to the I/O  
modules starting at I00065. However, this would place 8 inputs (I00105 through I00112) outside  
the network map and the BIU would no longer send those inputs to the host.  
Write Map Datagram: Starting reference: I00065, Length of I data: 5 bytes  
slot 1  
slot 2  
slot 3  
I00065  
I00073  
I00081  
I00089  
I00097  
I00105  
I00112  
8-4  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8
Report Fault Datagram Format  
The format of Report Fault datagrams sent by a Bus Interface Unit is shown below. The Series  
90-70 Bus Controller interprets this information automatically; no datagram programming is  
required.  
If the host is a Series Six or Series Five PLC, this information is ignored. If the host is a computer,  
this information can be retrieved from the unsolicited datagram queue, and interpreted as needed  
for the application.  
Subfunction Code: 0F hex  
Byte #  
Description  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Fault Byte 1  
Fault Byte 2  
Fault byte 3  
Fault byte 4  
Fault byte 5  
Fault byte 6  
Fault byte 7  
Fault Byte 1  
byte 0  
7
6
5
4
3 2  
1 0  
Fault type, always: 0 0 1 1  
Type of module reporting fault:  
00 = discrete output  
01 = discrete input  
10 = analog output  
11 = analog input  
Suppress alarm (short fault only)  
Always 0  
Fault Byte 2  
byte 1  
7
6
5
4
3 2  
1 0  
Diagnostic table byte number (0 - 63) NOT USED  
This value points to an internal table where the  
Bus Interface Unit stores the English ASCII  
text used by the Hand-held Monitor to create  
its fault message displays.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 8 Datagrams  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8
Fault Byte 3  
byte 2  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Fault record number (always 0)  
Number of fault records (always 1)  
Fault Bytes 4 and 5  
Fault bytes 4 and 5 (bytes 3 and 4 of the datagram) identify the reference offset (within the Bus  
Interface Unit itself) assigned to the faulted module. This is an internal reference, not a Series 90-  
70 reference.  
byte 3  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
3 2  
1
1
0
0
Diagnostic reference address, LSB  
Diagnostic reference address, MSB  
byte 4  
3 2  
4
Fault Bytes 6 and 7  
Fault bytes 6 and 7 (datagram bytes 5 and 6) are interpreted by the Series 90-70 Bus Controller  
automatically. They are not relevant to other types of host.  
byte 5  
7
6
5
4
3 2  
1 0  
Number of Series 90-70 fault entries to set (bit 7 = 1)  
OR: Fault byte mask for S90-70 Bus Controller dual  
port (bit 7 = 0).  
Fault entire I/O module  
byte 6  
3 2  
7
6
5
4
1 0  
Entity offset into diagnostic table  
Fault entire Bus Interface Unit  
8-6  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Configuration Data  
For a Bus Interface Unit, the data format of configuration data transferred by Read Configuration  
BIU  
Reply and Write Configuration datagrams is slightly different than the format for other Genius  
devices. Instead of an offset, the data specifies the slot number of a specific device in the Field  
Control Station. The length specified must exactly match the length of the configuration data for  
0
1
the module (Bus Interface Unit or other module in the station); partial configuration data cannot be  
written. For programming instructions, you will need to refer to the  
Bus Controller User's Manual  
for the PLC. For the Series 90-70 PLC, COMREQ 15 must be used with a Read Configuration  
datagram.  
2
3
4
5
6
Configuration files for conventional Field Control modules can be read or written one module per  
message. However, the configuration files of intelligent modules may exceed the 128-byte  
maximum length of a Genius message. Therefore, any Write Configuration to an intelligent module  
must be contained within a Begin/End Packet Sequence.  
Read Configuration Data  
Subfunction Code: 02 hex  
The Read Configuration Datagram is used to read configuration data. The datagram format is  
different for conventional Field Control modules or intelligent modules.  
7
8
Read Configuration Data Format for Field Control Conventional Modules  
Byte #  
Description  
0
1
Slot number  
Length (will return minimum 6 bytes to maximum 128 bytes, or specific  
amount requested. It can be more or less than the configured size for  
the slot. If more data is requested than is available for a slot, the extra  
data bytes will contain zeros.)  
Read Configuration Datagram Format for Field Control Intelligent Modules  
Configuration data for the BIU and other intelligent modules is transmitted in packets. Depending  
on the module type, there can be many packets. Each packet can be up to 128 bytes long.  
Byte #  
Description  
Slot number in bottom nibble, Intelligent Packet in upper nibble.  
Examples:  
0
of intelligent module in slot 1  
01(hex) reads packet 0  
11(hex) reads packet 1 of intelligent module in slot 1.  
1
2
Length in bytes (maximum per packet is 128)  
(optional). If the slot number is 0 (the location of the BIU), and this byte  
is not included or if it is set to FF(hex), the BIU configuration is  
returned.  
If this byte is set to 01(hex) through 10(hex), the appropriate group  
information is returned.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 8 Datagrams  
8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8
Read Configuration Reply Data  
Subfunction Code: 03 hex  
This datagram is a reply to the Read Configuration datagram. The following pages show the  
formats of configuration data for Field Control devices.  
Byte #  
Description  
0
1
Slot (corresponds to slot supplied in Read Configuration message  
Length (depends on module type)  
2-N  
Data format shown on the following pages  
Write Configuration Data  
Subfunction Code: 04 hex  
The Write Configuration datagram is used to send configuration data. Content of the data is the  
same as the Read Configuration Reply. Do not send partial configuration data.  
Write Configuration Data Format for Field Control Conventional Modules  
Byte #  
Description  
0
1
Slot (Bus Interface Unit is 0)  
Length (must match the length for the specific device whose  
configuration will be written.)  
2-N  
Data format shown on the following pages  
Use the Begin and End Packet sequence messages to ensure that a sequence of Write Configuration  
messages is treated as a single entity. Each packet should be in slot order. Multiple packets for a  
slot must also be in order. Multiple packets must be 128 bytes in length except the last which may  
be shorter.  
Example:  
Begin Packet Sequence  
Write Configuration 1  
Write Configuration 2  
Write Configuration N  
End Packet Sequence  
(subfunction code 06 hex)  
(subfunction code 04 hex)  
(subfunction code 07 hex). This contains the total number  
of BYTES in all Write Configuration packets. For Field  
Control (only) the End Packet Sequence has 2 bytes. Byte  
0 is the least significant byte of the data length and byte 1  
is the most significant.  
8-8  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8
Write Configuration Datagram Format for Field Control Intelligent Modules  
When using the Write Configuration datagram to configure Group Moves, the datagram format is:  
Byte #  
Description  
0
Slot number in bottom nibble, Intelligent Packet in upper nibble.  
Examples:  
to intelligent module in slot 1  
01(hex) writes packet 0  
11(hex) writes packet 1 to intelligent module in slot 1.  
1
2
Length sent, in bytes (maximum per packet is 128)  
(optional). If the slot number is 0 (the location of the BIU), and this byte  
is not included or if it is set to FF(hex), the BIU configuration is written.  
If this byte is set to 01(hex) through 10(hex), the appropriate group  
information is written.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 8 Datagrams  
8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Bus Interface Unit Configuration Data Format  
For the Bus Interface Unit, the slot number is 0. The length varies.  
Bytes 0 to 11 must be: FF hex, 0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte 12  
BSM State (read only)  
BSM Present (1 = yes, 0 = no)  
BSM Controller (1 = yes, 0 = no)  
BSM Forced (1 = yes, 0 = no)  
CPU Redundancy ( 00 = no redundancy  
01 = Hot standby  
10 = Duplex  
11 = reserved )  
Duplex Default  
Configuration Protection (read only)  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte 13  
Serial Bus Address (read only)  
Baud Rate Code (read only)  
0 = 153.6Kb ext  
1 = 153.6 Kb std  
2 = 76.8 Kb  
3 = 38.4 Kb  
Fault Reporting Disabled (0 = yes, 1 = no)  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
Byte 14  
Byte 15  
unlabelled bits not used  
BSM Switch Time (0 = 2.5 sec, 1 = 10 sec  
reserved  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
Byte 16  
Byte 17  
LSB  
Series Six/Series Five Reference Address  
(Read Only)  
MSB  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte 18  
Byte 19  
Configuration Length (always 0)  
(# bytes in Write Configuration Sequence)  
7
7
7
6
6
6
5
5
5
4
4
4
3
3
3
2
2
2
1
1
1
0
0
0
Diagnostic Length (# bytes) read only  
(always 5)  
Bytes  
20 to 26  
reserved  
Byte 27  
Sync Module Present (slot 1=bit 0, slot 8=bit 7).  
Set a bit to 1 to indicate that the Sync Module  
(Micro Field Processor) is in this slot. Only 1 bit  
may be set.  
8-10  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8
Discrete Input Modules Configuration Data Format  
Specify the actual slot number and a length of 13.  
The reference address is the location in the BIU's I, Q, AI, or AQ memory that is used by the  
module's data. Specify only one address, typically in the discrete input (I) table. Set the other  
address selection bytes to all zeros.  
Bytes 0 to 3 must be: 45 hex, 0,0,0  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
Byte 4  
Byte 5  
LSB  
I Reference Address or all zeros  
Q Reference Address or all zeros  
MSB  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
Byte 6  
Byte 7  
LSB  
MSB  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
LSB  
Byte 8  
Byte 9  
AI Reference Address or all zeros  
MSB  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
LSB  
Byte 10  
Byte 11  
AQ Reference Address or all zeros  
unlabelled bits not used  
MSB  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte 12  
Input Default or Hold Last State  
(0 = default, 1 = hold last state)  
Fault Reporting (0 = enabled, 1 = disabled)  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 8 Datagrams  
8-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8
Discrete Output Modules Configuration Data Format  
Specify the actual slot number and a length of 30.  
The reference address is the location in the BIU's I, Q, AI, or AQ memory that is used by the  
module's data. Specify only one address, typically in the discrete output (Q) table. Set the other  
address selection bytes to all zeros.  
Bytes 0 to 3 must be: 51 hex, 0,0,0 for all modules except IC670MDL730  
Bytes 0 to 3 must be 20 hex, 0, 0, 0 for Electronic Short Circuit Protection Output Module,  
IC670MDL730  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
Byte 4  
Byte 5  
LSB  
I Reference Address or all zeros  
Q Reference Address or all zeros  
AI Reference Address or all zeros  
MSB  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
Byte 6  
Byte 7  
LSB  
MSB  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
LSB  
Byte 8  
Byte 9  
MSB  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
LSB  
Byte 10  
Byte 11  
AQ Reference Address or all zeros  
unlabelled bits must be 0  
MSB  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte  
12  
Output Default or Hold Last State  
(0 = default, 1 = hold last state)  
Fault Reporting (0 = enabled, 1 = disabled)  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte 13  
reserved (must be 0)  
Bytes 14 to 29: Circuit Configuration. For each circuit, content is:  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
unlabelled bits must be 0  
Output Default State  
(0 = off, 1 = on)  
(Byte #)  
Byte Description  
(Byte #)  
22  
Byte Description  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
Circuit 1 Configuration  
Circuit 2 Configuration  
Circuit 3 Configuration  
Circuit 4 Configuration  
Circuit 5 Configuration  
Circuit 6 Configuration  
Circuit 7 Configuration  
Circuit 8 Configuration  
Circuit 9 Configuration  
Circuit 10 Configuration  
Circuit 11 Configuration  
Circuit 12 Configuration  
Circuit 13 Configuration  
Circuit 14 Configuration  
Circuit 15 Configuration  
Circuit 16 Configuration  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
29  
29  
8-12  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8
Discrete Combination Input/Output Modules Configuration Data Format  
Specify the actual slot number and a length of 20.  
Entering the Reference Addresses  
The reference addresses are the locations in the BIU's I, Q, AI, or AQ memory used by the module's  
data. In this module configuration only, the input reference is the first non-zero entry WITHOUT the  
corresponding bit set in byte 12 (see below) The output reference is the first non-zero entry WITH  
the corresponding bit set. In byte 12, bits 4, 5, 6, and 7 define the input reference. For example, if bit  
6 of byte 12 is set to 1 and a reference is specified in bytes 8 and 9, inputs for the module will be  
mapped to the AI table. Note that the entries must correspond properly, or the BIU will reject the  
module configuration. In a normal configuration for a combination discrete module, inputs go to the I  
table and outputs go to the Q table. In that case, you enter the input reference in bytes 4/5 and the  
output reference in bytes 6/7, and set bit 4 of byte 12 to 1. All other reference address bytes and other  
input reference bits (in byte 12) must be set to zero.  
Bytes 0 to 3 must be: 21 hex, 0,0,0  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
Byte 4  
Byte 5  
LSB  
I Reference Address or all zeros  
Q Reference Address or all zeros  
AI Reference Address or all zeros  
AQ Reference Address or all zeros  
MSB  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
Byte 6  
Byte 7  
LSB  
MSB  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
Byte 8  
Byte 9  
LSB  
MSB  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
Byte 10  
Byte 11  
LSB  
MSB  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
unlabelled bit must be 0  
Byte 12  
Input Default or Hold Last State  
(0 = default, 1 = hold last state)  
Fault Reporting (0 = enabled, 1 = disabled)  
Output Default or Hold Last State  
Input Reference is I table  
Input Reference is Q Table  
Input Reference is AI Table  
Input Reference is AQ Table  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1 0  
Byte 13  
reserved (must be 0)  
Bytes 14 to 19: Output Circuit Configuration. For each output, content is:  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
unlabelled bits must be 0  
Output Default State  
(0 = off, 1 = on)  
(Byte #)  
14  
Byte Description  
Output 1 Configuration  
Output 2 Configuration  
Output 3 Configuration  
Output 4 Configuration  
Output 5 Configuration  
Output 6 Configuration  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 8 Datagrams  
8-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8
Conventional Analog Input Modules Configuration Data Format  
Specify the actual slot number and a length of 126.  
The reference address is the location in the BIU's I, Q, AI, or AQ memory that is used by the  
module's data. Specify only one address, typically in the analog input (AI) table. Set the other  
address selection bytes to all zeros.  
For current module, bytes 0 to 3 must be: 32 hex, 0,0,0  
For voltage module, bytes 0 to 3 must be: 34 hex, 0,0,0  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
Byte 4  
Byte 5  
LSB  
I Reference Address or all zeros  
Q Reference Address or all zeros  
AI Reference Address or all zeros  
AQ Reference Address or all zeros  
unlabelled bits must be 0  
MSB  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
LSB  
Byte 6  
Byte 7  
MSB  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
Byte 8  
Byte 9  
LSB  
MSB  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
Byte 10  
Byte 11  
LSB  
MSB  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte 12  
Input Default or Hold Last Value  
(0 = default, 1 = hold last value)  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte 13  
reserved  
Bytes 14, 28, 42, 56, 70, 84, 98, 112 (see below)  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
unlabelled bits must be 0  
Fault Reporting (0 = enabled, 1 = disabled)  
Channel Active (0 = active, 1 = inactive)  
Range: 00 = 0mA to 20mA  
01 = 4mA to 20mA  
10 = 0V to 10V  
11 = -10V to +10V  
8-14  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8
Bytes 14 - 125: Channel Configuration  
(Byte #)  
14  
Byte Description  
Input 1: circuit configuration (see above)  
reserved  
(Byte #)  
70  
Byte Description  
Input 5: circuit configuration (see above)  
reserved  
15  
71  
16, 17 low scaling point, eng. units (lsb in byte 16)  
72, 73 low scaling point, eng. units (lsb in byte 72)  
18, 19 high scaling point, eng. units  
(lsb in byte 18)  
74, 75 high scaling point, eng. units  
(lsb in byte 74)  
low scaling point, digital counts  
(lsb in byte 20)  
low scaling point, digital counts  
(lsb in byte 76)  
20, 21  
76, 77  
22, 23 high scaling point, digital counts  
(lsb in byte 22)  
78, 79 high scaling point, digital counts  
(lsb in byte 78)  
24, 25 low alarm limit (lsb in byte 24)  
26, 27 high alarm limit (lsb in byte 26)  
80, 81 low alarm limit (lsb in byte 80)  
82, 83 high alarm limit (lsb in byte 82)  
28  
29  
Input 2: circuit configuration (see above)  
84  
85  
Input 6: circuit configuration (see above)  
reserved  
reserved  
30, 31 low scaling point, eng. units (lsb in byte 30)  
86, 87 low scaling point, eng. units (lsb in byte 86)  
32, 33 high scaling point, eng. units  
(lsb in byte 32)  
88, 89 high scaling point, eng. units  
(lsb in byte 88)  
34. 35 low scaling point, digital counts  
(lsb in byte 34)  
90, 91 low scaling point, digital counts  
(lsb in byte 90)  
36, 37 high scaling point, digital counts  
(lsb in byte 36)  
92, 93 high scaling point, digital counts  
(lsb in byte 92)  
38, 39 low alarm limit (lsb in byte 38)  
40, 41 high alarm limit (lsb in byte 40)  
94, 95 low alarm limit (lsb in byte 94)  
96, 97 high alarm limit (lsb in byte 95)  
42  
43  
Input 3: circuit configuration (see above)  
98  
99  
Input 7: circuit configuration (see above)  
reserved  
reserved  
44, 45 low scaling point, eng. units (lsb in byte 44)  
100, 101 low scaling point, eng. units  
(lsb in byte 100)  
46, 47 high scaling point, eng. units (lsb in byte 46)  
102, 103 high scaling point, eng. units  
(lsb in byte 102)  
48, 49 low scaling point, digital counts  
(lsb in byte 48)  
104, 105 low scaling point, digital counts  
(lsb in byte 104)  
50, 51 high scaling point, digital counts  
(lsb in byte 50)  
106, 107 high scaling point, digital counts  
(lsb in byte 106)  
52, 53 low alarm limit (lsb in byte 52)  
54. 55 high alarm limit (lsb in byte 54)  
108, 109 low alarm limit (lsb in byte 108)  
110, 111 high alarm limit (lsb in byte 110)  
56  
57  
Input 4: circuit configuration (see above)  
112  
113  
Input 8: circuit configuration (see above)  
reserved  
reserved  
58, 59 low scaling point, eng. units (lsb in byte 58)  
114, 115 low scaling point, eng. units  
(lsb in byte 114)  
60, 61 high scaling point, eng. units  
(lsb in byte 60)  
116, 117 high scaling point, eng. units  
(lsb in byte 116)  
62, 63 low scaling point, digital counts  
(lsb in byte 62)  
118, 119 low scaling point, digital counts  
(lsb in byte 118)  
64, 65 high scaling point, digital counts (lsb in byte 64)  
66, 67 low alarm limit (lsb in byte 66)  
120, 121 high scaling point, digital counts (lsb in byte 120)  
122, 123 low alarm limit (lsb in byte 122)  
68, 69 high alarm limit (lsb in byte 68)  
124, 125 high alarm limit (lsb in byte 124)  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 8 Datagrams  
8-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Conventional Analog Output Modules Configuration Data Format  
Specify the actual slot number and a length of 62.  
The reference address is the location in the BIU's I, Q, AI, or AQ memory that is used by the  
module's data. Specify only one address, typically in the analog output (AQ) table. Set the other  
address selection bytes to all zeros.  
Bytes 0 to 3 must be: 33 hex, 0,0,0  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
LSB  
Byte 4  
Byte 5  
I Reference Address or all zeros  
Q Reference Address or all zeros  
AI Reference Address or all zeros  
MSB  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
Byte 6  
Byte 7  
LSB  
MSB  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
LSB  
Byte 8  
Byte 9  
MSB  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
Byte 10  
Byte 11  
LSB  
AQ Reference Address or all zeros  
unlabelled bits must be 0  
MSB  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte 12  
Output Default or Hold Last Value  
(0 = default, 1 = hold last value)  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
0
0
Byte 13  
reserved (must be 0)  
Bytes 14, 26, 38, 50 (see below)  
7
6
5
4
3
2
unlabelled bits must be 0  
Fault Reporting (0 = enabled, 1 = disabled)  
Channel Active (0 = active, 1 = inactive)  
Range: 00 = 0mA to 20mA  
01 = 4mA to 20mA  
10 = 0V to 10V  
11 = -10V to +10V  
8-16  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8
Bytes 14 - 61: Channel Configuration  
(Byte #)  
14  
Byte Description  
Input 1: circuit configuration (see above)  
reserved  
(Byte #)  
38  
Byte Description  
Input 3: circuit configuration (see above)  
reserved  
15  
39  
16, 17 low scaling point, eng. units  
(lsb in byte 16)  
40, 41 low scaling point, eng. units (lsb in byte 40)  
18, 19 high scaling point, eng. units  
(lsb in byte 18)  
42, 43 high scaling point, eng. units  
(lsb in byte 42)  
20, 21 low scaling point, digital counts  
(lsb in byte 20)  
44, 45 low scaling point, digital counts  
(lsb in byte 44)  
22, 23 high scaling point, digital counts  
(lsb in byte 22)  
46, 47 high scaling point, digital counts  
(lsb in byte 46)  
24, 25 output default value (lsb in byte 24)  
48, 49 output default value (lsb in byte 48)  
26  
27  
Input 2: circuit configuration (see above)  
50  
51  
Input 4: circuit configuration (see above)  
reserved  
reserved  
28, 29 low scaling point, eng. units  
(lsb in byte 28)  
52, 53 low scaling point, eng. units (lsb in byte 52)  
30, 31 high scaling point, eng. units  
(lsb in byte 30)  
54, 55 high scaling point, eng. units  
(lsb in byte 54)  
32, 33  
56, 57  
low scaling point, digital counts  
(lsb in byte 32)  
low scaling point, digital counts  
(lsb in byte 56)  
34, 35 high scaling point, digital counts  
(lsb in byte 34)  
58, 59 high scaling point, digital counts  
(lsb in byte 58)  
36, 37 output default value (lsb in byte 36)  
60, 61 output default value (lsb in byte 60)  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 8 Datagrams  
8-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Intelligent Modules Configuration Data Format  
Configuration files of intelligent modules may exceed the 128-byte maximum length of a Genius  
message. Therefore, any Write Configuration to an intelligent module must be contained within a  
Begin/End Packet Sequence. The BIU rejects any Write Configuration message for an intelligent  
module that does not follow a Begin Packet message.  
Write Configuration for an intelligent module may be packetized by using the upper nibble of the  
slot byte to indicate a packet number. Data for packets greater than zero is assumed to have an  
offset with a slot configuration of (packet_number*128). Therefore, all packets except the last must  
have 128 bytes.  
Note that all reserved or unused bits must be 0.  
Configuration Data for Intelligent Modules, Bytes 0 to 13  
The first 13 bytes of configuration data for intelligent modules have the content shown below. Each  
intelligent module has additional configuration data listed on the following pages.  
Byte  
Meaning  
Intelligent Analog Modules (IC670)  
Micro Field  
Processor  
ALG240 ALG281 ALG282 ALG310 ALG330 ALG620  
ALG630  
(IC670MFP100)  
0
1
intelligent module board ID  
reserved must be 0  
1Fh  
0
2
3
unique module identifier  
reserved must be 0  
1
8
3
7
3
6
3
5
2
3
3
3
4
3
0
4
reference types word  
3
3
(bit 0 = 1 means inputs available,  
bit 1 = 1 means outputs available,  
both = 1 means inputs and outputs  
available)  
(bits 0  
and 1  
both set  
to 1)  
5
reserved must be 0  
0
6, 7  
length of module’s configuration file  
in bytes  
248  
136  
248  
106  
106  
84  
174  
30  
8, 9  
reserved must be 0  
0
0
10, 11 reserved must be 0  
12  
input/output hold last state/default to 0. Bits are shown below. For each, 0=default, 1-hold last state.  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
BSM State (read only)  
BSM Present (1 = yes, 0 = no)  
BSM Controller (1 = yes, 0 = no)  
BSM Forced (1 = yes, 0 = no)  
CPU Redundancy ( 00 = no redundancy  
01 = Hot standby  
10 = Duplex  
11 = reserved )  
Duplex Default  
Configuration Protection (read only)  
13  
reserved must be 0  
0
14-n  
additional module data  
8-18  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Additional Configuration Data for a 16 Point Grouped Analog Input Module (ALG240)  
The content of configuration data bytes 14 to 261 for a 16 Point Grouped Analog Input module  
(IC670ALG240) is listed below.  
See the previous page for the content of bytes 0 to 13.  
Byte  
14  
Description  
Byte  
40, 41  
42, 43  
44, 45  
Description  
Number of input reference parameters (2)  
Number of output reference parameters (1)  
Byte length of analog input data (default is 32)  
Ch1 Low Span (0 to 25000)  
Ch1 High Span (0 to 25000)  
15  
16, 17  
Ch 1 Low Eng. Units (-32768 to  
+32767)  
18, 19  
Memory type for the module's analog input  
data, usually type AI. Enter one of the  
following numbers:  
46, 47  
Ch 1 High Eng. Units (-32768 to  
+32767)  
16 = I table  
18 = Q table  
10 = AI table  
12 = AQ table  
20, 21  
22, 23  
Relative offset from start of table  
48, 49  
50, 51  
Ch1 Low Alarm  
Ch1 High Alarm  
Byte length of discrete diagnostic input data  
(default is 11)  
24, 25  
Memory type for the module's diagnostic input  
bits, usually type I. Enter one of the numbers  
listed above.  
52-65  
Ch 2 parameters  
26, 27  
28, 29  
30, 31  
Relative offset from start of table  
66-79  
80-93  
Ch 3 parameters  
Ch 4 parameters  
Ch 5 parameters  
Byte length of module's control output bits  
Memory type for the module's control output  
bits, usually type Q. Enter one of the numbers  
listed above.  
94-107  
32, 33  
Relative offset from start of table  
108-121  
122-135  
136-149  
Ch 6 parameters  
Ch 7 parameters  
Ch 8 parameters  
34 (bit 4)  
Line Frequency (0 = 50HZ, 1 = 60HZ)  
34 (bits 0,1) Filtering Method (0 = None, 1 = 8 average, 2 =  
16 average)  
35  
reserved  
150-163  
164-177  
178-191  
192-205  
206-219  
220-233  
234-247  
248-261  
Ch 9 parameters  
Ch 10 parameters  
Ch 11 parameters  
Ch 12 parameters  
Ch 13 parameters  
Ch 14 parameters  
Ch 15 parameters  
Ch 16 parameters  
36, 37  
38, 39  
Active Channel Bit Map 1 bit per channel  
Ch1 Range:  
0 no preselected range  
1 span 4000 to 20000, units 4,000 to 20,000  
2 span 4000 to 20000, units 0 to 32000  
3 span 0 to 20000, units 0 to 32000  
4 span 0 to 24000, units 0 to 32000  
Read-only when sending a configuration file.  
The module sets the range based on the  
scaling parameters. When the configuration is  
read back, it indicates the correct range.  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 8 Datagrams  
8-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Additional Configuration Data for an 8 Point Grouped Analog Voltage Input Module  
(ALG281)  
The content of configuration data bytes 14 to 149 for an 8 Point Grouped Analog Voltage Input  
module (IC670ALG281) is listed below.  
See page 8-18 for the content of bytes 0 to 13. PLEASE CHECK; I THINK THE OCMT  
WRITEUP FOR 22,23, 28,29 WAS WRONG; I MADE THEM MATCH OTHER MODULES.  
Byte  
Description  
Byte  
Description  
14  
Number of input reference parameters  
(2)  
40, 41  
Ch1 Low Span (-10000 to +10000)  
15  
Number of output reference parameters  
(1)  
Byte length of analog input data (default  
is 16)  
Memory type for the module's analog  
input data, usually type AI. Enter one of  
the following numbers:  
16 = I table  
42, 43  
44, 45  
46, 47  
Ch1 High Span (-10000 to +10000)  
16, 17  
18, 19  
Ch 1 Low Eng. Units (-32768 to +32767)  
Ch 1 High Eng. Units (-32768 to +32767)  
18 = Q table  
10 = AI table  
12 = AQ table  
20, 21  
22, 23  
Relative offset from start of table  
Byte length of discrete diagnostic input  
data (default is 5)  
48, 49  
50, 51  
Ch1 Low Alarm  
Ch1 High Alarm  
24, 25  
Memory type for the module's diagnostic  
input bits, usually type I. Enter one of the  
numbers listed above.  
52-65  
Ch 2 parameters  
26, 27  
28, 29  
Relative offset from start of table  
Byte length of module's control output  
bits (default is 1)  
66-79  
80-93  
Ch 3 parameters  
Ch 4 parameters  
30, 31  
Memory type for the module's control  
output bits, usually type Q. Enter one of  
the numbers listed above.  
94-107  
Ch 5 parameters  
32, 33  
34 (bit 4)  
34 (bits  
0,1)  
Relative offset from start of table  
Line Frequency (0 = 50Hz, 1 = 60Hz)  
Filtering Method (0 = None, 1 = 10mS,  
2 = 20mS)  
108-121  
122-135  
136-149  
Ch 6 parameters  
Ch 7 parameters  
Ch 8 parameters  
35  
reserved  
36, 37  
38, 39  
Active Channel Bit Map 1 bit per channel  
Ch1 Range:  
1 span -10000mV to +10000mV  
2 span 0mV to +10000mV  
8-20  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Additional Configuration Data for a 16 Point Grouped Analog Voltage Input Module  
(ALG282)  
The content of configuration data bytes 14 to 261 for a 16 Point Grouped Analog Voltage Input  
module (IC670ALG282) is listed below.  
See page 8-18 for the content of bytes 0 to 13. PLEASE CHECK; I THINK THE OCMT  
WRITEUP FOR 22,23, 28,29 WAS WRONG; I MADE THEM MATCH OTHER MODULES.  
Byte  
Description  
Byte  
Description  
14  
Number of input reference parameters  
(2)  
40, 41  
Ch1 Low Span (-10000 to +10000)  
15  
Number of output reference parameters  
(1)  
Byte length of analog input data (default  
is 32)  
Memory type for the module's analog  
input data, usually type AI. Enter one of  
the following numbers:  
16 = I table  
42, 43  
44, 45  
46, 47  
Ch1 High Span (-10000 to +10000)  
16, 17  
18, 19  
Ch 1 Low Eng. Units (-32768 to  
+32767)  
Ch 1 High Eng. Units (-32768 to  
+32767)  
18 = Q table  
10 = AI table  
12 = AQ table  
20, 21  
22, 23  
Relative offset from start of table  
Byte length of discrete diagnostic input  
data (default is 9)  
48, 49  
50, 51  
Ch1 Low Alarm  
Ch1 High Alarm  
24, 25  
Memory type for the module's  
52-65  
Ch 2 parameters  
diagnostic input bits, usually type I.  
Enter one of the numbers listed above.  
26, 27  
28, 29  
Relative offset from start of table  
Byte length of module's control output  
bits (default is 2)  
66-79  
80-93  
Ch 3 parameters  
Ch 4 parameters  
30, 31  
Memory type for the module's control  
output bits, usually type Q. Enter one of  
the numbers listed above.  
94-107  
Ch 5 parameters  
32, 33  
34 (bit 4)  
34 (bits 0,1)  
Relative offset from start of table  
Line Frequency (0 = 50Hz, 1 = 60Hz)  
Filtering Method (0 = None, 1 = 10mS, 2  
= 20mS)  
108-121  
122-135  
136-149  
Ch 6 parameters  
Ch 7 parameters  
Ch 8 parameters  
35  
36, 37  
reserved  
Active Channel Bit Map 1 bit per  
channel  
150-163  
164-177  
Ch 9 parameters  
Ch 10 parameters  
38, 39  
Ch1 Range:  
1 span -10000mV to +10000mV  
2 span 0mV to +10000mV  
178-191  
192-205  
206-219  
220-233  
234-247  
248-261  
Ch 11 parameters  
Ch 12 parameters  
Ch 13 parameters  
Ch 14 parameters  
Ch 15 parameters  
Ch 16 parameters  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 8 Datagrams  
8-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Additional Configuration Data for an RTD Input Module  
The content of configuration data bytes 14 to 97 for an RTD Input module (IC670ALG620) is  
listed below.  
Byte  
14  
Description  
Byte  
Description  
Number of input reference parameters (2)  
Number of output reference parameters (2)  
46, 47  
RTD type for input 1:  
0 = 10 Ohm, Pt L&N  
15  
1 = 25 Ohm, Pt IPTS-68  
2 = 25.5 Ohm, Pt @ 0 deg. C Lab Std, alpha = .00392  
3 = 100 Ohm. Pt, DIN43760, alpha=.00385  
4 = 100 Ohm Pt, Burns-Special, alpha=.003902  
5 = 100 Ohm Pt, IPTS-68, alpha=.00392  
6 = 98.13 Ohm Pt, SAMA-RC21-4, alpha=.003923  
7 = 100 Ohm Pt, JISC-1604-'81, alpha=.003916  
8 = 1K Ohm Pt, alpha=.00375  
16, 17 Byte length of analog input data (0 - 8)  
18, 19 Memory type for the module's analog input data,  
usually type AI. Enter one of the following numbers:  
18 = Q table  
10 = AI table  
12 = AQ table  
9 = 10 Ohm Cu @ 25 deg. C IPTS-68  
10 = 9.035 Ohm, Cu @25 deg. C, alpha=.00427  
11 = 50 Ohm, Cu, alpha=.00427  
20, 21 Relative offset from start of table  
22, 23 Byte length of discrete diagnostic input data (0 - 4)  
12 = 100 Ohm Cu, alpha=.00427  
24, 25 Memory type for the module's diagnostic input bits,  
usually type I. Enter one of the numbers listed above.  
13 = 100 Ohm Ni IPTS-68  
14 = 100 Ohm Ni @ 0 deg C DIN43760, alpha=.00618  
15 = 120 Ohm Ni @ 0 deg. C, alpha=.00672  
16 = 604 Ohm Ni/Fe @ 0 deg. F, alpha=.00518  
17 = 1K Ohm, Ni/Fe @ 70 deg. F, alpha=.00527  
18 = 500 Ohm span, requires conversion type O  
19 = 3000 Ohm span, requires conversion type O  
20 = none  
26, 27 Relative offset from start of table  
28, 29 Byte length of control output bits (0 or 1)  
30, 31 Memory type for the module's control output bits,  
usually type Q. Enter one of the numbers listed  
above.  
32, 33 Relative offset from start of table  
34, 35 Byte length of analog output data (should be set to 0)  
48, 49  
50, 51  
Wire type for input 1 (0 = 3 wire, 1 = 4 wire)  
Low Alarm for input 1 (-32767 to +32767)  
36, 37 Memory type for the module's analog output bits. Not  
used.  
38, 39 Relative offset from start of table  
52, 53  
54, 55  
56-69  
High Alarm for input 1 (-32767 to +32767)  
Offset for input 1 (0 to 3276.7)  
Ch 2 parameters  
40, 41 Line Frequency (0 = 50Hz, 1 = 60 Hz)  
42, 43 Channel Active flag for input 1 (0 = inactive, 1 =  
active)  
44, 45 Conversion type for input 1 ( 0 = 1/10 ohms, 1 =  
linearized temperature in 1/10 degrees C, 2 =  
linearized temperature in 1/10 degrees F, 3 = percent  
of span)  
70-83  
84-97  
Ch 3 parameters  
Ch 4 parameters  
8-22  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Additional Configuration Data for a Thermocouple Input Module  
The content of configuration data bytes 14 to 187 for a Thermocouple module (IC670ALG630) is  
listed below.  
Byte  
14  
Description  
Byte  
Description  
Number of input reference parameters (2)  
Number of output reference parameters (2)  
Byte length of analog input data  
48, 49  
Thermocouple type for input 1 (only used for  
conversion types 1 & 2 (see bytes 46, 47)  
15  
0 = none  
1 = J  
2 = K  
3 = T  
4= E  
8 = N  
9 = G  
10 = C  
11 = D  
12 = Platinel II  
13 = non-standard TC 1  
14 = non-standard TC 2  
16, 17  
18, 19  
Memory type for the module's analog input data,  
usually type AI. Enter one of the following  
numbers: 16 = I table  
5 = S  
6 = R  
18 = Q table  
10 = AI table  
12 = AQ table  
20, 21  
22, 23  
Relative offset from start of table  
50, 51  
52, 53  
Range type for input 1. This is used ONLY If range  
type (see bytes 48, 49) is set to 0.  
Byte length of discrete diagnostic input data  
0 = unused  
1 = 19.5 mV  
2 = 39 mV  
3 = 78 mV  
4 = 156 mV  
5 = 312.5 mV  
6 = 625 mV  
24, 25  
Memory type for the module's diagnostic input bits,  
usually type I. Enter one of the numbers listed  
above.  
26, 27  
28, 29  
Relative offset from start of table  
Remote Junction Compensation for input 1 :  
0 = none  
Byte length of discrete control output data  
1 = use local thermistor  
2 = use a value supplied in the module's  
analog output (AQ) data  
3 = use the configured value ( bytes 58, 59)  
30, 31  
Memory type for the module's control output bits,  
usually type Q. Enter one of the numbers listed  
above.  
32, 33  
34, 35  
Relative offset from start of table  
54, 55  
56, 57  
Low Alarm for input 1 (-32767 to +32767)  
High Alarm for input 1 (-32767 to +32767)  
Byte length of analog output data (for cold junction  
compensation), usually type AQ  
36, 37  
Memory type for the module's analog output data  
(used for remote junction compensation). Usually  
type AQ. Enter one of the numbers listed above.  
58, 59  
Remote Junction value for input 1. Used only if  
Remote Junction Compensation (bytes 52, 53) is  
3. The module multiplies this value by 100 then  
adds it to the input voltage before performing  
linearization. (-327.67 to +327.67).  
38, 39  
Relative offset from start of table  
40, 41  
42, 43  
Line Frequency (0 = 50 Hz, 1 = 60 Hz)  
60, 61  
Offset for input 1. Used if conversion type (bytes  
46, 47) is degrees C or F. This value should be in  
the same units. The module multiplies the value by  
100 before using it. Range is -100.00 to +100.00  
degrees.  
Open circuit checking suppression for input 1 (0 =  
perform check, 1 = suppress check)  
Channel active for input 1 ( 0 = inactive, 1 = active)  
44, 45  
46, 47  
62 - 79  
80 - 97  
98-115  
116-133  
134-151  
Ch 2 parameters  
Ch 3 parameters  
Ch 4 parameters  
Ch 5 parameters  
Ch 6 parameters  
Conversion type for input 1:  
0 = 1/100 millivolts  
1 = linearized temperature in 1/10 degrees C  
2 = linearized temperature in 1/10 degrees F  
3 = percent of span (fractional format)  
152- 169 Ch 7 parameters  
170- 187 Ch 8 parameters  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 8 Datagrams  
8-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Additional Configuration Data for a Current Source Analog Output Module  
The content of configuration data bytes 14 to 119 for a Current Source Analog Output module  
(IC670ALG330) is listed below.  
Byte  
14  
Description  
Byte  
Description  
Number of input reference parameters (1)  
Number of output reference parameters (2)  
40, 41  
Ch1 Range:  
0 no preselected range  
15  
1 span 4000 to 20000, units 4,000 to 20,000  
2 span 4000 to 20000, units 0 to 32000  
3 span 0 to 20000, units 0 to 32000  
If the range is not 0, the span and engineering  
units (entered in the following eight bytes) must  
match the selected range. If they do not, the  
module will reject the configuration.  
If the range is 0, the span and engineering units  
are not used and the next eight bytes are not  
checked.  
16, 17  
Byte length of diagnostic discrete input data  
(0 - 4)  
18, 19  
Memory type for the module's diagnostic input  
bits, usually type I. Enter one of the following  
numbers:  
16 = I table  
18 = Q table  
10 = AI table  
12 = AQ table  
42, 43  
44, 45  
46, 47  
Ch 1 Low Eng. Units (-32768 to +32767)  
Ch 1 High Eng. Units (-32768 to +32767)  
Ch1 Low Span (0 to 20000, <=high)  
20, 21  
22, 23  
Relative offset from start of table  
Byte length of the module's analog output data  
(0 - 16)  
24, 25  
Memory type for the module's analog output  
data, usually type AQ. Enter one of the numbers  
listed above.  
48, 49  
Ch1 High Span (0 to 20000, >=low)  
26, 27  
28, 29  
Relative offset from start of table  
50 - 59  
60 - 69  
Ch 2 parameters  
Ch 3 parameters  
Byte length of module's control output bits (0 -  
2)  
30, 31  
Memory type for the module's control output  
bits, usually type Q. Enter one of the numbers  
listed above.  
70 - 79  
Ch 4 parameters  
32, 33  
34, 35  
36, 37  
Relative offset from start of table.  
80 - 89  
90 - 99  
Ch 5 parameters  
Ch 6 parameters  
Local Default Output (0 = off, 1 = hold)  
BIU command timeout in milliseconds  
(500 to 65535)  
100 - 109 Ch 7 parameters  
38, 39  
Active Channels. One bit per channel. For each  
channel, 0 = inactive, 1 = active)  
Default is 0xFF, all active).  
110 - 119 Ch 8 parameters  
8-24  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Additional Configuration Data for an Analog Voltage Output Module  
The content of configuration data bytes 14 to 119 for an Analog Voltage Output module  
(IC670ALG310) is listed below.  
Byte  
14  
Description  
Byte  
Description  
Number of input reference parameters (1)  
Number of output reference parameters (2)  
40, 41  
Ch1 Range:  
0 span -10,000 to +10,000,  
units -10,000 to +10,000  
1 span 0 to +10,000,  
units 0 to +10,000  
15  
16, 17  
Byte length of diagnostic discrete input data  
(0 - 3)  
18, 19  
Memory type for the module's diagnostic input  
bits, usually type I. Enter one of the following  
numbers: 16 = I table  
42, 43  
Ch 1 Low Eng. Units (-32768 to +32767)  
18 = Q table  
10 = AI table  
12 = AQ table  
20, 21  
22, 23  
Relative offset from start of table  
44, 45  
46, 47  
Ch 1 High Eng. Units (-32768 to +32767)  
Byte length of the module's analog output data  
(0 - 16)  
Ch1 Low Span (-10,000 to +10,000  
<=high)  
24, 25  
Memory type for the module's analog output  
data, usually type AQ. Enter one of the numbers  
listed above.  
48, 49  
Ch1 High Span  
(-10,000 to +10,000 >=low)  
26, 27  
28, 29  
Relative offset from start of table  
50 - 59  
60 - 69  
Ch 2 parameters  
Ch 3 parameters  
Byte length of module's control output bits  
(0 - 2)  
30, 31  
Memory type for the module's control output  
bits, usually type Q. Enter one of the numbers  
listed above.  
70 - 79  
Ch 4 parameters  
32, 33  
34, 35  
36, 37  
Relative offset from start of table.  
80 - 89  
90 - 99  
100-109  
Ch 5 parameters  
Ch 6 parameters  
Ch 7 parameters  
Local Default Output (0 = off, 1 = hold)  
BIU command timeout in milliseconds  
(500 to 65535)  
38, 39  
Active Channels. One bit per channel. For each  
channel, 0 = inactive, 1 = active)  
Default is 0xFF, all active).  
110-119  
Ch 8 parameters  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 8 Datagrams  
8-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Additional Configuration Data for a Micro Field Processor Module  
The content of configuration data bytes 14 to 43 for a Micro Field Processor module  
(IC670MFP100) is listed below.  
Byte  
Description  
Byte  
Description  
14  
Number of input reference parameters (2)  
28, 29  
Byte length of the number of outputs from the BIU to  
the MFP's I table. (0 - 64)  
15  
Number of output reference parameters (2)  
30, 31  
32, 33  
34, 35  
36, 37  
BIU table to get data for the MFP's I table. Enter one  
of the numbers listed above.  
16, 17  
18, 19  
Byte length of number of inputs to BIU from the  
MFP's discrete output (Q) table (0 - 64)  
Byte offset of from the start of the selected BIU table  
to get data for the MFP's I table (0 - 255)  
BIU table to place Q data from the MFP. Enter  
one of the following numbers:  
16 = I table  
Byte length of the number of outputs from the BIU to  
the MFP's AI table. (0 - 254)  
BIU table to get data for the MFP's AI table. Enter  
one of the numbers listed above.  
18 = Q table  
10 = AI table  
12 = AQ table  
20, 21  
22, 23  
24, 25  
26, 27  
Byte offset from the start of the selected BIU  
table to put MFP Q table data. (0 - 255)  
38, 39  
40  
Byte offset of from the start of the selected BIU table  
to get data for the MFP's AI table (0 - 255)  
Byte length of the number of inputs to the BIU  
from the MFP's AQ table. (0 - 254)  
Number of checksums. O means do not check  
program logic match. (0 - 255)  
BIU table to put AQ table from the MFP. Enter  
one of the numbers listed above.  
41  
Byte checksum of the MFP ladder logic.  
Byte offset from the start of the selected BIU  
table to put MFP AQ table data. (0 - 255)  
42, 43  
Word LRC checksum of MFP ladder logic.  
8-26  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Group Data Move Configuration Data Format  
Bytes 0 to 11 must be: FF hex, 0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0  
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
Byte 12  
BSM State (read only)  
BSM Present (1 = yes, 0 = no)  
BSM Controller (1 = yes, 0 = no)  
BSM Forced (1 = yes, 0 = no)  
CPU Redundancy ( 00 = no redundancy  
01 = Hot standby  
10 = Duplex  
11 = reserved )  
Duplex Default  
Configuration Protection (read only)  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte 13  
Serial Bus Address (read only)  
Baud Rate Code (read only)  
0 = 153.6Kb ext  
1 = 153.6 Kb std  
2 = 76.8 Kb  
3 = 38.4 Kb  
Fault Reporting Disabled (0 = yes, 1 = no)  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
Byte 14  
Byte 15  
unlabelled bits not used  
BSM Switch Time (0 = 2.5 sec, 1 = 10 sec  
reserved  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
Byte 16  
Byte 17  
LSB  
Series Six/Series Five Reference Address  
(Read Only)  
MSB  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Byte 18  
Byte 19  
Configuration Length (unused)  
(# bytes in Write Configuration Sequence)  
7
7
7
6
6
6
5
5
5
4
4
4
3
3
3
2
2
2
1
1
1
0
0
0
Diagnostic Length (# bytes) read only (unused)  
reserved  
Bytes  
20 to 26  
Byte 27  
Sync Module Present (slot 1=bit 0, slot 8=bit 7)  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 8 Datagrams  
8-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8
Group Move 1  
The diagram below shows the sequence of group mode configuration data for Group Move 1,  
Move 1 and Move 2. The format for subsequent moves is the same.  
Group Move 1  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
Source Slot  
Byte 28  
Byte 29  
Destination Slot  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
Byte 30  
Byte 31  
Which Sweeps Data Group Will Be Moved  
Hold Last State/Defailt  
Submove 1  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
Byte 32  
Byte 93  
Source Table Segment Selector  
Destination Table Segment Selector  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
Byte 34  
Byte 35  
Source Offset in bytes, LSB  
Source Offset in bytes, MSB  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
Byte 36  
Byte 37  
Destination Offset in bytes, LSB  
Destination Offset in bytes, MSB  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
Byte Length of Data, LSB  
Byte Length of Data, MSB  
Byte 38  
Byte 39  
Submove 2  
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
Source Table Segment Selector  
Byte 40  
7
Destination Table Segment Selectot  
Byte 41  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
Source Offset in bytes, LSB  
Source Offset in bytes, MSB  
Byte 42  
Byte 43  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
Destination Offset in bytes, LSB  
Destination Offset in bytes, MSB  
Byte 44  
Byte 45  
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
Byte Length of Data, LSB  
Byte Length of Data, MSB  
Byte 46  
Byte 47  
The high byte of address + 2 of the pointer is not used; it must be zero. The low byte of address + 2  
specifies the type of memory where the Status Pointer will be located.  
For This Memory Type:  
discrete input table  
discrete output table  
register memory  
Enter This Number:  
I
16  
18  
8
Q
R
AI  
AQ  
analog input table  
10  
12  
analog output table  
8-28  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Set Bus Interface Unit Operating Mode  
Subfunction Code: 39 hex  
This datagram can be used to set the operating mode of the Genius Bus Interface Unit.  
Byte No.  
Byte Description  
Mode  
Mode  
0
1
This message has two copies of the mode parameter. These copies must be equal for the command  
to be accepted by the Bus Interface Unit.  
If you disable the network, the BIU sends no inputs and receives no outputs.  
Bytes 0 and 1 (Must Match)  
7
6
5 4  
3
2
1
0
I/O Scan Enable/Disable (1 = enable, 0 = disable)  
Run/Stop Local Programming (FUTURE)  
Network Enabled/disabled  
(0 = enable, 1=disable)  
Unused (must be 0)  
Set Micro Field Processor Operating Mode  
Subfunction Code: 21 hex  
This datagram can be used to set the operating mode of a Micro Field Processor in the I/O Station.  
Byte  
0
Value  
Description  
F6 hex Message code  
18 hex Command code  
1
2
Slot #  
The slot number of the Micro Field Processor  
Reserved  
3
0
4
0
0
Offset of the Least Significant Byte of the data  
Offset of the Most Significant Byte of the data  
Data length.  
5
6
4
7
47 hex  
45 hex  
46 hex  
0
8
9
10  
Code to set Micro Field Processor mode:  
0 = Stop/No I/O Mode  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 8 Datagrams  
8-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8
Intelligent Analog Module Recalibration Datagram  
Subfunction Code: 21 hex  
This datagram can be used to recalibrate a 16 Point Analog Grouped module (IC670ALG240), to  
restore the factory calibration, or to place the module into “warmup” mode for recalibration.  
Byte  
Value  
F6 hex  
18 hex  
Slot #  
0
Description  
0
Message code  
Command code  
1
2
The module's slot number  
3
Reserved  
4
5
0
Offset of the Least Significant Byte of the data  
Offset of the Most Significant Byte of the data  
0
6
length of data Data length as shown in the following tables.  
data See below.  
7-133  
Message Content for Calibrating Low End of Channel  
Byte  
Value  
Description  
7
0
Channel #  
0
Reserved  
8
9
Channel to be calibrated (0 - 15)  
Request to calibrate low end  
10, 11  
Current in microAmps.  
Recommended range is 3500 to 4500 microAmps.  
12, 13  
0-65535  
0
Number of readings to average.  
Reserved  
14 - 20  
Message Content for Calibrating High End of Channel  
Byte  
Value  
Description  
7
0
Channel #  
1
Reserved  
8
9
Channel to be calibrated (0 - 15)  
Request to calibrate high end  
10, 11  
Current in microAmps.  
Recommended range is 19500 to 20500  
microAmps.  
12, 13  
0-65535  
0
Number of readings to average.  
Reserved  
14 - 20  
8-30  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8
Field Recalibration  
The 16 Point Grouped Analog Input module is calibrated at the factory. It can also be recalibrated  
from the host, to adapt to different conditions. Calibration data consists of two sets of values for each  
channel. One value is provided to the module during calibration. The other value is a corresponding  
A/D sample value for that current that is determined by the module. One pair of values represents a  
low value (typically 4mA) and the other represents a high value (typically 20mA).  
Recalibration, if needed, is done as described below.  
1. Connect a known current to each of the channels.  
2. (Optional) Place the module in warmup mode by sending the warmup command from the host.  
3. Send the calibration command from the host. The calibration command specifies the channel to  
calibrate and the current being supplied to the channel's input. There is a calibrate command  
for a high point and one for a low point.  
4. The module samples the channel and calculates the nominal value using the default calibration  
data. The module reads the number of samples specified in the command (1 to 65535) and  
calculates the average. It then stores the current value and the sample average and recalculates  
the scaling constants for the channel.  
5. The module returns status information about the recalibration to the BIU.  
Message Content for Storing New Calibration to Field Area  
Byte  
Value  
Description  
7
0
0
3
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
8
9
Code to store to field area  
Reserved  
10 - 20  
Message Content for Reverting to Factory Calibration  
Byte  
Value  
Description  
7
0
0
4
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
8
9
Code to revert to factory calibration  
Reserved  
10 - 20  
Message Content for Putting Module in Warmup Mode  
Byte  
Value  
Description  
7
0
0
5
0
Reserved  
Reserved  
8
9
Code to put module in warmup mode  
Reserved  
10 - 20  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 8 Datagrams  
8-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Read I/O Forces  
Subfunction Code: 40 hex  
This datagram can be used to set read force information from a Genius Bus Interface Unit. The  
information read is determined by the value specified in the datagram.  
Byte #  
Description  
0
Force Table Requested: 0 = input enable  
1 = output enable  
2 = input values  
3 = output values  
To read which inputs are forced, specify the number 0 in the datagram.  
To read which outputs are forced, specify 1 in the datagram.  
To read forced input values, specify 2 in the datagram.  
To read forced output values, specify 3 in the datagram.  
In the BIU, two force enable tables show which points are forced. Two force values tables show the  
forced values. Each table contains a byte of data for each byte of discrete data followed by a word  
of data for each channel of analog data. For example, if a BIU is configured to have 6 bytes of  
discrete input data and 6 channels of analog input data, the input force enable table and input force  
value table would look like this:  
Force Enabled Table  
Force Values Table  
Byte #  
0
Description  
Byte #  
0
Description  
1st 8 discrete inputs force enable  
1st 8 discrete inputs force values  
1
2nd 8 discrete inputs force enable  
1
2nd 8 discrete inputs force values  
2
.
2
.
3
.
3
.
4
.
4
.
5
last 8 discrete inputs force enable  
5
last 8 discrete inputs force values  
6, 7  
8, 9  
10, 11  
12, 13  
14, 15  
16, 17  
1st channel analog inputs force enable  
6, 7  
8, 9  
10, 11  
12, 13  
14, 15  
16, 17  
1st channel analog inputs force values  
2nd channel analog inputs force enable  
2nd channel analog inputs force values  
.
.
.
.
.
.
6th channel analog inputs force enable  
6th channel analog inputs force value  
Note that it is possible to have no discrete inputs or outputs or no analog inputs or outputs.  
Read I/O Forces Reply  
Subfunction Code: 41 hex  
This datagram provides the information requested by a Read I/O Forces datagram.  
Byte #  
Description  
0
Force Table Requested: 0 = input enable  
1 = output enable  
2 = input values  
3 = output values  
1 - 128  
Input/Output force enable/value table data  
For discrete data, a 1 in a bit position in the force enable table corresponds to an enabled force for  
that point. For analog data, the value FFFF (hex) in a word position in the enable table corresponds  
to an enabled force for an analog channel.  
8-32  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8
Read Slot Diagnostics  
Subfunction Code: 42 hex  
This datagram can be used to read diagnostics information for a specific slot, point, or channel  
from a BIU. This message does not provide channel or point information for intelligent modules  
(which includes certain types of I/O modules and Micro Field Processors). Intelligent modules can  
be configured to provide the information automatically.  
Byte #  
Description  
0
Slot number:  
1 - 8  
Read Slot Diagnostics Reply  
Subfunction Code: 43 hex  
This datagram provides the information requested by a Read Slot Diagnostics datagram.  
Byte #  
Description  
0
1
Slot number:  
1 - 8  
Board Status for slot  
2
Board identification fault bit (msb)  
3 - 18  
Slot diagnostics data (no meaning for discrete boards)  
Board Status (Byte 1)  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Configured  
Mismatched Board ID  
Missing  
Mismatched I/O  
Extra I/O Module  
Status: No User Power (for some analog modules)  
Smart Module Available  
Unsupported module type  
For conventional I/O modules, 01 in this byte indicates no faults. For intelligent modules, 41 hex  
indicates no faults.  
Board ID (Byte 2)  
If the designated slot has a discrete output module, the most significant bit of byte 2 indicates  
whether the module has a blown fuse or loss of user power fault.  
If the designated slot has a conventional analog input module, the most significant bit of byte 2  
indicates a loss of user power fault.  
This byte has no meaning for other types of modules.  
Bytes 3 - 18 (Slot Diagnostics Data)  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Input channel low alarm  
Input channel high alarm  
Channel underrange  
Channel overrange  
Channel open wire, for analog input modules in 4-20mA range  
reserved  
Loss of user power for analog output modules only  
GFK-0825F  
Chapter 8 Datagrams  
8-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Scaling Analog Channels  
Appendix  
A
This appendix explains how to select scaling values when configuring an analog input or output.  
See chapter 5 for configuration instructions.  
How Scaling Works  
Analog modules convert between electrical signals (current or voltage) and digital values. These  
digital values are 0 to 4095 (for 12-bit converters). Digital values are often referred to as “counts”  
They represent the data that is transferred between the Bus Interface Unit and an analog module.  
To make the input or output data of conventional analog modules more meaningful to the  
application, the Bus Interface Unit performs a conversion process called scaling (note that the BIU  
performs scaling only for conventional analog modules; “ntelligent” analog modules perform their  
own scaling). Scaling converts the module's digital values to or from the engineering units values  
used by the application.  
Typically, the engineering units represent millivolts or microamps. In other cases, they represent  
physical units such as degrees or centimeters per second. Since engineering units values are  
integers from -32767 to +32767, it is often necessary to use fractional units (such as hundredths of  
degrees) to preserve the resolution of a physical input or output.  
Each channel of an analog module can be scaled independently. Scaling is configured by entering  
corresponding low and high engineering units values and low and high internal values for two  
points. The internal values represent millivolts or microamps.  
The BIU uses the straight line defined by the two pairs of values to convert between engineering  
units and analog convertor counts. The conversion takes into account the module type and the  
range that is selected.  
GFK-0825F  
A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A
Scaling Values for 1mV or 1 A Engineering Units: BIU Version 1.3  
µ
For many applications, the engineering units are either millivolts or microAmps. These units are  
easy to scale. Simply use the table below to find scaling values that are appropriate for the  
channel's configured range.  
Analog Current Input Module  
Range  
Selected  
To measure  
this current  
Enter this engineering  
units value  
Internal Units  
(microAmps)  
4 to 20mA  
0 to 20 mA  
4 mA  
Low  
4,000  
Low  
4,000  
20 mA  
High  
+20,000  
High  
+20,000  
0 mA  
Low  
0
Low  
0
20 mA  
High  
+20,000  
High  
+20,000  
Analog Current Output Module  
Range  
Selected  
To output this Enter this engineering  
Internal Units  
(microAmps)  
current  
units value  
4 to 20mA  
4 mA  
Low  
4,000  
Low  
0
20 mA  
High  
+20,000  
High  
+20,000  
0 to 20 mA*  
0 mA  
Low  
0
Low  
0
20 mA  
High  
+20,000  
High  
+20,000  
Analog Current Source Output Module (IC670ALG320) in Voltage Mode  
Range  
Selected  
To output this Enter this engineering  
Internal Units  
(microAmps)  
voltage  
units value  
4 to 20mA  
0 volts  
Low  
0
Low  
0
+10 volts  
High  
+10,000  
High  
+20,000  
0 to 20 mA*  
0 volts  
Low  
0
Low  
0
+12.5 volts  
High  
+12,500  
High  
+20,000  
*
Connect the output load between Volt (V) and Return (RET) for the  
channel being used. For 0 to +12.5 voltage, place a jumper between RET  
and JMP on the terminal block.  
Horner Analog Voltage Input Module (HE670ADC810)  
Range  
Selected  
To measure  
this voltage  
Enter this engineering  
units value  
Internal Units  
(microAmps)  
0 to 10 volts  
0 volts  
Low  
0
Low  
0
+10 volts  
High  
+10,000  
High  
+10,000  
-10 to +10 volts  
-10 volts  
+10 volts  
Low  
-10,000  
+10,000  
Low  
-10,000  
+10,000  
High  
High  
A-2  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A
Scaling Values for 1mV or 1 A Engineering Units: BIU  
µ
Version 2.0 or Later  
For many applications, the engineering units are either millivolts or microAmps. These units are  
easy to scale. Simply use the table below to find scaling values that are appropriate for the  
channel's configured range.  
Analog Current Input Module  
Range  
Selected  
To measure  
this current  
Enter this engineering  
units value  
Internal Units  
(microAmps)  
4 to 20mA  
4 mA  
20 mA  
0 mA  
Low  
High  
Low  
High  
+4,000  
+20,000  
0
Low  
+4,000  
+20,000  
0
High  
Low  
High  
0 to 20 mA  
20 mA  
+20,000  
+20,000  
Analog Current Output Module  
Range  
Selected  
To output this Enter this engineering  
Internal Units  
(microAmps)  
current  
units value  
4 to 20mA  
4 mA  
Low  
High  
Low  
High  
+4000  
Low  
+4000  
+20,000  
0
20 mA  
0 mA  
+20,000  
0
High  
Low  
High  
0 to 20 mA*  
20 mA  
+20,000  
+20,000  
Analog Current Source Output Module (IC670ALG320) in Voltage Mode  
Range  
Selected  
To output this Enter this engineering  
Internal Units  
(microAmps)  
voltage  
units value  
4 to 20mA  
0 volts  
Low  
High  
Low  
High  
0
Low  
+4000  
+20,000  
0
+10 volts  
0 volts  
+10,000  
0
High  
Low  
High  
0 to 20 mA*  
+12.5 volts  
+12,500  
+20,000  
*
Connect the output load between Volt (V) and Return (RET) for the  
channel being used. For 0 to +12.5 voltage, place a jumper between RET  
and JMP on the terminal block.  
Horner Analog Voltage Input Module (HE670ADC810)  
Range  
Selected  
To measure  
this voltage  
Enter this engineering  
units value  
Internal Units  
(microAmps)  
0 to 10 volts  
0 volts  
Low  
High  
Low  
High  
0
+10,000  
-10,000  
+10,000  
Low  
0
+10,000  
-10,000  
+10,000  
+10 volts  
-10 volts  
+10 volts  
High  
Low  
High  
-10 to +10 volts  
GFK-0825F  
Appendix A Scaling Analog Channels  
A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A
Measuring Scaling Values  
If the circuit will not use millivolt or microAmp units, the most accurate scaling values can be  
found by taking actual measurements of the process. The process must be set to two distinctly  
different conditions, so two sets of measurements can be taken.  
If the analog module is already installed, you can use it online to the process being measured to  
obtain actual data values. By default, the Bus Interface Unit performs a 1 to 1 scaling on all  
channels. (Using the online method requires the prior configuration of at least the serial bus  
address, the I/O map, and the module I/O references).  
Finding the Digital Value with the Module Online to the Process  
If the module is online to the process, follow the steps below to find the scaling values.  
1. Set the process to the first condition to be measured.  
2. Using a suitable external device, find the engineering units measurement (for example, PSI, or  
degrees).  
3. Read the corresponding value with the Hand-held Monitor or the Logicmaster software. The  
units (using the default scaling) are millivolts or microAmps.  
using a Hand-held Monitor in default mode, go to the Monitor screens (see chapter 7 if  
you need further instructions) and read the channel's digital value.  
using the Logicmaster software, go to the appropriate data table and read the channel's  
digital value.  
4. Set the process to the second condition to be measured and repeat steps 2 and 3 to find the  
second pair of scaling values.  
Finding the Digital Value without the Module Online  
If the module is not online to the process, you will need to take two measurements from the  
process, and also measure the voltage or current associated with each. Convert this measurement to  
millivolts (for voltage) or microAmps (for current).  
A-4  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A
Example of Scaling an Analog Input  
A channel is configured in the 0 to 10 volts DC range. It measures a velocity input. Electronic  
sensors and mechanical linkage external to the block have determined that an input level of +1.5  
volts DC is equal to -20 feet/second (-6 meters/second), and that +9 volts DC is equal to +180  
feet/second (+50 meters/second). Plotting these values on a graph shows that a signal of 5 volts  
DC corresponds to a speed of 73.3 feet/second.  
46746  
Velocity  
200  
(+9.0V, +180 ft/sec)  
150  
100  
50  
Input  
Voltage  
-20  
+5.0  
+9.0 +10.0  
(+1.5V, -20 ft/sec)  
-50  
-60  
For engineering units of feet per second, the following scaling values are used:  
Low engineering units  
High engineering units  
Low internal units  
=
=
=
=
-20 ft/sec  
+180 ft/sec  
1500 millivolts  
9000 millivolts  
High internal units  
An input value of 5.0 volts would be scaled to an engineering value of +00073 (ft/sec).  
In this example, scaling to hundredths of feet per second would provide better resolution. The  
following scaling values would be used:  
Low engineering units  
High engineering units  
Low internal units  
=
=
=
=
-2000 hundredths ft/sec  
+1800 hundredths ft/sec  
1500 millivolts  
High internal units  
9000 millivolts  
An input value of 5.0 volts would be scaled to an engineering value of +7333 (hundredths ft/sec).  
GFK-0825F  
Appendix A Scaling Analog Channels  
A-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installing Additional Suppression  
Appendix  
B
This appendix describes some precautions that can be taken in an installation to help assure proper  
operation.  
It is possible some installations might exceed the surge immunity capabilities specified in chapter  
1. This is most likely in outdoor installations or where the power source is from another building or  
ground system. It is prudent to provide local transient protection.  
Note  
MOVs do a good job of absorbing transients on communications, control, and  
power lines, provided the total energy of those transients does not exceed the  
rating of the device.  
However, if the energy of the transient exceeds the rating of the device, the MOV  
may be either damaged or destroyed. This failure may not be visibly or  
electrically evident. MOVs should be regularly inspected for signs of damage to  
assure continued protection against transients. For some applications, periodic  
replacement of critical MOVs is recommended, even if they do not show signs of  
damage.  
Suppression at the Power Lines  
Protection can be provided by connecting higher-energy MOVs across the power lines (for  
instance, between Hot and Neutral) and from line to frame ground (safety ground). This triangular  
configuration requires three MOVs for each long power feed. If the total power feed length is about  
100 feet or less, one set of MOVs should be enough for any number of devices. The axial-leaded  
LA series of MOVs from Harris is often used. The 14mm size, model V130LA10 rated at 38  
joules is usually sufficient. The MOVs used should be able to handle most line transients.  
Measurement of actual transients may be required in extreme cases to decide what MOVs to use.  
GFK-0825F  
B-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B
Suppression for Devices in an Enclosure  
For a group of devices installed in an enclosure, the MOVs can be installed at the point where the  
power lines enter the enclosure. Ideally, MOVs should be used at each cabinet in the system for  
maximum protection. The following illustration shows suppression on both power lines and the  
communications bus for modules in an enclosure.  
46461  
Enclosure  
Power  
to  
Modules  
Short Length of  
Bus to All Bus  
Interface Units  
Suppression at the Communications Line  
For an individual Bus Interface Unit, suppression can be supplied by connecting two small MOVs  
from Serial 1 and Serial 2 to the Bus Interface Unit's Shield Out terminal:  
46463  
(bus cable not shown)  
S1  
S2  
SHLD IN  
MOVs  
SHLD OUT  
Suitable MOVs include Harris part number V220MA2A, Panasonic ERZ-CO5FK221U, and  
Siemens 505K140. If necessary, higher energy-rated devices can also be used. It is important to be  
sure that the MOV leads do not cause any shorts between the serial data and shield connectors.  
Chapter 2 of the  
(GEK-90486-1) describes the  
Genius I/O System and Communications Manual  
noise-rejection and filtering capabilities of the Genius bus. It explains bus wiring practices for all  
applications. That chapter also gives additional instructions for installing a bus outdoors or between  
buildings, including recommendations for adding suppression at the point where the bus enters a  
building.  
B-2  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Genius Serial Bus  
Appendix  
C
This appendix describes the selection and operating characteristics of the bus cable that links Genius  
devices. This information supercedes the equivalent text portion of chapter 2 of The Genius I/O System  
and Communications Manual (GFK-90486), “The Communications Bus”.  
A Genius serial bus consists of two or more Genius devices, and (usually) the bus cable that  
connects them. A single block or bus controller with a Hand-held Monitor directly attached,  
properly terminated with a 75 Ohm resistor, is considered the smallest possible Genius  
communications bus.  
Wiring Guidelines  
Four types of wiring may be encountered in a typical factory installation:  
1. Power wiring - the plant power distribution, and high power loads such as high horsepower motors.  
These circuits may be rated from tens to thousands of KVA at 220 VAC or higher.  
2. Control wiring - usually either low voltage DC or 120 VAC of limited energy rating. Examples are  
wiring to start/stop switches, contactor coils, and machine limit switches. This is generally the  
interface level of the Genius discrete I/O.  
3. Analog wiring - transducer outputs and analog control voltages. This is the interface level to Genius  
I/O analog blocks.  
4. Communications and signal wiring - the communications network that ties everything together,  
including computer LANs, MAP, and Genius I/O and communications bus.  
These four types of wiring should be separated as much as possible to reduce the hazards from  
insulation failure, miswiring, and interaction (noise) between signals. A typical PLC system with  
Genius I/O may require some mixing of the latter three types of wiring, particularly in cramped  
areas inside motor control centers and on control panels. In general, it is acceptable to mix the  
Genius bus cable with the I/O wiring from the blocks, as well as associated control level wiring.  
All noise pickup is cumulative, depending on both the spacing between wires, and the distance  
span they run together. I/O wires and Genius bus cable can be placed randomly in a wiring trough  
for lengths of up to 50 feet. If wiring is cord-tied (harnessed), do not include the bus cable in the  
harness, since binding wires tightly together increases the coupling and mechanical stress that can  
damage the relatively soft insulation of some serial cable types.  
Wiring external to equipment and in cable trays, should be separated following NEC practices. The  
pickup over long-distance runs with adequate spacing consists of common mode and ground  
voltage differences. These are rejected due to the differential transmission mode of the Genius bus  
and the bus isolation transformers built into each Genius I/O block.  
GFK-0825F  
C-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
C
Electrical Interface  
The Genius serial bus uses computer grade twisted pair data cable. The half duplex token sequence  
used requires only a single pair since at any time only one station is transmitting and all others are  
receiving. All stations must receive in order to track the present token value and take their  
appropriate turn on the bus, regardless whether the data is to be used locally. The transmit sequence  
is the same as the serial bus address (SBA) set into each location during configuration. A  
simplified interface circuit is shown below:  
Wiring Terminals  
+ REF  
SER1  
R
RX+  
COMP  
COMP  
LOCAL  
SER2  
SUPPLY  
+5 to 10 V  
SHIELD  
OUT  
RX-  
SER1  
SER2  
- REF  
SER2  
TX+  
TX-  
R
SHIELD  
IN  
INTERFACE  
LOGIC  
LOCAL  
COMMON  
ISOLATION  
CHASSIS  
GROUND  
Signal coupling to the bus is via a high frequency, high isolation pulse transformer. This permits  
the bus and the local logic to be at different voltage levels. The pulse waveforms are bipolar (see  
next section below) to reduce DC baseline offsets in the waveform.  
The daisy-chained bus is shown on the left in the above illustration. The SER 1 and SER 2 lines  
are merely tapped at the intermediate locations along the bus. These connections must be consistent  
since the signal is polarized. The shield of the cable is broken into segments at each location. Each  
shield segment is DC grounded at one end (SHIELD OUT), and terminated with a small capacitor  
at the other (SHIELD IN). The segmenting breaks up long ground loop paths. The capacitor  
termination reduces common mode noise from high frequency pickup, while preventing large  
ground loop currents in the shield at low frequencies.  
The alternately switching transistors produce a negative pulse followed by a positive pulse across  
SERIAL 1 relative to SERIAL 2. The bit waveform is a series of these pulses, as will be shown  
later. The transformer provides isolation (2500 volts test) between the bus and the local logic,  
permitting these to be at different voltages. The internal resistors in each line provide current limit  
and some termination function during transmission.  
The balanced (differential) signals on the twisted pair provide high noise immunity due to the  
magnetic (H field) cancellation effect of the twisting, as well as electric (E field) reduction by the  
shielding. Most remaining noise pickup is common mode: the transformer provides a high common  
mode noise rejection by looking only at the differential signal across the SER 1-2 lines. The two  
input comparators detect the positive polarity input pulses separately from the negative; these are  
sent to a custom interface logic chip which digitally filters these for timing and sequence, then  
reconstructs the NRZ digital data. Voltages between the two thresholds are ignored. This filtering,  
and the high input threshold if the comparators, are highly effective in rejecting both random  
impulse noise and low level line reflections. Finally a CRC-6 checksum check is performed before  
the data is sent to the local processor (not shown).  
C-2  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
C
Genius Transceiver Electrical Specification  
Property  
Normal peak voltage Vp into 78 ohm terminated cable (1)  
Normal peak voltage Vp into 150 ohm terminated cable (1)  
Rated bus impedance (2)  
Min  
Max  
3.5 volts  
6.0 volts  
78 ohms  
5.5 volts  
9.5 volts  
150 ohms  
Maximum output voltage (SER 1 and 2 open) (3)  
Peak  
RMS  
35 volts  
15 volts  
Maximum output current (SER 1 and 2 shorted together) Peak  
RMS  
180 milliamp  
50 milliamp  
Transmitter source resistance  
80 ohms  
140 ohms  
Transmitter source inductance (transformer leakage inductance)  
Receiver input threshold; +Vr, -Vr (4)  
10 microhenries  
1.1 volt  
0.7 volt  
10 K ohm  
Receive mode input impedance  
Receive mode load inductance (transformer shunt inductance)  
Receiver common mode rejection (DC to 1 MHZ)  
Shield capacitor termination  
6 millihenries  
60 dB  
12 millihenries  
0.1 microfarad  
240 volts AC  
Isolation, serial bus to circuit, continuous  
Notes:  
(1) Vp may vary among various module types.  
(2) Rated load is half cable impedance when termination is included.  
(3) Peak open circuit voltage contains underdamped ringing due to lack of termination.  
(4) Input voltages between +Vr and -Vr thresholds are ignored.  
GFK-0825F  
Appendix C The Genius Serial Bus  
C-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
C
Selecting a Cable Type  
The Genius bus is a shielded twisted-pair wire, daisy-chained from block to block and terminated at both ends.  
Proper cable selection is critical to successful operation of the system.  
Each bus in the system can be any cable type listed in the table below. Do not mix cables of different impedance,  
regardless of cable run length. Do not mix cable types in long and/or noisy installations. Other, small-size twisted  
pair shielded wire of unspecified impedance can be used for short runs of 50 feet or less, using 75 ohm terminations.  
Selection of wire type may be limited by local and national codes and industry standards. Consult the cable  
manufacturer to determine the cable's suitability for a particular type of installation.  
Conservative wiring practices and national and local codes require physical separation between control circuits and  
power distribution or motor power. Refer to sections 430 and 725 of the National Electric Code.  
Cable #  
& Make  
NEC  
(USA)  
Type  
Outer  
Diameter  
Terminating  
Resistor*  
-10%to+20%  
1/2 Watt  
Number of  
Conductors/  
AWG  
Dielectric Ambient  
Maximum Length Cable Run,  
feet/meters at baud rate  
Voltage  
Rating  
Temp  
Rating,  
Deg. C  
153.6s  
2000ft  
606m  
153.6e  
3500ft  
1061m  
76.8  
4500ft  
1364m  
38.4 •  
(A)9823  
(C)4596  
(M)M39240  
none  
CL2  
CM  
.350in  
8.89mm  
150 ohms  
2 / #22  
30V  
60  
7500ft  
2283m  
(B)89182  
CL2P  
.322in  
8.18mm  
150 ohms  
120 ohms  
100 ohms  
2 / #22  
2 / #24  
2 / #20  
150V  
30V  
200  
80  
2000ft  
606m  
3500ft  
1061m  
4500ft  
1364m  
7500ft  
2283m  
(B)9841  
(M)M3993  
CM  
CL2  
.270in  
6.86mm  
1000ft  
303m  
1500ft  
455m  
2500ft  
758m  
3500ft  
1061m  
(A)9818C  
(B)9207  
(M)M4270  
CL2  
CM  
CM  
.330in  
8.38mm  
300V  
80  
1500ft  
455m  
2500ft  
758m  
3500ft  
1061m  
6000ft  
1818m  
(A)9109  
(B)89207  
(C)4798  
CL2P  
CM  
*
.282in  
7.16mm  
100 ohms  
2 / #20  
150V  
200  
1500ft  
455m  
2500ft  
758m  
3500ft  
1061m  
6000ft  
1818m  
(M)M44270  
CMP  
(A)9818D  
(B)9815  
none  
*
.330in  
8.38mm  
100 ohms  
100 ohms  
100 ohms  
100 ohms  
2 / #20  
1500ft  
455m  
2500ft  
758m  
3500ft  
1061m  
6000ft  
1818m  
(O)911264  
**  
none  
.260in  
6.60 mm  
2 / #22 flexing  
250V  
>150V  
150V  
80  
80  
60  
1500ft  
455m  
2000ft  
606m  
3000ft9  
09m  
4500ft  
1364m  
(E)532185  
BBDN  
approx .50in  
(12.7mm)  
4 pairs #24  
(solid)  
1500ft  
455m  
2000ft  
606m  
3000ft  
909m  
4500ft  
1364m  
CM  
(A)9818  
(B)9855  
(M)M4230  
*
CM  
CM  
.315in  
8.00mm  
4 (two pair) #22  
4 (two pair) #22  
2 / #20  
1200ft  
364m  
1700ft  
516m  
3000ft  
909m  
4500ft  
1364m  
(A)9110  
(B)89696  
(B)89855  
none  
CMP  
CMP  
.274in  
6.96mm  
100 ohms  
75 ohms  
75 ohms  
150V  
150V  
300V  
200  
60  
1200ft  
364m  
1700ft  
516m  
3000ft  
909m  
4500ft  
1364m  
(A)9814C)  
(B)9463  
(M)M4154  
none  
CM  
CL2  
.243in  
6.17mm  
800ft  
242m  
1500ft  
455m  
2500ft  
758m  
3500ft  
1061m  
(A)5902C  
(B)9302  
none  
CM  
.244in  
6.20mm  
4 (two pair) #22  
80  
200ft  
60m  
500ft  
152m  
1200ft  
333m  
2500ft  
758m  
(M)M17002  
CM  
Notes:  
A = Alpha, B = Belden, C = Consolidated, E = Essex, M = Manhattan, O = Olflex  
= Limited to 16 taps at 38.4 Kbaud  
* = not known  
**= Suitable for applications requiring high flexibility, continuous flex or vibration.  
NEC classes are based on data obtained from manufacturers and are subject to change. CANADIAN CEC codes are  
generally similar. Other countries may vary. The serial bus can be treated as a Class 2 circuit when appropriate  
wiring practices are followed. Maximum available bus lengths may be affected when installation requires the high  
voltage rated CM (Communications) rating. CM types can replace CL2, but not vice versa.  
C-4  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
C
Serial Bus Waveforms  
The actual waveforms seen on the cable depend on the cable impedance and the distance from the  
station presently transmitting. A data “0” is a series of three AC pulses, while a “1”is no pulse.  
+Vp  
+Vr  
-Vr  
-Vp  
0”  
1
1”  
0”  
0”  
1”  
t =  
SERIAL 1 VOLTAGE RELATIVE TO SERIAL 2  
baud rate  
Use caution when connecting instrumentation to the bus. A differential probe or a summation of  
two probes relative to ground is required. Inadvertent grounding of one side of the bus can cause  
loss of data or data errors.  
The pulse frequency is three times the baud frequency, for example 460.8 KHz at 153.6 Kb.  
The peak transmitted voltage Vp and the receiver thresholds Vr are per the electrical specification  
above. The peak voltages measured will decline with distance along the cable from the transmitting  
station, so different stations will have varying amplitudes. The wave shape will also become more  
rounded with distance.  
The minimum amplitude pulses seen during a “0” should exceed the receiver threshold Vr of 900  
millivolts by 50% (about 1.4 volts) for best reliability. An occasional pulse at or below the  
threshold may still not cause the bit to be missed, due to a voting algorithm in the logic, however.  
Likewise, no pulses greater than Vr should exist during logic “1” intervals. Occasional extra pulses  
during this interval are also rejected by the logic.  
Line reflections will show up as notch distortion during the pulse or low level pulses during “1”  
intervals, and their appearance is synchronized to the baud frequency. These cause no problem if  
they do not cause violation of the amplitude criteria of the previous paragraphs.  
The Serial 1 and Serial 2 lines should always have a termination resistor equal to the characteristic  
impedance of the cable connected at each extreme end. When testing a Genius block or other  
device using a Hand Held Monitor, when no serial bus is present, a terminating resistor will  
improve integrity. 75 Ohms is recommended.  
GFK-0825F  
Appendix C The Genius Serial Bus  
C-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
C
Using Other Cable Types  
The cable types listed in the preceding table are recommended for use. If the cable types listed  
above are not available, the cable selected must meet the following guidelines.  
1. High quality construction. Most important is uniformity of cross section along the length of the  
cable. Poor quality cable may cause signal distortion, and increase the possibility of damage  
during installation.  
2. Precision-twisted shielded wire of EIA RS422 standard type, having a uniform number of  
twists per unit of length. In a catalog, this type of cable may also be listed as twinaxial cable,  
data cable, or computer cable.  
3. Relatively high characteristic impedance; 100 to 150 ohms is best; 75 ohms is the minimum  
recommended.  
4. Low capacitance between wires, typically less than 20pF/foot (60pF/meter). This may be  
accomplished by inner dielectrics of foamed type, usually polypropylene or polyethylene,  
having a low dielectric constant. Alternatively, the conductors may be spaced relatively far  
apart. Lower impedance types have smaller cross-sections, and provide easier wiring for  
shorter total transmission distances.  
5. Shield coverage of 95% or more. Solid foil with an overlapped folded seam and drain wire is  
best. Braided copper is less desirable; spiral wound foil is least desirable.  
6. An outer jacket that provides appropriate protection, such as water, oil, or chemical resistance.  
While PVC materials can be used in many installations, Teflon, polyethelene, or  
polypropylene are usually more durable.  
7. Electrical characteristics: cable manufacturers' information about pulse rise time and NRZ data  
rate is useful for comparing cable types. The Genius bit consists of three AC pulses; the  
equivalent NRZ bit rate is about three times as great.  
For assistance in selecting a specific cable type, please consult your local GE Fanuc application  
engineer.  
Prefabricated Cables  
For applications using 150 ohm cables, prefabricated cables are available in 15" (IC660BLC001)  
and 36" (IC660BLC003) lengths. These cables terminate in mating connectors that simplify wiring  
between I/O blocks. The 36" cable is recommended for Field Control installations.  
SHDSHD SER SER  
OUT IN  
2
1
C-6  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
C
Effect of Long Cables, Repeaters, or Unspecified Cable Types On Maximum Length Bus  
Three effects limit the maximum length bus available at any baud rate:  
1. Voltage attenuation  
2. Waveform distortion (frequency dispersion)  
3. Propagation delays  
Attenuation  
The transmitter output levels and receiver thresholds determine the maximum attenuation that can  
be tolerated. For Genius products, this is the principal determinant when using recommended cable  
types.  
Distortion  
Waveform distortion is due to the limited bandwidth of wire media, which causes the various  
frequency components of a pulse waveform to travel at different speeds and thus arrive separately  
in time (called dispersion). As a result, the received pulse appears rounded and distorted. The signal  
at the extreme end from the transmitter may look rounded and skewed as shown below. Distortion  
is most apparent near the beginning and end of a pulse train where in may appear as a change in  
phase or a frequency shift. Critical timing for a logic 0 transmission is shown below in a more  
detailed version of the waveform:  
Tw  
Tw  
+Vr  
-Vr  
Tp/2  
Tp/2  
Note the first and last half-cycle look wider. The most critical to operation is the first full cycle of  
the first start bit of the transmission. Detection of this pulse establishes the time synchronization of  
the receiver to the incoming waveform. Missing this first pulse does not cause the data to be  
missed, but may compromise the noise immunity with respect to extra or missing pulses. The  
frequency of the AC pulse is 3X the baud rate as noted earlier. This means the normal period  
Tp(normal) is:  
2.17 microseconds at 153.6 Kb  
4.34 microseconds at 76.8 Kb  
8.68 microseconds at 38.4 Kb.  
GFK-0825F  
Appendix C The Genius Serial Bus  
C-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
C
The half cycle pulse width, when measured between the positive and negative receiver thresholds,  
denoted as Tp/2 in the figure, will vary along the waveform due to dispersion, and resembles a  
frequency shift.. The digital input filter essentially is a band pass filter which looks at the half cycle  
timing Tp/2, and the duration above the thresholds, Tw. The limits are:  
Tp/2 = 0.6 Tp(normal) maximum  
Tw = 0.188 Tp(normal) minimum  
These measurements can be taken when evaluating the maximum length of an unspecified cable.  
Dispersion is much less of a problem with fiber optic links since the media is much wider  
bandwidth, and therefore has less distortion.  
Propagation Delay  
The propagation delay is caused by travel time of the signal down the cable. Typical signal velocity  
in data grade cables is around 65- 78% of the speed of light. This requires about 3 microseconds to  
travel a 2000 foot long bus. This is about half a bit time at 153,6 Kb. This skew could affect the  
bus access sequence since only one bit of quiet bus (skip) time is usually allocated between  
transmission of adjacent addresses. (Refer to Bus Access Time section below.) The signal must  
reach all devices on the bus within the period of one bit. Propagation delay causes the ultimate  
limitation in bus length, even with ideal media. Propagation speed through fiber optic is not  
significantly different than wire, and delays through the interfaces must be accounted for.  
Serial Data Format  
The Genius protocol is designed to produce maximum throughput of data by using a minimum  
overhead of control and synchronizing characters.  
Each character is 11 bits long, comprising a start bit (always 0), next a control bit, followed by 8  
bits of data, sent LSB first. The last bit is a stop bit, always 1. Successive characters are sent with  
no time space between them. The control bit is used to signal the type of character being sent. A 1  
indicates a control character, and 0 a data character.  
A minimum transmission is comprised of a start character, one or more data characters, and a stop  
character. The Start character data contains the address and whether the transmission is directed to  
a specific address or a broadcast to all. The End character contains the CRC-6 checksum. More  
complex transmissions may have additional start and end of block characters to break up the  
message into “blocks” of data (not to be confused with Genius I/O “Blocks”). For example, a Bus  
Controller can send device specific messages (blocks of data) to all devices on the bus during one  
transmission cycle.  
C-8  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
C
Bus Access  
All devices must receive the current SBA and the stop character even though the data is irrelevant  
locally. After the stop control character is received, each device on the bus starts a timer. The time  
delay is equal to a “skip time” times the difference between the device Serial Bus Address (SBA)  
and the last SBA received. The device will transmit after the time delay if no other start bits are  
detected first. Thus each device takes turn in order of SBA. Unused SBAs result in longer times  
between messages. All devices must detect messages within this skip time delay. A bus “collision”  
(two sources transmitting simultaneously) results if this sequence is missed. The skip time value is  
equal to one bit period, except on the 153.6e rate, where it is two bit periods long. The longer  
interval is useful to accommodate the longer propagation delays due to longer bus cables, or when  
delays are introduced by fiber optic or other repeaters, The worse case is when adjacent SBAs are  
physically located at opposite ends of a long bus. For example, assume SBA 4 and 6 are at one end  
of a 2000 foot bus and SBA5 at the other, operating at 153.6s Kb. When SBA 4 end character is  
detected, SBA6 immediately starts timing 2 skip times (13 uSec) to start of it's transmission. SBA5  
receives the end character 3 uSec later, and starts timing 1 skip time (6.5 uSec). Thus SBA 5 will  
start transmitting 9.5 uSec after SBA 4 quit. This allows 3.5 uSec for the signal to get back to  
SBA6 to cancel its transmission turn. The 3 uSec transmission delay leaves only 0.5 uSec to do this  
and avoid a collision between SBA5 and 6.  
Bus collisions result in missing data or detected CRC errors. Problems resulting from bus collisions  
can be fixed by not using (skipping) a SBA, resequencing SBAs in order along the bus, going from  
153.6s baud to the 153.6e, or a lower baud rate.  
GFK-0825F  
Appendix C The Genius Serial Bus  
C-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
C
Bus Length  
The maximum bus length for shielded, twisted-pair cable is 7500 feet. Some cable types are  
restricted to shorter bus lengths. In turn, the bus length determines which baud rate may be  
selected.  
If the application requires greater bus length, fiber optics cable and modems can be used, as  
explained later in this chapter.  
Bus Length and Baud Rate for Busses with Phase A Devices  
If a bus has any Phase A Genius products (catalog numbers IC660CBDnnn, IC660CBSnnn,  
IC660CBAnnn, IC660HHM500, or IC660CBB900/901), the bus must use 153.6 Kbaud “standard” and  
the maximum bus length is 2000 feet. Therefore, only the cable lengths listed under “153.6s” are  
permitted (“153.6e” refers to 153.6 Kbaud extended, which is not compatible with 153.6 Kbaud  
standard).  
Baud Rate Selection  
A Genius I/O or communications bus can operate at one of four baud rates:  
153.6 Kbaud standard, 153.6 Kbaud extended, 76.8 Kbaud, or 38.4 Kbaud.  
Follow these guidelines when selecting the baud rate for a bus:  
1. All devices on a bus must operate at the same baud rate (other busses in the system may  
operate at different baud rates).  
2. If there are any older Genius products on the bus (catalog numbers IC660CBDnnn,  
IC660CBSnnn, IC660CBAnnn, IC660HHM500, or IC660CBB900/901), the bus must be set  
up to use 153.6 Kbaud standard.  
3. If the cable length is between 4500 and 7500 feet, you must select 38.4 Kbaud. This data rate  
only supports a maximum of 16 device on the bus.  
4. If the cable length is between 3500 and 4500 feet, select 76.8 Kbaud.  
5. If cable length is between 2000 and 3500 feet, select 153.6 Kbaud extended.  
6. If the cable length is less than 2000 feet, either 153.6 Kbaud standard or 153.6 Kbaud extended  
can be used. The products are set to operate at 153.6 Kbaud standard when shipped from the  
factory. The use of 153.6 Kbaud extended is recommended, especially if the system will  
include a dual bus with Bus Switching Modules.  
In noisy environments, 153.6 Kbaud extended provides improved noise immunity with little effect  
on bus scan time. If a system is experiencing excessive blinking of the bus controller's COMM OK  
light, or if the I/O blocks' I/O Enabled LEDs go off frequently, 153.6 Kbaud extended should be  
used.  
The baud rate selected should be indicated on all blocks, especially if different busses in the facility use  
different baud rates. Before connecting a Hand-held Monitor to a functioning bus, check that it has been  
configured to the correct baud rate. If not, change the HHM baud rate selection, turn off the HHM,  
connect it to the bus, then turn the HHM on.  
C-10  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
C
Bus Ambient Electrical Information  
Most capacitively- and magnetically-coupled noise shows up as common mode voltage on the bus.  
The bus provides a 60 dB common mode rejection ratio. A noise spike above 1000 volts would be  
required to corrupt the data. The bus receivers filter out corrupted data and perform a 6-bit cyclic  
redundancy check to reject bad data. Corrupted signals due to noise show up as missed data rather  
than incorrect data. The bus continues operating to the maximum extent possible when bus errors  
are detected; random bus errors do not shut down communications. Bad data is rejected by the  
receiving device and excessive errors are reported to the controller. Bus errors are indicated by  
flickering of I/O block and bus controller LEDs. If excessive bus errors occur, the problem should  
be found and corrected.  
Lightning Transient Suppression  
Running the bus cable outdoors or between buildings may subject it to lightning transients beyond  
the 1,500 volt transient rating of the system. Installing cable underground reduces the probability of  
a direct lightning strike. However, buried cables can pick up hundreds of amperes of current when  
lightning contacts the ground nearby.  
Therefore, it is important to protect the installation by including surge protectors on underground  
data lines. The cable shields should be grounded directly. Surge suppressors and spark gaps should  
be used to limit the voltage that might appear on the signal lines. It is recommended to install two  
(only) silicon surge suppressors or spark gaps to control transients of 1 to 25 Kilovolts from 100 to  
1000 amps or more. These devices should be installed close to the entrance of the bus to the  
outdoors.  
Silicon Surge Suppressors are available many sources, including Clare/General Instruments and  
Motorola, For information about this product, in the US contact Lucas Industries Incorporated,  
5500 New King Street, Troy, Michigan 48098 (tel: 313 879-1920, fax: 313 552-1020). Spark gaps  
are available from Clare. Refer to the vendor's literature for installation details.  
In extreme situations, such as totally-isolated power systems, additional protection against  
lightning damage should be provided by adding surge suppressors for groups of I/O blocks. Such  
suppressors should be installed from incoming power leads to ground (enclosure baseplate/block  
case where leads enter the enclosure).  
A device specifically designed to protect the Genius bus is available from CONTROL  
TECHNOLOGY, 835 Hwy 90, Hancock Square Suite 10 (P. O. Box 2908), Bay Saint Louis, MS  
39520. (tel 601 466-4550, fax 601 466-4553). Contact them for application information. The  
devide must be used in combination with power line suppression to fully protect the system.  
GFK-0825F  
Appendix C The Genius Serial Bus  
C-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Examples  
Appendix  
D
This appendix includes examples of different Field Control I/O Station configurations:  
An I/O Station with discrete data only, where all of the data is configured within the BIU's I/O  
map. The BIU sends all inputs from Field Control modules on the network. All outputs are  
generated by the system controller (for example, a PLC) that sends them to the BIU over the  
network.  
An I/O Station with both analog and discrete data, where all of the data is configured within  
the BIU's I/O map. As in the first example, the BIU sends all inputs from Field Control  
modules on the network. All outputs are generated by the system controller which sends them  
to the BIU over the network.  
An I/O station with both discrete and analog data, which also includes a Micro Field Processor.  
The Micro Field Processor performs some I/O processing locally.  
An I/O Station with both discrete and analog data, which also includes a Micro Field  
Processor. Group Data Moves are used to transfer data within the I/O Station. This  
configuration allows all station inputs to be solved by the Micro Field Processor, and all  
station outputs to be controlled by the Micro Field Processor. The system controller (for  
example, a PLC) will receive all station inputs. If the Micro Field Processor stops providing  
outputs, the system controller will assume control of all station outputs.  
Example 1: Discrete Data, Network Processing  
In this I/O Station, there are only discrete I/O modules. All data is included within the I/O map that  
is configured for the Bus Interface Module, and exchanged over the network. There is no local  
Micro Field Processor.  
BIU Map:  
I00001 - I00024  
Q00001 - Q00024  
No synchronization is required.  
Slot 1: 12VDC 16-Point Pos/Neg Input Module (IC670MDL640)  
Slot 2: 120VAC 8-Point Isolated Input Module (IC670MDL242)  
Slot 3: 5/12/24VDC 16-Point Output Module (IC670MDL742)  
Slot 4: 8-Point Relay Output Module (IC670MDL930)  
I00001 - I00016  
I00017 - I00024  
Q00001 - Q00016  
Q00017 - Q00024  
GFK-0825F  
D-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D
Example 2: Discrete and Analog Data, Network Processing  
In this I/O Station, there are both discrete and analog I/O modules. All data is included within the  
I/O map that is configured for the Bus Interface Module, and exchanged over the network. There is  
no local Micro Field Processor.  
BIU Map:  
I00001 - I00112  
Q00001 - Q00040  
AI00001 - AI00024  
AQ00001 - AQ00004  
No synchronization is required.  
Slot 1: 12VDC 16-Point Pos/Neg Input Module  
(IC670MDL640)  
I00001 - I00016  
Slot 2: 120VAC 8-Point Isolated Input Module (IC670MDL242) I00017 - I00024  
Slot 3: 5/12/24VDC 16-Point Output Module (IC670MDL742) Q00001 - Q00016  
Slot 4: 8-Point Relay Output Module (IC670MDL930)  
Q00017 - Q00024  
Slot 5: 8-Channel Analog Input Module (IC670ALG230)  
AI00001 - AI00008  
Slot 6: High-level 16-Channel Analog Input Module  
(IC670ALG240):  
analog inputs:  
diagnostic inputs:  
AI00009 - AI00024  
I00025 - I00112  
control outputs:  
Q00025 - Q00040  
Slot 7: 4-Channel Analog Output Module (IC670ALG320)  
AQ00001 - AQ00004  
D-2  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D
Example 3: Discrete and Analog Data, Network and Local Processing  
In this I/O Station, there are discrete and analog I/O modules and a Micro Field Processor. All  
inputs are given to the Micro Field Processor and processed. All outputs solved by the Micro Field  
Processor drive the station outputs.  
All inputs from the station are sent back the the system controller as well. The system controller  
sends outputs to all modules but as long as the Micro Field Processor is present, system outputs are  
not used by the modules. If the local Micro Field Processor should stop providing outputs, the  
outputs received from the system controller will be used as station outputs.  
BIU Map: I00001 - I00112  
Q00001 - Q00040  
AI00001 - AI00024  
AQ00001 - AQ00004  
Slot 1 synchronization is required.  
Slot 1: Micro Field Processor (IC670MFP100)  
Map BIU I00001-00112 to MFP I00001 - 00112, so all inputs on station become  
inputs to MFP  
Map BIU AI00001-00024 to MFP AI00001 - 00024, so all inputs on station  
become inputs to MFP  
Map BIU Q00001-00040 to MFP Q00001 - 00040, so all outputs from MFP  
control station outputs  
Map BIU AQ00001-00004 to MFP AQ00001 - 00004, so all outputs from MFP  
control station outputs  
Set all MFP default parameters to No (Hold Last State)  
Slot 2: 12VDC 16-Point Pos/Neg Input Module  
(IC670MDL640)  
I00001 - I00016  
I00017 - I00024  
Q00001 - Q00016  
Slot 3: 120VAC 8-Point Isolated Input Module  
(IC670MDL242)  
Slot 4: 5/12/24VDC 16-Point Output Module  
(IC670MDL742)  
Slot 5: 8-Point Relay Output Module (IC670MDL930)  
Slot 6: 8-Channel Analog Input Module (IC670ALG230)  
Q00017 - Q00024  
AI00001 - AI00008  
Slot 7: High-level 16?Channel Analog Input Module  
(IC670ALG240):  
analog inputs:  
diagnostic inputs:  
AI00009 - AI00024  
I00025 - I00112  
control outputs:  
Q00025 - Q00040  
Slot 8: 4-Channel Analog Output Module (IC670ALG320) AQ00001 - AQ00004  
GFK-0825F  
Appendix D Configuration Examples  
D-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D
Example 4: Discrete and Analog Data, Network and Local Processing and Group Data  
Moves  
In this I/O Station, there are discrete and analog I/O modules and a Micro Field Processor. Group  
Data Moves are used to transfer data within the I/O Station. This configuration allows all station  
inputs to be solved by the Micro Field Processor and all station outputs to be controlled by the  
Micro Field Processor. The system controller (for example, a PLC) will receive all station inputs. If  
the Micro Field Processor stops providing outputs, the system controller will assume control of all  
station outputs.  
BIU Map: I00001 - I00168  
Q00001 - Q00056  
AI00001 - AI00028  
AQ00000 - AQ00000 (zero length)  
Slot 1 synchronization is required.  
Slot 1: Micro Field Processor (IC670MFP100)  
Reference parameters zero  
length  
Slot 2: High-level 16?Channel Analog Input Module  
(IC670ALG240)  
Reference parameters zero  
length  
Slot 3: 4-Channel RTD Input Module (IC670ALG620)  
Reference parameters zero  
length  
Slot 4: 8-Channel Thermocouple Input Module  
(IC670ALG630)  
Reference parameters zero  
length  
Slot 5: 16-Point 12-120 VAC Output Module  
(IC670MDL330)  
Q00041 - 00056  
Group Move #1: Source slot 2, Destination slot 0 (move inputs from High-level Analog Input  
module to BIU input tables). All submoves can be set to default to either Yes or No.  
Submove 1:  
(Moves diagnostic bits)  
Source reference I00001  
Destination reference I00001  
Length 11 bytes  
Submove 2:  
(moves analog inputs)  
Source reference AI00001  
Destination reference AI00001  
Length 32 bytes  
Group Move #2: Source slot 0, Destination slot 2 (move outputs from BIU tables to High-level  
Analog Input module control outputs).  
Submove 1:  
Source reference Q00001  
Destination reference Q00001  
Length 2 bytes  
D-4  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
D
Group Move #3: Source slot 3, Destination slot 0 (move RTD inputs to BIU input tables). All  
submoves can be set to default to either Yes or No.  
Submove 1:  
(Moves diagnostic bits)  
Source reference I00001  
Destination reference I00089  
Length 4 bytes  
Submove 2:  
(moves analog inputs)  
Source reference AI00001  
Destination reference AI00017  
Length 8 bytes  
Group Move #4: Source slot 0, Destination slot 3 (move control outputs from BIU tables to  
RTD module).  
Submove 1:  
Source reference Q00017  
Destination reference Q00001  
Length 1 byte  
Group Move #5: Source slot 4, Destination slot 0 (move Thermocouple inputs to BIU input  
tables). All submoves can be set to default to either Yes or No.  
Submove 1:  
(Moves diagnostic bits)  
Source reference I00001  
Destination reference I00121  
Length 6 bytes  
Submove 2:  
(moves analog inputs)  
Source reference AI00001  
Destination reference AI00021  
Length 16 bytes  
Group Move #6: Source slot 0, Destination slot 4 (move control outputs from BIU tables to  
Thermocouple module).  
Submove 1:  
Source reference Q00025  
Destination reference Q00001  
Length 2 bytes  
Group Move #7: Source slot 1, Destination slot 0 (move all outputs of MFP to BIU input tables).  
All submoves are set to default to No (Hold Last State).  
Submove 1:  
(Moves discrete inputs)  
Source reference Q00001  
Destination reference Q00001  
Length 7 bytes  
Group Move #8: Source slot 0, Destination slot 1 (move all inputs from station in BIU tables to  
MFP input table).  
Submove 1:  
Submove 2:  
Source reference I00001  
Destination reference I00001  
Length 21 bytes  
Source reference AI00001  
Destination reference AI00001  
Length 56 bytes  
GFK-0825F  
Appendix D Configuration Examples  
D-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D
Example 5: Group Move  
A Field Control Station has a Genius BIU in slot 0, a Micro Field Processor in slot 1, and a Smart  
analog input module in slot 2.  
In this example, two group moves are used to transfer the  
following data:  
Group 1: from the Smart Analog Input Module to the  
Micro Field Processor:  
Slot 0  
The second byte of I data (which contains diagnostic status  
information about the module) is to be moved to MFP  
memory starting at I0017.  
Also, the second channel of analog input (AI) data is to be  
moved to MFP memory starting at AI002.  
The data group will be moved on BIU sweeps 1 and 9 (out  
of 1 through 16).  
Slot 1  
Slot 2  
The group move would be:  
Source: Slot 2 (the analog input module)  
Destination: Slot 1 (the Micro Field Processor)  
Move 1, Source Location:  
byte)  
I009 (start of second  
Move 1, Destination Location:  
Move 1, Data Length:  
Move 2, Source Location:  
input)  
I0017  
1 (byte)  
AI002 (start of second  
Move 2, Destination Location:  
Move 2, Data Length:  
Sweep Selections:  
AI002  
2 (bytes)  
1 and 9 only  
Group 2: from the Micro Field Processor to the Smart  
Analog Input Module:  
Data from MFP memory starting at Q0017 is to be moved  
to the module's Q memory (used to clear module faults).  
The data group will be moved on BIU sweeps 4 and 12.  
The group move would be:  
Source: Slot 1 (the Micro Field Processor)  
Destination: Slot 2 (the analog input module)  
Move 1, Source Location:  
Move 1, Destination Location:  
Move 1, Data Length:  
Q0017  
Q0001  
2 (bytes)  
4 and 12 only  
Sweep Selections:  
D-6  
Field ControlGenius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual–October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
BIU sweep  
selective, 4-4  
BIU Terminal Block  
description, 2-8  
functional specifications, 2-9  
introduction, 1-3  
BSM Controller, 5-11  
BSM Present, 5-11  
Bus  
A
Alarm limits  
Analog Grouped Input module, 5-47, 5-55, 5-63  
Analog input module, 5-33  
RTD module, 5-70  
Thermocouple module, 5-78  
Alignment tabs, 2-7  
access, C-9  
ambient specifications, C-11  
baud rate, C-10  
cable characteristics, C-6  
cable types, C-4  
cable with pre-molded connectors, 3-10  
connecting to BIU Terminal Block, 3-10  
connectors, 3-13  
electrical interface, C-2  
general transceiver specifications, C-3  
length, C-10  
lightning transients, C-11  
noise, effect on data, C-11  
outdoors, C-11  
prefabricated cables, terminated, C-6  
removing during operation, 3-13  
repeaters, using, C-7  
scan time, 4-9, 4-12  
serial data format, C-8  
surge suppression, C-11  
termination, 3-11  
unspecified cable type, using, C-7  
using other cable types, C-6  
waveforms, C-5  
Analog Current Output Module  
configuration instructions, 5-81, 5-90  
Analog Grouped Input Module  
alarm limits, 5-47, 5-55, 5-63  
configuration instructions, 5-40, 5-48, 5-56  
input filtering, 5-43, 5-51, 5-59, 5-94  
line frequency, 5-43, 5-51, 5-59  
Analog Input Module  
alarm limits, 5-33  
Channel Active, 5-30  
configuration format for datagram, 8-14  
configuration steps, 5-29  
current/voltage range, 5-31  
default/hold last state, 5-34  
fault reporting, 5-30  
scaling values, 5-32  
Analog inputs, 4-10  
Analog Output Module  
channel active, 5-37  
Bus B LED, 2-2  
Bus Controller version required, 1-9  
Bus Interface Unit  
channel fault reporting, 5-37  
configuration format for datagram, 8-16  
configuring, 5-35  
current/voltage ranges, 5-38  
scaling, 5-39  
I/O memory, 4-2  
installing on terminal block, 3-14  
introduction, 1-3  
Analog outputs, 4-11  
Analog Voltage Output Module  
channel active, 5-86  
removing from terminal block, 3-14  
Bus Redundancy, 1-11  
configuring, 5-11  
Bus switching, 1-11  
Bus Switching Module, 1-12  
data defaults, 5-84  
I/O references, 5-81  
scaling range, 5-87  
Attenuation, C-7  
Auxiliary I/O Terminal Block, 1-4  
C
Cable types, C-4  
Cables  
B
between terminal blocks, 2-8  
installing, 3-8  
Calibration datagram, 8-30  
Channel Active  
Backplane current, 2-4  
Backplane scan times, 4-7  
Baud rate  
configuration, 5-8  
Analog input module, 5-30  
Analog output module, 5-37  
Analog Voltage Output module, 5-86  
Grouped Analog Input module, 5-45, 5-53, 5-60,  
selection guidelines, C-10  
BIU  
backing up outputs with MFP, 4-19  
BIU data types, 4-3  
BIU scanning frequency for Group Data, 5-106  
GFK-0825F  
Index-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
RTD module, 5-68  
Thermocouple module, 5-76  
Circuit configuration  
RTD module, 5-67  
installing Terminal Block, 3-7  
mounting, 3-5  
removing Terminal Block, 3-7  
Discrete Input Module  
/O references, 5-22  
configuration format for datagram, 8-11  
configuration steps, 5-22  
default/hold last state, 5-23  
fault reporting, 5-23  
Clearances required, 3-5  
Communications  
loss of, 4-11  
on Genius bus, 4-9  
Communications buffer, 4-6  
Compatibility among devices, 1-9  
Configuration  
Discrete inputs, 4-10  
Discrete Output Module  
configuration format for datagram, 8-12, 8-13  
configuration steps, 5-24, 5-26  
default/hold last state, 5-25, 5-27, 5-28  
fault reporting, 5-25, 5-27  
creating, 5-4  
datagram format, 8-7  
delete module, 5-21  
modules, 5-15  
I/O references, 5-24, 5-26  
preventing/permitting changes, 5-14  
selectable features, 1-6  
Configuration Mismatch fault, 5-2  
Control wiring, 3-3, C-1  
CPU Redundancy  
Discrete outputs, 4-11  
Display and clear faults from LM90-70, 6-5  
Duplex CPU redundancy, 1-10, 5-12  
configuring, 5-12  
E
CRC checking, C-11  
Current/voltage range  
configuring for analog input module, 5-31  
configuring for analog output module, 5-38  
EEPROM  
remove and replace, 3-16  
Enclosures, 3-5  
Equipment required with Field Control, 1-9  
ESD protection, 3-2  
D
Data defaults  
F
Analog Grouped Input module, 5-42, 5-50, 5-58,  
Analog Voltage Output module, 5-84  
Micro Field Processor data, 5-101  
RTD module, 5-66  
Fault Report datagram, 8-5  
Fault Reporting  
Analog input module, 5-30  
Analog output module, 5-37  
configuration, 5-23  
Thermocouple input module, 5-74  
Data types for BIU, 4-3  
Datagrams for the BIU  
Analog Module Recalibration, 8-30  
list of, 8-2  
configuring for the Bus Interface Unit, 5-10  
Discrete output module, 5-25, 5-27  
Faults  
clearing, 6-3  
Read Configuration Data, 8-7  
Read Configuration Reply, 8-8  
Read I/O Forces, 8-32  
Read I/O Forces Reply, 8-32  
Read Map, 8-3  
display with Logicmaster 90-70, 6-5  
handling by Field Processor, 6-2  
Features, 1-1  
Fiber optics, C-11  
Filtering  
Read Map Reply, 8-3  
configuring for Grouped Analog Input module,  
Firmware upgrade, 3-16  
Forcing I/O data, 7-2, 7-5  
Functional specifications, 2-9  
Fuse  
Read Slot Diagnostics, 8-33  
Read Slot Diagnostics Reply, 8-33  
Report Fault datagram format, 8-5, 8-7  
Write Configuration, 8-8  
Write Map, 8-4  
Default/Hold Last State  
Analog input module, 5-34  
Analog output module, 5-36  
Discrete input module, 5-23  
discrete output module, 5-25, 5-27, 5-28  
Dimensions of BIU, 2-1  
DIN rail  
replacing, 3-15  
G
Genius Field Processor  
Index-2  
Field Control™ Genius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual– October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
configuration format for datagram, 8-10, 8-27  
Genius systems with Field Control, 1-7  
Grounding, C-11  
BIU Terminal Block, 3-9  
system, 3-4  
Group Data, 4-6  
BIU reads from other modules, 4-5  
Group Data moves, 4-4  
Group Data Moves  
Analog input module, 5-29  
Analog Voltage Output module, 5-81  
discrete input module, 5-22  
discrete output module, 5-24, 5-26  
for analog output module, 5-35  
Micro Field Processor's internal, 4-14  
RTD module, 5-64  
Thermocouple module, 5-72  
I/O scanning  
enable/disable, 5-15  
I/O Table display  
configuration, D-4, D-6  
configuring, 5-102  
LM90-70, 7-6  
I/O Table memory for S6 or S5 PLC, 5-9  
I/O Terminal Blocks  
introduction, 1-4  
Input power requirements, 2-4  
Input Range  
Grouped Analog Input module, 5-45, 5-53, 5-61,  
Inputs, 4-10  
H
Hand-held Monitor  
used to clear faults, 6-3  
used to monitor I/O data, 7-3  
Hand-held Monitor Connector, 3-2  
Hand-held Monitor  
attaching to BIU for configuration, 5-3  
connector on BIU, 2-1  
reading, 4-5  
Intelligent modules, 4-6  
version required with Field Control, 1-9  
HHM Menus for Field Control, 5-5  
Hold Last State/Default  
Analog input module, 5-34  
Analog output Module, 5-36  
Discrete input module, 5-23  
discrete output module, 5-25, 5-27, 5-28  
Host computer, 1-7  
L
LEDs, 2-2  
Line Frequency  
Grouped Analog Input module, 5-43, 5-51, 5-59  
RTD module, 5-66  
Thermocouple input module, 5-75  
Load requirements, 2-6  
Locations for I/O modules, 3-5  
Logic power, 2-3  
handles input data from BIU, 4-10  
I/O service, 7-7  
Host CPU, 1-7  
Hot Insertion, 2-7  
Hot standby redundancy, 1-10, 5-12  
Humidity specification, 1-5  
Logicmaster 90-70  
monitoring I/O data, 7-6  
software version required, 1-9  
I
M
I/O data  
Micro Field Processor  
backing up outputs, 4-17  
backing up outputs from network, 4-18  
configuring, 5-99  
forcing, 7-2, 7-5  
handling, 7-2  
override, 7-2, 7-6  
transfer with host, 4-9  
I/O Fault Table at PLC, 6-5  
I/O Map, 4-2  
configuring data for the BIU, 5-16  
I/O memory, 4-2  
I/O module  
data defaults, 5-101  
I/O references, 5-100  
introduction, 1-3  
operation with BIU, 4-14  
reference parameters, 5-99  
Module current requirements, 2-6  
Module versions required for Hot Insertion, 2-7  
Modules  
elete configuration, 5-21  
I/O modules  
introduction, 1-3  
locations for, 3-5  
read ID with HHM, 5-21  
BIU Terminal Block, 1-3  
Bus Interface Unit, 1-3  
I/O modules, 1-3  
I/O Terminal Blocks, 1-4  
Micro Field Processor, 1-3  
types of, 1-2  
I/O references  
Analog Grouped Input module, 5-40, 5-48, 5-56,  
GFK-0825F  
Index  
Index-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Thermocouple module, 5-77  
Read Configuration datagram, 8-7  
Read Configuration Reply datagram, 8-8  
Read I/O Forces datagram, 8-32  
Read Map datagram, 8-3  
Read Map Reply datagram, 8-3  
Read Slot Diagnostics datagram, 8-33  
Redundancy  
Monitoring I/O data with an HHM, 7-3  
Mounting clearances, 3-5  
Mounting positions, 3-5  
Mounting screws, 3-5  
N
Network communications  
disable, 5-15  
bus  
configuring, 5-11  
bus  
description, 1-11  
CPU  
Noise  
preventing, 3-3  
providing transient protection, 3-9  
specifications, 1-5  
configuring, 5-12  
description, 1-10  
O
Reference address, 4-2  
Reference Junction Compensation  
Thermocouple module, 5-79  
Reference Junction Value  
Thermocouple module, 5-79  
Reference Parameters, 4-6  
16-Point Grouped Analog Input module, 5-40,  
Offset Adjustment  
Thermocouple module, 5-80  
Open Thermocouple diagnostic, 5-75  
Operating mode, 8-29  
Output Default Time, 5-11  
Output defaults, 4-11  
Outputs  
8-Point Analog Voltage Output module, 5-81  
BIU reads from modules, 4-5  
description, 4-3  
backing up with MFP, 4-19  
for conventional modules, 4-6  
sent by host, 4-11  
for Micro Field Processor, 5-99  
RTD Input module, 5-64  
Thermocouple Input module, 5-72  
Register memory for S6 or S5 PLC, 5-9, 7-6  
Report Fault datagram, 8-5  
RTD Input module  
Overriding I/O, 7-2, 7-6  
P
Panel mounting, 3-5  
PLC Fault Table, 6-5  
PLC types, 1-7  
alarm limits, 5-70  
channel active, 5-68  
configuration, 5-64  
data defaults, 5-66  
I/O references, 5-64  
line frequency, 5-66  
resistance, 5-71  
RTD type, 5-69  
Power  
specifications, 2-9  
wiring  
general information, 3-3  
wiring to BIU Terminal Block, 3-9  
Power LED, 2-2  
RTD wire type, 5-69  
types of units, 5-68  
Power Supply  
RTD Resistance  
input power requirements, 2-4  
specifications, 2-9  
timing, 2-3  
configuring, 5-71  
RTD type for RTD module, 5-69  
RUN LED, 2-2  
Power wiring, C-1  
Preinstallation check, 3-2  
Program sweep  
of Micro Field Processor, 4-14  
Propagation delays, C-7  
Protocols, 1-3  
S
Scaling  
Grouped Analog Input module, 5-46, 5-54, 5-62,  
Scaling Range  
Analog Voltage Output module, 5-87  
Scaling values  
R
Rack number, 5-20  
Range  
Analog input module, 5-32  
Index-4  
Field Control™ Genius® Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual– October 1999  
GFK-0825F  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Analog output module, 5-39  
example, A-5  
in millivolts or microamps, A-1  
measuring, A-4  
Thermocouple Input module  
Alarm Limits, 5-78  
Channel Active, 5-76  
configuration steps, 5-72  
data defaults, 5-74  
Scan times, 4-7  
I/O references, 5-72  
Line frequency, 5-75  
Offset, 5-80  
Open Thermocouple diagnostic, 5-75  
Range Type, 5-77  
Selective sweep, 4-4  
Serial Bus Address  
assigning to new BIU, 5-4  
changing with the HHM, 5-7  
configuring, 5-2  
Reference Junction Compensation, 5-79  
Reference Junction value, 5-79  
Thermocouple type, 5-77  
Units, 5-76  
Series 90-70 PLC  
handles input data from BIU, 4-10  
Series 90-70 PLC  
Bus Controller version, 1-9  
configuration special instructions, 5-2  
CPU version required for Field Control, 1-9  
Series Five PLC  
Thermocouple type  
configuring, 5-77  
Throughput, 4-13  
Timing, 4-12  
Bus Controller version, 1-9  
fault clearing, 6-5  
handles input data from BIU, 4-10  
monitoring I/O data, 7-6  
reference address, 5-9  
U
Units  
version required, 1-9  
RTD module, 5-68  
Thermocouple module, 5-76  
Series Six PLC  
Bus Controller version, 1-9  
fault clearing, 6-5  
handles input data from BIU, 4-10  
monitoring I/O data, 7-6  
reference address, 5-9  
V
Vibration specification, 1-5  
Voltage attenuation, C-7  
version required, 1-9  
Set BIU Mode datagram, 8-29  
Set Micro Field Processor Mode datagram,  
Signal wiring, 3-3, C-1  
Slot number, 5-20  
W
Wire type for RTD module, 5-69  
Wiring guidelines, 3-3, C-1  
Write Configuration datagram, 8-8  
Write Map datagram, 8-4  
Specifications. See individual I/O module  
datasheets  
electrical, 2-9  
environmental, 1-5  
noise, 1-5  
temperature, 1-5  
vibration, 1-5  
Standards, 1-5  
Suppression  
at the communications line, B-2  
Surge suppressors, C-11  
Synchronization, 4-14  
Synchronization module, 4-5, 4-6  
Synchronous operation of BIU and MFP, 4-16  
T
Temperature specifications, 1-5  
Terminal Block  
installing on DIN rail, 3-7  
removing from DIN rail, 3-7  
Terminating the bus, 3-11, C-4  
GFK-0825F  
Index  
Index-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Eagle Electronics Fish Finder 642c User Manual
Eureka Server OL 8880 01 User Manual
Extron electronic Network Card VSC 700 900 SDI OUTPUT CARD User Manual
Extron electronic TV Cables 101 PLUS User Manual
FujiFilm Digital Camera 16162434 User Manual
Fujitsu Air Conditioner AOU18CXQ User Manual
Furuno Medical Alarms BR 500 User Manual
Garland Oven G36 2G24R User Manual
GE Cooktop JGP656 User Manual
Gianni Industries Door LHS 50 User Manual